3-060-791-11 (1)




Digital
Video Camera
Recorder
Operating Instructions
Before operating the unit, please read this manual thoroughly,
and retain it for future reference.

Owner’s Record
The model and serial numbers are located on the bottom. Record the
serial number in the space provided below. Refer to these numbers
whenever you call upon your Sony dealer regarding this product.
Model No. DCR-VX2000                   Model No. AC-

Serial No.                             Serial No.




DCR-VX2000

©2000 Sony Corporation
Welcome!
      Congratulations on your purchase of this Sony Digital Handycam camcorder. With your Digital
      Handycam, you can capture life’s precious moments with superior picture and sound quality. Your Digital
      Handycam is loaded with advanced features, but at the same time it is very easy to use. You will soon be
      producing home video that you can enjoy for years to come.

                                                            For the customers in the U.S.A.
     WARNING                                                If you have any questions about this product, you
                                                            may call: Sony Customer Information Center 1-
    To prevent fire or shock hazard, do                     800-222-SONY (7669) or write to: Sony Customer
    not expose the unit to rain or                          Information Center 1 Sony Drive, Mail Drop #T1-
                                                            11, Park Ridge, NJ 07656
    moisture.
                                                                  Declaration of Conformity
                                                              Trade Name:             SONY
                                                              Model No.:              DCR-VX2000
                                                              Responsible Party:      Sony Electronics Inc.
                                                              Address:                1 Sony Drive, Park Ridge, NJ,
                                                                                      07656 USA
                                                              Telephone No.:          201-930-6972
                                                              This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
                                                              Operation is subject to the following two
                                                              conditions.: (1) This device may not cause harmful
                                                              interference, and (2) this device must accept any
                                                              interference received, including interference that
                                                              may cause undesired operation.

                                                            CAUTION
                                                            You are cautioned that any changes or modifications
                       This symbol is intended to alert     not expressly approved in this manual could void your
                       the user to the presence of          authority to operate this equipment.
                       uninsulated “dangerous voltage”
                       within the product’s enclosure       Note:
                       that may be of sufficient            This equipment has been tested and found to comply
                       magnitude to constitute a risk of    with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
                       electric shock to persons.           Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
                                                            provide reasonable protection against harmful
                       This symbol is intended to alert     interference in a residential installation. This
                       the user to the presence of          equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
                                                            frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
                       important operating and
                                                            accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
                       maintenance (servicing)              interference to radio communications. However, there
                       instructions in the literature       is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
                       accompanying the appliance.          particular installation. If this equipment does cause
                                                            harmful interference to radio or television reception,
    Never expose the battery pack to temperatures           which can be determined by turning the equipment off
    above 140 °F (60 °C) such as in a car parked in         and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
    the sun or under direct sunlight.                       interference by one or more of the following measures:
                                                            — Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
    For customers in the U.S.A. and                         — Increase the separation between the equipment and
    CANADA                                                      receiver.
                                                            — Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit
    DISPOSAL OF LITHIUM ION BATTERY.                            different from that to which the receiver is connected.
    LITHIUM ION BATTERY.                                    — Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV
    DISPOSE OF PROPERLY.                                        technician for help.
    You can return your unwanted lithium ion batteries      For customers in CANADA
    to your nearest Sony Service Center or Factory
    Service Center.
                                                            CAUTION
                                                            TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE
    Note: In some areas the disposal of lithium ion         BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.
            batteries in household or business trash may
            be prohibited.                                  “Memory Stick”
    For the Sony Service Center nearest you call            For the customers in the U.S.A.
    1-800-222-SONY (United States only).                    This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
    For the Sony Factory Service Center nearest you call    Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
    416-499-SONY (Canada only).                             This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
                                                            this device must accept any interference received,
    Caution: Do not handle damaged or leaking lithium       including interference that may cause undesired operation.
             ion battery.
                                                            For customers in CANADA
                                                            This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian
2                                                           ICES-003.
Table of contents
Quick Start Guide ............................................... 4     Editing
Getting started                                                         Dubbing a tape .................................................. 73
Using this manual ............................................... 6     Dubbing only desired scenes
Checking supplied accessories ......................... 8                 – Digital program editing ............................. 75
Step 1 Preparing the power supply ................ 9                    Using with an analog video unit and a PC
Step 2 Inserting a cassette ............................... 14            – Signal convert function .............................. 86
                                                                        Recording video or TV programs .................. 87
Recording – Basics                                                      Inserting a scene from a VCR
Recording a picture .......................................... 15         – Insert editing ............................................... 91
       Shooting backlit subjects (BACK                                  Audio dubbing .................................................. 93
           LIGHT) .......................................... 22         Superimposing a title ....................................... 97
       Using the spot light function ............ 23                    Making your own titles .................................. 101
       Self-timer recording ........................... 24              Labeling a cassette .......................................... 103
                                                                        Erasing the cassette memory data ................ 105
Checking the recording – END SEARCH /
 EDITSEARCH / Rec Review ....................... 25                     Customizing Your Camcorder
Playback – Basics                                                       Changing the menu settings ......................... 107
                                                                        Resetting the date and time ........................... 114
Playing back a tape ........................................... 26
Viewing the recording on TV ......................... 30                “Memory Stick” Operations
Advanced Recording Operations                                           Using a “Memory Stick” – introduction ...... 115
                                                                        Recording still images on a “Memory Stick”
Recording a still image on a tape
                                                                         – Memory Photo recording ........................ 120
  – Tape Photo recording ................................. 31
                                                                        Superimposing a still image in a “Memory
Shooting with all the pixels
                                                                         Stick” on a moving picture
  – PROG. SCAN ............................................... 34
                                                                         – MEMORY MIX .......................................... 124
Using the guide frame ..................................... 35
                                                                        Recording an image from a mini DV tape as a
Using the wide mode ....................................... 36
                                                                         still image ...................................................... 127
Using the fader function .................................. 37
                                                                        Copying still images from a mini DV tape
Using special effects – Picture effect .............. 39
                                                                         – Photo save .................................................. 130
Using special effects – Digital effect .............. 40
                                                                        Viewing a still picture – Memory Photo
Shooting with manual adjustment ................. 43
                                                                         playback ........................................................ 132
Adjusting the white balance ........................... 49
                                                                        Copying an image recorded on a “Memory
Adjusting recording level manually – Sound
                                                                         Stick” to mini DV tapes ............................... 135
  recording level ................................................ 51
                                                                        Playing back images continuously
Presetting the adjustment for picture quality
                                                                         – SLIDE SHOW ............................................ 137
  – Custom preset ............................................. 53
                                                                        Preventing accidental erasure
Using the PROGRAM AE function ................ 55
                                                                         – Image protection ....................................... 138
Focusing manually ........................................... 58
                                                                        Deleting images .............................................. 139
Interval recording ............................................. 59
                                                                        Writing a print mark – Print mark ............... 142
Frame by frame recording – Cut recording .. 61
Marking an Index ............................................. 62       Additional Information
Advanced Playback Operations                                            Usable cassettes ............................................... 143
                                                                        About i.LINK ................................................... 145
Quickly locating a scene using the zero set
                                                                        Troubleshooting .............................................. 146
 memory function ........................................... 63
                                                                        Self-diagnosis display .................................... 152
Searching for a recording by index
                                                                        Warning indicators and messages ............... 153
 – Index search ................................................. 64
                                                                        Using your camcorder abroad ...................... 155
Searching the boundaries of recorded tape by
                                                                        Maintenance information and
 title – Title search ........................................... 66
                                                                         precautions ................................................... 156
Searching a recording by date
                                                                        Specifications ................................................... 161
 – Date search ................................................... 67
Searching for a photo                                                   Quick Reference
 – Photo search/Photo scan ........................... 69               Identifying the parts and controls ................ 162
Playing back a tape with picture effects ........ 71                    Quick Function Guide .................................... 170
Playing back a tape with digital effects ......... 72                   Index ................................................................. 171
                                                                                                                                                      3
Quick Start Guide


                                                      This guide introduces you to the basic way of recording/
                                                      playback. See the pages in parentheses “( )” for more
                                                      information.




                          Connecting the power cord                         (p. 13)
                        Use the battery pack when using your camcorder outdoors (p. 9).
                                                    Connect the plug with its
                                                    v mark facing toward the
                                                    LCD panel side.

                        AC power adaptor
                                                                                            Open the DC IN jack
                        (supplied)
                                                                                            cover.
Quick Start Guide




                          Inserting a cassette (p. 14)

                    1   While pressing the            2    Push the middle              3   Close the cassette
                        small blue button on               portion of the back of           compartment by
                        the EJECT switch,                  the cassette to insert it.       pressing the PUSH
                        slide it in the direction          Insert the cassette into         mark on it.
                        of the arrow.                      the cassette
                                                           compartment with the         4   Close the cassette lid
                                                           window facing out                by pressing the
                                                           and the write-protect            PUSH button on the
                                                           tab facing upward.               cassette lid.
                                                                     Window




                                                                                                           PUSH




4                                                           Write-protect tab
Recording a picture                                (p. 15)

Viewfinder
When the LCD panel                                                                     1    Remove the hood cap.
is closed, use the
viewfinder placing
your eye against its
eyecup.


 4       Press START/                                                                 2    Set the POWER switch to
         STOP. Your                                                                        CAMERA while pressing the
         camcorder                                                                         small green button. The date
         starts                                                                            and time is indicated for five
         recording. To                                                                     seconds.
         stop recording,
                                                                                                                      POWER
         press START/




                                                                                                              VCR
         STOP again.                3          Slide OPEN




                                                                                                        (CHG)
                                                                         OPEN




                                                                                                         OFF CAMERA
                   POWER                       back in the
           VCR




                                               B mark




                                                                                                                      MEMORY
     (CHG)




                                               direction to
      OFF CAMERA




                                                                                                                               Quick Start Guide
                                               open the                                    If the ND1 or ND2 indicator
                   MEMORY




                                               LCD panel.                                  flashes, see page 46.



                            Monitoring the playback picture on the LCD
                            screen (p. 26)

                                                      POWER
 1        Set the POWER
                                              VCR




          switch to VCR while
                                        (CHG)
                                         OFF CAMERA




          pressing the small
                                                      MEMORY




          green button.
                                                                                NOTE
                                                                                Do not pick up your camcorder by holding
                                                                                the viewfinder, the LCD panel, the battery
                                                                                pack, or the microphone.




 2       Press m to rewind the                                 REW
         tape.
 3       Press N to start                                      PLAY
         playback.

                                                                                                                                    5
— Getting started —

    Using this manual
            As you read through this manual, buttons and settings on your camcorder are shown in
            capital letters.

            e.g. Set the POWER switch to CAMERA.

            When you carry out an operation, you can hear a beep or a melody sound to indicate
            that the operation is being carried out.

     Note on cassette memory
            Your camcorder is based on the DV format. You can only use mini DV cassettes with
            your camcorder. We recommend that you use a tape with cassette memory      .

            The functions which require different operations depending on whether or not the tape
            has cassette memory are:
            •Searching the end point of the recording – end search (p. 25, 29)
            •Searching a recording by index – index search (p. 64)
            •Searching a recording by date – date search (p. 67)
            •Searching for a photo – photo search (p. 69).
            The functions you can operate only with cassette memory are:
            •Searching the boundaries of recorded tape by title – title search (p. 66)
            •Superimposing a title (p. 97)
            •Making your own titles (p. 101)
            •Labeling a cassette (p. 103).
            For details, see page 143.

                   You see this mark in the introduction of the features that are operated only with
                   cassette memory.
            Tapes with cassette memory are marked with        (Cassette Memory).




6
Using this manual

 Note on TV color systems
         TV color systems differ from country to country. To view your recordings on a TV, you
         need an NTSC system-based TV.




                                                                                                 Getting started
 Copyright precautions
         Television programs, films, video tapes, and other materials may be copyrighted.
         Unauthorized recording of such materials may be contrary to the provision of the
         copyright laws.

 Precautions on camcorder care
         •The LCD screen and the viewfinder are manufactured using high-precision
          technology. However, there may be some tiny black points and/or bright points
          (red, blue, green or white) that constantly appear on the LCD screen and in the
          viewfinder. These points occur normally in the manufacturing process and do
          not affect the recorded picture in any way. Effective ratio of pixels and/or screen
          is 99.99% or more.
         •Do not let your camcorder get wet. Keep your camcorder away from rain and sea
          water. Letting your camcorder get wet may cause your camcorder to malfunction.
          Sometimes this malfunction cannot be repaired [a].
         •Never leave your camcorder exposed to temperatures above 60 °C (140 °F), such as in
          a car parked in the sun or under direct sunlight [b].
         •Do not place your camcorder so as to point the viewfinder or the LCD screen or lens
          toward the sun. The inside of the viewfinder, LCD screen, or lens may be damaged
          [c].


[a]                             [b]                               [c]




 Contents of the recording cannot be compensated if recording or playback is not made due to a
 malfunction of the camcorder, video tape, etc.




                                                                                                                   7
Checking supplied accessories
             Make sure that the following accessories are supplied with your camcorder.


     1                      2                                               3




     4                      5                                               6




     7                      8                       9                       0




     qa                     qs




    1 Wireless Remote Commander (1)                 7 A/V connecting cable (1) (p. 30, 73)
      (p. 167)
                                                    8 Hood cap (1) (p. 15)
    2 AC-L10A/L10B/L10C AC power
                                                    9 Shoulder strap (1) (p. 165)
      adaptor (1), Power cord (1) (p. 10)
                                                    0 Application software: PictureGear
    3 NP-F330 battery pack (1) (p. 9, 10)
                                                      4.1Lite (CD ROM) (1) (p. 134)
    4 Size AA (R6) battery for Remote
                                                    qa Lens hood (1) (p. 164)
      Commander (2) (p. 168)
                                                    qs Eyecup (large) (1) (p. 19)
    5 Memory Stick Reader/Writer (1), USB
      cable (1)
    6 “Memory Stick” (1) (p. 115)




8
Step 1 Preparing the power supply
Installing the battery pack
      Install the battery pack to use your camcorder outdoors.

      (1) Lift up the viewfinder.




                                                                                              Getting started
      (2) Insert the battery pack in the direction of the V mark on the battery pack. Slide
          the battery pack until it is locked.




1                                             2




      To remove the battery pack
      Lift up the viewfinder.
      Slide the battery pack out in the direction of the arrow while pressing BATT RELEASE
      down.



                                                                 BATT
                                                                 RELEASE




                                                                                                                9
Step 1 Preparing the power supply

      Charging the battery pack
            Use the battery pack after charging it.
            Your camcorder operates only with the “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack (L series).
            (1) Open the DC IN jack cover and connect the AC power adaptor supplied with
                your camcorder to the DC IN jack with the plug’s v mark facing toward the
                LCD panel side.
            (2) Connect the power cord to the AC power adaptor.
            (3) Connect the power cord to a wall outlet.
            (4) Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG). Charging begins.
            The remaining battery time is indicated in minutes on the display window.
            When the remaining battery indicator changes to u, normal charge is completed. To
            fully charge the battery (full charge), leave the battery pack attached for about one hour
            after normal charge is completed until FULL appears on the display window. Fully
            charging the battery allows you to use the battery longer than usual.




                                                                                     4                   POWER




                                                                                                 VCR
        1

                                                                                           (CHG)
                                                                                            OFF CAMERA
                                                                                                         MEMORY




            After charging the battery pack
            Disconnect the AC power adaptor from the DC IN jack on your camcorder.

            Note on the remaining battery time indicator
            The remaining battery time indicator on the LCD screen/display window or in the
            viewfinder indicates the recording time using the viewfinder. The indicator may not be
            correct, depending on the conditions in which you are recording. When you close the
            LCD panel and open it again, it takes about one minute for the correct remaining
            battery time to be displayed.

            Notes
            •Prevent metallic objects from coming into contact with the metal parts of the DC plug of
             the AC power adaptor. This may cause a short-circuit, damaging the AC power adaptor.
            •Keep the battery pack dry.
            •When the battery pack is not to be used for a long time, charge the battery pack once
10           fully, and then use it until it fully discharges again. Keep the battery pack in a cool place.
Step 1 Preparing the power supply

      Until your camcorder calculates the actual remaining battery time
      “- - - - min” appears in the display window.

      While charging the battery pack, no indicator appears or the indicator flashes in
      the display window in the following cases:




                                                                                           Getting started
      – The battery pack is not installed correctly.
      – The AC power adaptor is disconnected.
      – Something is wrong with the battery pack.

      Charging time
       Battery pack             Full charge (Normal charge)
       NP-F330 (supplied)       150 (90)
       NP-F530/F550             210 (150)
       NP-F730/F730H/F750       300 (240)
       NP-F930/F950             390 (330)
       NP-F960                  420 (360)

      Approximate minutes to charge an empty battery pack

      Recording time
                             Recording with                Recording with
       Battery pack          the viewfinder                the LCD screen
                             Continuous*      Typical**    Continuous*       Typical**
       NP-F330 (supplied)    75 (65)          40 (35)      60 (55)           30 (30)
       NP-F530               120 (110)        65 (60)      100 (90)          55 (50)
       NP-F550               150 (135)        80 (75)      130 (115)         70 (60)
       NP-F730               265 (240)        145 (130)    230 (205)         125 (110)
       NP-F730H/F750         315 (275)        175 (150)    265 (235)         145 (130)
       NP-F930               410 (365)        225 (200)    355 (320)         195 (175)
       NP-F950               475 (430)        265 (240)    405 (360)         225 (200)
       NP-F960               575 (515)        320 (285)    480 (430)         265 (240)

      Approximate minutes of recording time when you use a fully charged battery

      Numbers in parentheses “( )” indicate the time using a normally charged battery.
      You cannot use the NP-500/510/710 battery pack on your camcorder.
      * Approximate continuous recording time at 25 °C (77 °F). The battery life will be
         shorter if you use your camcorder in a cold environment.
      ** Approximate minutes when recording while you repeat recording start/stop,
         zooming and turning the power on/off. The actual battery life may be shorter.




                                                                                                     11
Step 1 Preparing the power supply

           Playing time
            Battery pack            Playing time                 Playing time
                                    on LCD screen                with LCD closed
            NP-F330 (supplied)      90 (80)                      110 (95)
            NP-F530                 150 (135)                    190 (165)
            NP-F550                 185 (165)                    225 (195)
            NP-F730                 305 (275)                    385 (345)
            NP-F730H/F750           375 (335)                    460 (415)
            NP-F930                 475 (430)                    605 (540)
            NP-F950                 570 (510)                    705 (630)
            NP-F960                 680 (610)                    830 (745)

           Approximate minutes of playing time when you use a fully charged battery

           Numbers in parentheses “( )” indicate the time using a normally charged battery.
           The battery life will be shorter if you use your camcorder in a cold environment.
           You cannot use the NP-500/510/710 battery pack on your camcorder.


           Notes
           •The supplied battery pack is charged a little.
           •Some types of the battery packs may not be sold in your region or country.

           What is ”InfoLITHIUM?”
           The “InfoLITHIUM” is a lithium ion battery pack which can exchange data such as
           battery consumption with compatible video equipment. This unit is compatible with the
           “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack (L series). Your camcorder operates only with the
           “InfoLITHIUM” battery. “InfoLITHIUM” battery packs (L series) have the
           mark.
           “InfoLITHIUM” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

           If the camcorder is immediately turned off
           Even if the remaining battery time is enough to operate, charge the battery pack fully
           again. The correct remaining time is displayed.




12
Step 1 Preparing the power supply

 Connecting to a wall outlet
      When you use your camcorder for a long time, we recommend that you power it from a
      wall outlet using the AC power adaptor.
      (1) Open the DC IN jack cover and connect the AC power adaptor to the DC IN




                                                                                              Getting started
          jack on your camcorder with the plug’s v mark facing toward the LCD panel
          side.
      (2) Connect the power cord to the AC power adaptor.
      (3) Connect the power cord to a wall outlet.




 1                                                    2




      Precaution
      The set is not disconnected from the AC power source (house current) as long as it is
      connected to the wall outlet, even if the set itself has been turned off.

      Notes
      •The power cord must only be changed at an authorized service shop.
      •AC power adaptor can supply power even if the battery pack is attached to your
       camcorder.
      •The DC IN jack has source priority. This means that the battery pack cannot supply
       any power if the power cord is connected to the DC IN jack, even when the power
       cord is not plugged into a wall outlet.

      Using a car battery
      Use the Sony DC Adaptor/Charger (not supplied).




                                                                                                        13
Step 2 Inserting a cassette
         (1) Install the power source.
         (2) While pressing the small blue button on the EJECT switch, slide it in the
             direction of the arrow. After the cassette lid is opened, the cassette
             compartment automatically opens.
         (3) Push the middle portion of the back of the cassette to insert it.
             Insert the cassette in a straight line deeply into the cassette compartment with
             the window facing out and the write-protect tab facing upward.
         (4) Close the cassette compartment by pressing the PUSH mark on it.
         (5) Close the cassette lid until it clicks by pressing the PUSH button on the lid.




     2                              3,4           Window            5


                                                                                      PUSH
                                                       PUSH
                                            Write-protect tab



         To eject a cassette
         Follow the procedure above, and take out the cassette in step 3.

         Notes
         •The cassette lid will not be closed when you press any part of the lid other than the
          PUSH button.
         •Do not catch your finger in the cassette lid.

         When you use mini DV cassettes with cassette memory
         Read the instruction about cassette memory to use this function properly (p. 143).

         To prevent accidental erasure
         Slide the write-protect tab on the cassette to the protect position.




         If the grip strap prevents the cassette lid from opening fully
         Adjust the length of the grip strap (p. 165).

         If Q flashes even if the cassette has been inserted
         Press the PUSH button again to close the cover firmly.


14
— Recording – Basics —

Recording a picture
        Your camcorder automatically focuses for you.
        (1) Remove the hood cap and pull the hood cap string to fix it.
        (2) Install the power source and insert a cassette. See “Step 1” and “Step 2” for
            more information (p. 9 to 14).
        (3) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA while pressing the small green button.
            Your camcorder is set to the standby mode.




                                                                                                             Recording – Basics
        (4) Slide OPEN in the direction of the B mark to open the LCD panel.
            The picture now being shot is displayed on the LCD screen, and it disappears
            from the viewfinder screen.
        (5) Press START/STOP. Your camcorder starts recording. The “REC” indicator
            appears. The camera recording lamps located on the front and rear of your
            camcorder light up. To stop recording, press START/STOP again.
            You can use REC START/STOP located on the front instead of START/STOP
            on the rear.


  Camera recording lamps                Microphone
                                                                 1
    4
        OPEN




                                                                                                      LOCK
                                                REC START/STOP          3
        2
                                                                                             POWER
                                                                                    VCR
                                                                            (CHG)
                                                                                OFF CAMERA




    5                  POWER    40min      REC 0:00:01
               VCR




                                                                                             MEMORY
         (CHG)
          OFF CAMERA
                       MEMORY




        If the ND1 or ND2 indicator flashes on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder
        The ND filter is necessary. Set the ND FILTER selector to 1 or 2. However, if you change
        the position during recording, the brightness of the picture may change or audio noise
        may occur. This is not a malfunction. We recommend that you check the position of the
        ND FILTER selector before shooting. See “Using the ND filter” on page 46.

        Notes
        •Fasten the grip strap firmly.
        •Do not touch the microphone during recording.



                                                                                                                   15
Recording a picture

           Note on the recording mode
           Your camcorder records and plays back in SP (standard play) mode and in LP (long
           play) mode. Select SP or LP in the menu settings. In LP mode, you can record 1.5 times
           as long as in SP mode.
           When you record a tape on your camcorder in LP mode, we recommend playing the
           tape on your camcorder.

           Note on the LOCK switch
           When you slide the LOCK switch to the left, the POWER switch can no longer be set to
           MEMORY accidentally. The LOCK switch is set to the right as a default setting. We
           recommend that you set the LOCK switch to the left when you record on a mini DV
           cassette.

           Note on the progressive mode
           If you intend to use the images on your PC or play the images back as still images, we
           recommend that you set PROG. SCAN to ON in the menu settings before shooting (p.
           34). The picture quality may improve in this mode, but if you shoot a moving subject,
           the image may shake when it is played back.

           To enable smooth transition
           Transition between the last scene you recorded and the next scene is smooth as long as
           you do not eject the cassette even if you turn off your camcorder. When you use a tape
           with cassette memory, however, you can make the transition smooth even after ejecting
           the cassette if you use the end search function (p. 25).
           However, check the following:
           •When you change the battery pack, set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).
           •Do not mix recordings in the SP mode and ones in the LP mode on one tape.

           Note on tape transition
           The playback picture may be distorted or the time code may not be written properly
           between scenes when:
           •You change the recording mode (SP/LP).
           •You record in LP mode.

           If you leave your camcorder in standby mode for five minutes while the cassette is
           inserted
           Your camcorder automatically turns off. This is to prevent tape wear and save battery
           power. To resume the standby mode, set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG), and to
           CAMERA again. When a cassette is not inserted, your camcorder does not turn off.




16
Recording a picture

 Adjusting the LCD screen
      The LCD panel is opened up to 90 degrees and it rotates about 90 degrees to the
      viewfinder side and about 180 degrees to the lens side.
      If you turn the LCD panel over so that it faces the other way in standby or recording
      mode, the     indicator appears on the LCD screen and in the viewfinder (Mirror
      mode).




                                                                                                Recording – Basics
                   180°



                   90°




                          OPEN


      To close the LCD panel, set it vertically and swing it into the camcorder body until it
      clicks.

      Note
      When opening the LCD panel, the viewfinder is automatically turned off, however, it is
      not turned off when the LCD panel is turned over or the camcorder is in mirror mode.

      When you use the LCD screen outdoors in direct sunlight
      The LCD screen may be difficult to see. If this happens, we recommend that you use the
      viewfinder.

      When you adjust the angle of the LCD panel
      Make sure that the LCD panel is opened up to 90 degrees.

      When using both the LCD screen and the viewfinder during shooting
      The usable time of the battery pack when using both the LCD screen and the viewfinder
      will be shorter a little than when using the viewfinder only.

      Pictures in the mirror mode
      The picture on the LCD screen is a mirror-image. However, the recording picture will
      be normal.

      During recording in mirror mode
      ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote Commander does not work.

      Indicators in the mirror mode
      The STBY indicator appears as zX and REC as z. Some of the other indicators appear
      mirror-reversed and others are not displayed. However, if you close the LCD panel
      with the LCD screen turned over, indicators appear normally.



                                                                                                      17
Recording a picture

      Adjusting the brightness of the LCD screen
           To adjust the brightness of the LCD screen, press LCD BRIGHT + or –.
           The battery life is longer when the LCD panel is closed. Use the viewfinder instead of
           the LCD screen to save the battery power.




                                        To brighten
                           LCD BRIGHT




                                        To darken




           On the LCD screen backlight
           You can change the brightness of the backlight. Select LCD B.L. in the menu settings
           (p. 107).

           Even if you do the LCD screen adjustment using the LCD BRIGHT +/– buttons, or
           using LCD B.L. and LCD COLOR items in the menu settings
           The recorded picture will not be affected.

      Recording in a low position
           You can record in a low position to get an interesting recording angle. Lift up the
           viewfinder or rotate the LCD panel with the screen facing up to record from a low
           position. In this case, it is useful to use the REC START/STOP button located on the
           front or the camcorder.


                                                                       REC
                                                                       START/
                                                                        STOP




      After recording
           (1)   Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).
           (2)   Close the LCD panel.
           (3)   Eject the cassette.
           (4)   Remove the battery pack.
18
Recording a picture

 Adjusting the viewfinder
      If you record pictures with the LCD panel closed, check the picture with the viewfinder.
      Adjust the viewfinder lens to your eyesight so that the indicators in the viewfinder
      come into sharp focus.

      Lift up the viewfinder and move the viewfinder adjustment lever.




                                                                                                 Recording – Basics
      To adjust the brightness of the viewfinder screen, use the VF B.L. item in the menu
      settings (p. 107).

      Even if you adjust the viewfinder screen backlight
      The recorded picture will not be affected.

      When the shooting conditions are too bright
      Use the supplied large eyecup. Fit it onto the camcorder by stretching the corners a
      little. You can attach it with the large part of it located on both left and right.




                                               2     1
                                               3     4




                                                                                                       19
Recording a picture

      Using the zoom feature
           To zoom using the zoom lever
           Press the power zoom lever a little for a slower zoom. Press it deeper for a faster zoom.
           Using the zoom function sparingly results in better-looking recordings.
           “T” side: for telephoto (subject appears closer)
           “W” side: for wide-angle (subject appears farther away)




                                                             W       T




                                                                                         T
                                                             W       T
                                                                                     W




           When you shoot close to a subject
           If you cannot get a sharp focus, press the “W” side of the power zoom lever until the
           focus is sharp. You can shoot a subject that is at least about 80 cm (about 2 feet 5/8 inch)
           away from the lens surface in the telephoto position, or about 1 cm (about 1/2 inch)
           away in the wide-angle position.

           To zoom using the zoom ring
           Using the zoom ring, you can control the zoom by your desired speed and you can
           make fine adjustments.
           During recording, turn the zoom ring to the desired speed.


                                                                           Zoom ring



                        For wide-angle

                        For telephoto




           Note
           If you turn the zoom ring quickly, the zoom may not respond to the zoom ring.
           Rotate the zoom ring with appropriate speed.




20
Recording a picture

 Using the disital zoom – Zoom greater than 12×
      Zoom greater than 12× is performed digitally, if you set D ZOOM to 24× or 48× in the
      menu settings. The digital zoom function is set to OFF as a default setting (p. 107). If
      you use the digital zoom function, the picture quality deteriorates.




                                                                                                 Recording – Basics
                                                                 W        T

                          The right-ended portion of the bar
                          shows the digital zooming zone.
                          The digital zooming zone appears
                          when you set D ZOOM to 24× or 48×.



      You cannot use the digital zoom:
      – When you set PROG. SCAN to ON in the menu settings (p. 107).
      – When the POWER switch is set to MEMORY.

 Indicators displayed during recording
      The indicators are not recorded on the tapes.

        [a] [b] [c] [d]
         40min        REC    0:00:01   [e]
                             45min
                                       [f]


                    ND1                [g]
       JUL 4 2000         12:05:56PM

        [i]                  [h]

      [a] Remaining battery time indicator
          This appears after you turn on the power and wait for a while.
      [b]Cassette memory indicator
          This appears when using a tape with cassette memory.
      [c] Recording mode indicator
      [d]STBY/REC indicator
      [e] Time code indicator/Tape counter
      [f] Remaining tape indicator
          This appears after you insert a cassette.
      [g]ND filter indicator
          This flashes when the ND FILTER selector should be set. After you have set the ND
          FILTER selector, the ND FILTER position selected is indicated. (When the ND OFF
          position is selected, the indication disappears.)
      [h]Time indicator
          The time is displayed about five seconds after the POWER switch is set to CAMERA
          or MEMORY.
      [i] Date indicator
          The date is displayed about five seconds after the POWER switch is set to CAMERA
          or MEMORY.
                                                                                                       21
Recording a picture

           Time code
           The time code indicates the recording or playback time, “0:00:00” (hours : minutes :
           seconds) in CAMERA mode and “0:00:00:00” (hours : minutes : seconds : frames) in
           VCR mode. You cannot rewrite only the time code. Your camcorder uses the drop
           frame mode.

           Remaining tape indicator
           The indicator may not be displayed accurately depending on the tape.

           Note on recording date/time
           Recording date/time is not displayed during shooting, however, it is automatically
           recorded on the tape. You can check the recording date/time during playback by
           pressing DATA CODE.

      Shooting backlit subjects (BACK LIGHT)
           When you shoot a subject with the light source behind the subject or a subject with a
           light background, use the backlight function.

           Press BACK LIGHT in standby, recording, or memory mode.
           The . indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.
           To cancel, press BACK LIGHT again.




                                                                     FADER BACK LIGHT SPOT LIGHT




                                                                   BACK LIGHT




           If you press one of the following buttons when using the backlight function
           The backlight function will be canceled.
           – SPOT LIGHT
           – EXPOSURE

           When you manually adjust the exposure
           You cannot use the backlight function.




22
Recording a picture

 Using the spot light function
       This function prevents people’s faces, for example, from appearing excessively white
       when shooting subjects lit by strong light, such as in the theater.

       Press SPOT LIGHT in standby, recording, or memory mode.
       The    indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.




                                                                                              Recording – Basics
       To cancel, press SPOT LIGHT again.




                                                                FADER BACK LIGHT SPOT LIGHT




                                                                        SPOT LIGHT




       If you press one of the following buttons when using the spot light function
       The spot light function will be canceled.
       – BACK LIGHT
       – EXPOSURE

       When you manually adjust the exposure
       You cannot use the spot light function.

       You cannot use the spot light mode while in the following settings:
       – Shutter speed value of 1/30 or smaller
       – Old movie
       – Low lux mode of the PROGRAM AE function




                                                                                                    23
Recording a picture

      Self-timer recording
           You can make a recording with the self-timer. This recording is useful when you want
           to record yourself. You can also use the Remote Commander.
           (1) Press     (self-timer) in standby mode. The  (self-timer) indicator appears on
               the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.
           (2) Press START/STOP.
               Self-timer starts counting down from 10 seconds with a beep sound. In the last
               two seconds of the countdown, the beep sound gets faster, then recording
               starts automatically.


                                            START/STOP




                                                                              2                 POWER




                                                                                        VCR
                   1


                                                                                  (CHG)
                                                                                   OFF CAMERA
                                                                                                MEMORY
                        (self-timer)




           To stop the self-timer before recording
           Press START/STOP again.
           Use the Remote Commander for convenience.

           To record still pictures on tapes using the self-timer
           Press PHOTO in step 2 (p. 32).

           To record still pictures on a “Memory Stick” using the self-
           timer
           Press    (self-timer), then press PHOTO in memory mode (p. 123).

           To cancel self-timer recording
           Press   (self-timer) so that the   indicator disappears from the LCD or viewfinder
           screen while your camcorder is in standby mode.

           Note
           The self-timer recording is automatically canceled when:
           – Self-timer recording is finished.
           – The POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG) or VCR.




24
Checking the recording
– END SEARCH / EDITSEARCH / Rec Review
     You can use these buttons to check recorded pictures or shoot so that the transition
     between the last recorded scene and the next scene you will record is smooth.




                                                                         END SEARCH




                                                                                               Recording – Basics
                                                                         EDITSEARCH




Searching the end point of the recording — END SEARCH
     You can easily go to the end of the last recorded portion.

     Press END SEARCH in standby mode.
     The camcorder rewinds or fast-forwards the tape and the last five-second recorded
     picture is played back. After playback the camcorder turns to standby mode. You can
     monitor the sound from the speaker or headphones.

Changing the next recording start point — EDITSEARCH
     You can change the next recording start point in standby mode.

     Hold down the +/– side of EDITSEARCH in standby mode. The recorded picture is
     played back.
     +: to go forward
     – : to go backward
     Release EDITSEARCH to stop playback. If you press START/STOP, re-recording begins
     from the point you released EDITSEARCH. You cannot monitor the sound.

Checking the last recorded picture — Rec Review
     You can check the last recorded portion.

     Press the – 7 side of EDITSEARCH momentarily in standby mode.
     The last few-seconds of picture is played back and the camcorder returns to standby.
     You can monitor the sound from the speaker or headphones.

     End search function
     When you use a tape without cassette memory, the end search function does not work
     once you eject the cassette after you have recorded on the tape. If you use a tape with
     cassette memory, the end search function works even once you eject the cassette.
     If there is a blank portion at the beginning or between the recorded portions, the end
     search function may not work correctly (p. 143).



                                                                                                     25
— Playback – Basics —

     Playing back a tape
             You can monitor the playback picture on the LCD screen. If you close the LCD panel,
             you can monitor the playback picture in the viewfinder. You can also control playback
             using the Remote Commander supplied with your camcorder.
             (1) Install the power source and insert the recorded tape.
             (2) Set the POWER switch to VCR while pressing the small green button. The
                 video control buttons light up.
             (3) Slide OPEN in the direction of the B mark to open the LCD panel.
             (4) Press m to rewind the tape.
             (5) Press N to start playback.
             (6) To adjust the volume, press either of the VOLUME +/– buttons .



                                                         4      REW             5                       PLAY




                                                                                2              POWER




                                                                                       VCR
                                                                                 (CHG)
                                                                                  OFF CAMERA
             6
                                                                                               MEMORY
                 VOLUME




                                                          3 1
             To stop playback
             Press x.




26
Playing back a tape

       When monitoring on the LCD screen
       You can turn the LCD panel over and move it back to the camcorder body with the LCD
       screen facing out.




                                                                                             Playback – Basics
       When you close the LCD panel
       You cannot monitor the sound from the speaker. However, when the LCD panel is
       turned over to view on the LCD screen, you can monitor the sound from the speaker.

 To control the display of the screen indicators
       Press DISPLAY on the camcorder or on the Remote Commander supplied with your
       camcorder.
       The indicators appear on the LCD screen.
       To make the indicators disappear, press DISPLAY again.


                                     DISPLAY




               DATA CODE



                                                                                   DISPLAY




                                                       DATA CODE




                                                                                                   27
Playing back a tape

           Using the data code function
           Your camcorder automatically records not only images on the tape but also the
           recording data (date/time or various settings when recorded) (Data code).

           Press DATA CODE on the camcorder or on the Remote Commander supplied with
           your camcorder in playback mode.

           The display changes as follows:
           date/time t various settings (SteadyShot, white balance, gain, shutter speed, aperture
           value, exposure mode) t no indicator

           Date/time                  Various settings

                                                           [a]
                                                           [b]
                                          AUTO             [c]
            JUL 4 2000                    60 AWB
            12:05:56 AM                F1.6    0dB         [d]
                                                           [e]
                                                           [f]
           [a]   SteadyShot OFF indicator
           [b]   Exposure mode/PROGRAM AE mode indicator
           [c]   White balance indicator
           [d]   Gain indicator
           [e]   Shutter speed indicator
           [f]   Aperture value

           To not display the various settings
           Set DATA CODE to DATE in the menu settings (p. 107).
           The display changes as follows:
           date/time y no indicator

           Recording data
           Recording data is your camcorder’s information when you have recorded something. In
           CAMERA mode, the recording data will not be displayed.

           When you use the data code function, “--- -- ----” (date) or “-- : -- : --” (time)
           appears if:
           – A blank portion of the tape is being played back.
           – The tape is unreadable due to tape damage or noise.
           – The tape was recorded by the camcorder without the date and time set.

           Data code
           When you connect your camcorder to the TV, the data code also appears on the TV
           screen (p. 30).

           Note on the date/time indicator
           Recording date/time is not displayed during shooting, however, it is automatically
           recorded on the tape. You can check the recording date/time during playback by
           pressing DATA CODE.

           If the exposure adjustment is set to minimum
           “CLOSE” is displayed at the location of the aperture value.

28
Playing back a tape

 Various playback modes
      To operate video control buttons, set the POWER switch to VCR.
      To view a still picture (playback pause)
      Press X during playback. To resume normal playback, press N or X.
      To advance the tape
      Press M in stop mode. To resume normal playback, press N.




                                                                                                Playback – Basics
      To rewind the tape
      Press m in stop mode. To resume normal playback, press N.
      To change the playback direction
      Press   on the Remote Commander during playback to reverse the playback direction.
      To resume normal playback, press N.
      To locate a scene monitoring the picture (picture search)
      Keep pressing m or M during playback. To resume normal playback, release the button.
      To monitor the picture at high-speed while advancing or
      rewinding the tape (skip scan)
      Keep pressing m while rewinding or M while advancing the tape. To resume
      rewinding or advancing, release the button.
      To view the picture at slow speed (slow playback)
      Press y during playback. For slow playback in the reverse direction, press      on the
      Remote Commander, then press y. To resume normal playback, press N.
      To view the picture at double speed
      Press ×2 on the Remote Commander during playback. For double speed playback in the
      reverse direction, press , then press ×2 on the Remote Commander. To resume
      normal playback, press N.
      To view the picture frame-by-frame
      Press C on the Remote Commander in playback pause mode. For frame-by-frame
      playback in the reverse direction, press c. To resume normal playback, press N.
      To search the last scene recorded (END SEARCH)
      Press END SEARCH in stop mode. The last five seconds of the recorded portion plays
      back and stops.

      In various playback modes
      •Sound is muted.
      •The previous picture may remain as a mosaic image during playback.
      When the playback pause mode lasts for five minutes
      Your camcorder automatically enters the stop mode. To resume playback, press N.
      Slow playback
      Slow playback can be performed smoothly on your camcorder, however, this function
      does not work for a signal output through the DV IN/OUT jack.
      When you play back a tape in reverse
      Horizontal noise may appear at the center, or the top and bottom of the screen. This is
      not a malfunction.

      If you insert the mini DV cassette recorded in a PAL system
      The camcorder automatically identify the system, and playback starts. You can only
      view the picture on your camcorder. (Quasi PAL playback)
                                                                                                      29
Viewing the recording on TV
           Connect your camcorder to your TV or VCR with the A/V connecting cable supplied
           with your camcorder to watch the playback picture on the TV screen. You can operate
           the video control buttons in the same way as when you monitor playback pictures on
           the LCD screen. When monitoring the playback picture on the TV screen, we
           recommend that you power your camcorder from a wall outlet using the AC power
           adaptor (p. 13). Refer to the operating instructions of your TV or VCR.

           Open the jack cover. Connect your camcorder to the TV using the A/V connecting cable
           supplied with your camcorder. Then, set the TV/VCR selector on the TV to VCR.



                                                     S VIDEO
                                                     VIDEO
                                                     AUDIO L/R
                                                      DV IN/OUT



                                                (not supplied)       IN
                                                                          S VIDEO
                                                      Yellow
                                 AUDIO                                    VIDEO
                                 L/R
                                            White                         AUDIO
           : Signal flow
                                                        Red


     If your TV is connected to a VCR
           Connect your camcorder to the line input on the VCR by using the A/V connecting
           cable supplied with your camcorder. Set the input selector on the VCR to LINE.

     If your TV or VCR is a monaural type
           Connect the yellow plug of the A/V connecting cable to the video input jack and only
           the white plug to the audio input jack on the VCR or the TV. The red plugs are not
           used.

           If your TV or VCR has an S video jack
           Connect using an S video cable (not supplied) to obtain high-quality pictures. With this
           connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/V connecting
           cable. Connect the S video cable (not supplied) to the S video jacks on both your
           camcorder and the TV or the VCR. This connection produces higher quality DV format
           pictures.

           When you adjust the TV screen
           If you monitor the shooting picture, not the playback picture, set COLOR BAR to ON in
           the menu settings (p. 107). The color bar is displayed on the TV screen.




30
— Advanced Recording Operations —

Recording a still image on a tape – Tape Photo recording
       You can record still images on mini DV tapes with all the pixels in the progressive
       mode. See page 34 for details. This mode is useful when you print images using a video
       printer (not supplied).
       Besides the operation described here, your camcorder can record still images on a
       “Memory Stick” (p. 120).
       (1) In standby mode, keep pressing PHOTO lightly until a picture freezes. The
           CAPTURE indicator appears. Recording does not start yet.
           To change the image, release PHOTO, select an image again, and then press
           and hold PHOTO lightly.
       (2) Press PHOTO deeper.
           The still image on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder is recorded for about




                                                                                                Advanced Recording Operations
           seven seconds. The sound during those seven seconds is also recorded.
           The still image is displayed on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder until
           recording is completed.



                                                         1      PHOTO
                                                                                   CAPTURE




                                                         2      PHOTO
                                                                                   •••••••




       The number of still images recordable on a mini DV cassette
       You can record about 510 images in SP mode and about 765 images in LP mode on a 60-
       minute cassette.

       Notes
       •During tape photo recording, you cannot change the mode or setting.
       •The PHOTO button does not work:
        – While the fader function is set or in use.
        – While the digital effect function is set or in use.
       •Do not shake the camcorder during tape photo recording. The recorded image may be
        blurred.

       To do tape photo recording using the Remote Commander
       Press PHOTO on the Remote Commander. Your camcorder immediately records an
       image on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.

       When you do tape photo recording during normal CAMERA recording
       You cannot check an image on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder by pressing PHOTO
       lightly. Press PHOTO deeper. The still image is then recorded for about seven seconds
       and your camcorder returns to standby mode.




                                                                                                          31
Recording a still image on a tape – Tape Photo recording

      Self-timer tape photo recording
            You can make a tape photo recording with the self-timer. This mode is useful when you
            want to record yourself. You can also use the Remote Commander.
            (1) Press    (self-timer) in standby mode. The    (self-timer) indicator appears on
                the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.
            (2) Press PHOTO deeply.
                Self-timer starts counting down from 10 with a beep sound. In the last two
                seconds of the countdown, the beep sound gets faster, then recording starts
                automatically.


                             PHOTO

                                                                              2
                                                                                   PHOTO




              1



            To cancel self-timer recording
            Press    (self-timer) so that the  indicator disappears from the LCD or viewfinder
            screen while your camcorder is in standby mode. You cannot cancel the self-timer
            recording using the Remote Commander.

            Note
            The self-timer recording mode is automatically canceled when:
            – Self-timer tape photo recording is finished.
            – The POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG) or VCR.




32
Recording a still image on a tape – Tape Photo recording

 Printing the still image
       You can print a still image by using a video printer (not supplied). Connect with the
       video printer using the A/V connecting cable supplied with your camcorder.
       Connect the yellow plugs of the cable to the video input of the video printer and the
       VIDEO jack on your camcorder. Refer to the operating instructions of the video printer
       as well.



                                                                        Video printer




                                                                                                Advanced Recording Operations
                                                                           LINE IN
                                               S VIDEO
                                                                       S VIDEO VIDEO



                                                      (not supplied)



                                   VIDEO



                 : Signal flow


       If the video printer is equipped with an S video input
       Use an S video connecting cable (not supplied). Connect it to the S VIDEO jack on your
       camcorder and the S video input of the video printer.




                                                                                                          33
Shooting with all the pixels – PROG. SCAN
                When you handle the digital images on your PC, set PROG. SCAN to ON before
                shooting. You can record the images on a mini DV tape with higher resolution.
                Since the image taken in progressive mode would be stabilized even in pause mode, it
                is especially useful when you analyze high-speed actions such as sports scenes.




                (1)   Press MENU to display the menu in standby mode.
                (2)   Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select    , then press the dial.
                (3)   Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select PROG. SCAN, then press the dial.
                (4)   Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial.
                (5)   Press MENU to erase the menu display. The PROG. SCAN indicator lights up.



     1      MENU                                                2-4          MANUAL SET
                                                                              AUTO SHTR
                                                                              PROG. SCAN



                                                                                  MANUAL SET
                                                                                   AUTO SHTR
                                                                                   PROG. SCAN    OFF
                                                                                    RETURN       ON

                                                                             [MENU] : END


     5                PROG. SCAN
                                                                                         MANUAL SET
                                                                                          AUTO SHTR
                                                                                          PROG. SCAN
                                                                                           RETURN
                                                                                                       ON

         MENU                                                                     [MENU] : END




                                                                                        [MENU] : END




                To return to normal mode
                Select OFF in step 4, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.

                Note on the progressive mode
                A normal TV broadcast divides the screen into two finer fields and displays them in
                turns every 1/60 of a second (Interlace format). Thus, the actual image displayed in an
                instant covers only half of the apparent image area. Displaying the whole image
                simultaneously on a full screen is called displaying with all the pixels. In this mode, the
                resolution of the still picture is clearer than in the normal mode. This camcorder takes in
                an image every 1/15 of a second, which may cause the image of a moving object to go
                out of focus. This camcorder is originally programed to record in the normal TV format.

                When shooting under fluorescent light
                When shooting in progressive mode under fluorescent light or light bulbs, a rare
                phenomenon may happen in which the screen lights up brightly (Flicker phenomenon).
                This is not a malfunction. If you want to stop this phenomenon, set PROG. SCAN to
                OFF in the menu settings.

                On digital zooming
                You cannot use digital zooming in this mode.

34
Using the guide frame
       You can easily make the picture be on a horizontal line using the guide frame. The
       guide frame is not recorded.
       (1)   Press MENU to display the menu in standby mode.
       (2)   Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select    , then press the dial.
       (3)   Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select GUIDEFRAME, then press the dial.
       (4)   Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial.
       (5)   Press MENU to erase the menu display. The guide frame is displayed on the
             LCD screen or in the viewfinder.




                                                                                                  Advanced Recording Operations
1     MENU                                           2-4         LCD / VF SET
                                                                  LCD B. L.
                                                                  LCD COLOR
                                                                  VF B. L.
                                                                  GU I DEFRAME

                                                                       LCD / VF SET
                                                                         LCD B. L.
                                                                         LCD COLOR
                                                                         VF B. L.
                                                                         GU I DEFRAME OFF
                                                                  [MENU] : END
                                                                           RETURN        ON


5   MENU
                                                                               LCD / VF SET
                                                                                LCD B. L.
                                                                                LCD COLOR
                                                                                VF B. L.
                                                                                GU I DEFRAME ON
                                                                       [MENU] : END
                                                                                  RETURN




                                                                             [MENU] : END




       To clear the guide frame
       Select OFF in step 4, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial or simply press DISPLAY.

       Note
       The guide frame indicates only a rough level. The size and position of the guide frame
       do not affect the setting of the camcorder.

       If you set GUIDEFRAME to ON
       The other screen indicators are also displayed on the LCD screen.




                                                                                                            35
Using the wide mode
        You can record a 16:9 wide picture to watch on a 16:9 wide-screen TV (16:9WIDE).
        Black bands appear on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder during recording in
        16:9WIDE mode [a]. The picture during playback on a normal TV [b] or on a wide-
        screen TV [c] is compressed in the widthwise direction. If you set the screen mode of
        the wide-screen TV to the full mode, you can watch pictures of normal images [d].

                                          [b]
        [a]
          16:9WIDE


                                          [c]                               [d]



        In standby mode, set 16:9WIDE to ON in        in the menu settings (p. 107).



                                                          MENU




        To cancel the wide mode
        Set 16:9WIDE to OFF in the menu settings (p. 107).

        In wide mode, you cannot select the following modes:
        •Old movie
        •Progressive mode

        Connection to a TV
        Pictures recorded in 16:9WIDE mode automatically appear on the TV screen at full size
        when you connect your camcorder to a TV that is compatible with the video ID (ID-1/
        ID-2) system and when you connect to the S video input jack on a TV.

        ID-1 system
        The ID-1 system sends aspect ratio information (16:9, 4:3, or letter box) using video
        signals. If you connect a TV compatible with the ID-1 system, the screen size is
        automatically selected.

        ID-2 system
        The ID-2 system sends a copyright protection signal with ID-1 signals inserted between
        video signals when you connect your camcorder to other equipment using an A/V
        connecting cable.

        During recording
        You cannot operate the wide mode function. When you cancel the wide mode, set your
        camcorder to the standby mode and then set 16:9WIDE to OFF in the menu settings.
36
Using the fader function
    You can fade the picture in or out to give your recording a professional appearance.



                [a]     STBY                                                 REC

    FADER




                                                                                            Advanced Recording Operations
    OVERLAP*




    WIPE*




    DOT*
    (Random)


    * Fade in only

                [b]             STBY                                                  REC


    MONOTONE
    When fading in, the picture gradually changes from black-and-white to color.
    When fading out the picture gradually changes from color to black-and-white.




                                                                                                      37
Using the fader function

           (1) When fading in [a]
               In standby mode, press FADER until the desired fader indicator flashes.
               When fading out [b]
               In recording mode, press FADER until the desired fader indicator flashes.
               The indicator changes as follows:
               FADER t MONOTONE t OVERLAP tWIPE tDOTt no indicator
               The last selected fader mode is indicated first.
           (2) Press START/STOP. After the fade in/out is carried out, your camcorder
               automatically returns to the normal mode.




            1    FADER
                            FADER




                                                                              2                   POWER




                                                                                          VCR
                                                                                    (CHG)
                                                                                     OFF CAMERA
                                                                                                  MEMORY
           To cancel the fader function
           Press FADER until the indicator disappears.

           Note
           You cannot use the following functions while using the fader function, and vice versa:
           – Digital effect
           – Low lux mode of PROGRAM AE (Only in OVERLAP, WIPE, or DOT mode)
           – Tape Photo recording
           – Interval recording
           – Cut recording

           When the OVERLAP, WIPE, or DOT indicator appears
           Your camcorder automatically stores the image recorded on a tape. As the image is
           being stored, the fader indicator flashes fast, and the playback picture appears.




38
Using special effects – Picture effect
    You can digitally process images to obtain special effects like those in films or on TV.

    NEG. ART [a] :   The color and brightness of the picture is reversed.
    SEPIA :          The picture gets sepia-toned.
    B&W :            The picture appears in monochrome (black-and-white).
    SOLARIZE [b] :   The light intensity is emphatic, and the picture looks like an illustration.
    SLIM [c] :       The picture expands vertically.
    STRETCH [d] :    The picture expands horizontally.

    [a]               [b]              [c]               [d]




                                                                                                    Advanced Recording Operations
    (1) In standby or recording mode, press PICTURE EFFECT.
    (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired picture effect mode.
        The picture effect indicator changes as follows:
        NEG. ART y SEPIA y B&W y SOLARIZE y SLIM y STRETCH



                                                               1        PICTURE
                                                                        EFFECT




                                                               2


    To cancel the picture effect function
    Press PICTURE EFFECT so that the indicator disappears.

    While using the picture effect function
    You cannot select the old movie mode.

    When you turn the power off
    The picture effect function will be automatically canceled.

    When PROG. SCAN is set to ON in the menu settings
    You cannot select SLIM and STRETCH.




                                                                                                              39
Using special effects – Digital effect
         You can add special effects to recorded pictures using the various digital functions. The
         sound is recorded normally.

         STILL
         You can record a still image so that it is superimposed on a moving picture.

         FLASH (FLASH MOTION)
         You can record still images successively at constant intervals.

         LUMI. (LUMINANCEKEY)
         You can swap a brighter area in a still image with a moving picture.

         TRAIL
         You can record the picture so that an incidental image like a trail is left.

         OLD MOVIE
         You can add an old movie type atmosphere to pictures. The black bands appear on the
         upper and lower of the screen to change the virtual screen size to the cinemascope size,
         and the picture effect is set to SEPIA.

                              Still image                                  Moving picture
         STILL




                              Still image                                  Moving picture
         LUMI.




40
Using special effects – Digital effect

       (1) In standby or recording mode, press DIGITAL EFFECT. The digital effect
           indicator appears.
       (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired digital effect mode.
           The digital effect indicator changes as follows:
           STILL y FLASH y LUMI. y TRAIL y OLD MOVIE
       (3) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. The indicator lights up and the bar appears.
           In STILL and LUMI. modes, the still image is stored in memory.
       (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the effect.

       Items to be adjusted




                                                                                                   Advanced Recording Operations
        STILL                   The rate of the still image you want to superimpose on the
                                moving picture
        FLASH                   The interval of flash motion
        LUMI.                   The color scheme of the area in the still image which is to be
                                swapped with a moving picture
        TRAIL                   The time until the incidental image vanishes
        OLD MOVIE               No adjustment necessary

       The longer the bar on the screen, the stronger the digital effect. The bar appears in the
       following modes: STILL, FLASH, LUMI. and TRAIL.



                                                                      3             LUMI.


          1           DIGITAL
                      EFFECT




                                                                             4
          2             LUMI.




       To cancel the digital effect
       Press DIGITAL EFFECT. The digital effect indicator disappears.




                                                                                                             41
Using special effects – Digital effect

            Notes
            •The following functions do not work in digital effect mode:
             – Fader
             – Low lux mode of PROGRAM AE
             – Tape Photo recording
             – Shutter speed (1/30 or smaller) adjustment
            •The following functions do not work in old movie mode:
             – Wide mode
             – Picture effect
             – PROGRAM AE
             – Spot light mode
             – Shutter speed adjustment

            When you turn the power off
            The digital effect function will be automatically canceled.




42
Shooting with manual adjustment
   Under normal conditions, this unit automatically makes various adjustments as it
   shoots. However, you can adjust the following functions manually to suit your
   preference.

   Functions you can adjust by setting the AUTO LOCK selector to the center (auto
   lock release) position
   Brightness (exposure), shutter speed, white balance, and PROGRAM AE

   Functions you can adjust in menu settings
   Deactivating the SteadyShot




                                                                                           Advanced Recording Operations
   Functions you can adjust by using other selectors/rings
   ND filter, zebra pattern, focus, and zoom

   The following describes how to adjust all the functions mentioned above except white
   balance (p. 49), PROGRAM AE (p. 55), focus (p. 58), and zoom (p. 20).

   AUTO LOCK selector
   Set the selector as shown below to maintain or release the settings of the functions.

                                                      AUTO
                                                      LOCK


                                   [a]
                                         [b]                          [c]

                                                      HOLD


   AUTO LOCK [a]
   Select this position to let the unit adjust all the functions automatically.

   HOLD [b]
   Select this position after setting the functions manually to maintain the settings.

   Manual position (AUTO LOCK release) [c]
   Select this position to adjust the functions listed above manually.

   If you use the video flash light (not supplied)
   We recommend that you set the AUTO LOCK selector to AUTO LOCK.

   Note
   When you manually adjust the exposure during backlight or spot light mode, the
   backlight or spot light function will be automatically canceled.




                                                                                                     43
Shooting with manual adjustment

     Adjusting exposure
           Adjust the exposure manually under the following cases.

           [a]                              [b]




           [a]
           •The background is too bright (back lighting)
           •Insufficient light: most of the picture is dark

           [b]
           •Bright subject and dark background
           •To record the darkness faithfully

           (1) Set the AUTO LOCK selector to the center (auto lock release) position while
               the camcorder is in standby, recording, or memory mode.
           (2) Press EXPOSURE. The exposure indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the
               viewfinder.
           (3) Turn the EXPOSURE dial to adjust the exposure.
               As you turn the dial, the iris value changes between OPEN and CLOSE and the
               gain value changes between 0 dB and 18dB.
               To brighten the picture, adjust the level to the + side.



         2                                                                1
                                                                                 AUTO
                                                                                 LOCK

           •EXP
                 O
                  SU
                    RE




                                                                                 HOLD
                         F5.6 0dB


                                                                          3


           To return to automatic exposure mode
           Set the AUTO LOCK selector to AUTO LOCK or press EXPOSURE. The exposure
           indicator disappears from the LCD or viewfinder screen.

           If you press PROGRAM AE when adjusting the exposure manually
           The exposure comes back to automatic adjustment again.

           When you focus in telephoto
           You cannot choose F1.6 and F2.0.
44
Shooting with manual adjustment

Adjusting the shutter speed
      (1) Set the AUTO LOCK selector to the center (auto lock release) position while
          the camcorder is in standby, recording, or memory mode.
      (2) If the PROGRAM AE indicator is lit, press PROGRAM AE repeatedly until the
          indicator disappears from the LCD or viewfinder screen.
      (3) Press SHUTTER SPEED. The shutter speed indicator appears on the LCD
          screen or in the viewfinder.
      (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired speed. The available
          shutter speed ranges from 1/4 to 1/10000. As you turn the dial, the shutter




                                                                                              Advanced Recording Operations
          speed changes as follows:
          1/4 y 1/8 y 1/15 y 1/30 y ... y 1/4000 y 1/6000 y 1/10000
          To increase the shutter speed, select a smaller setting (large value indicator on
          the LCD screen or in the viewfinder).


                                                                2    PROGRAM
                                                                          AE

       AUTO
 1     LOCK

                                                                3
                                                                SHUTTER
                                                                 SPEED

       HOLD                                                                    60




                                                                4

      To return to automatic shutter speed mode
      Set the AUTO LOCK selector to AUTO LOCK or press SHUTTER SPEED. The shutter
      speed indicator disappears from the LCD or viewfinder screen.

      When shooting at slow shutter speed
      At slow shutter speed, automatic focus may be lost. Use a tripod and adjust the focus
      manually.

      When shooting under fluorescent light or light bulbs
      When shooting under fluorescent light or light bulbs, a rare phenomenon may happen
      in which the screen lights up brightly depending on the shutter speed (Flicker
      phenomenon).

      If you set the shutter speed value to 1/30 or smaller
      You cannot use the spot light (p. 23) and digital effect (p. 40) functions.



                                                                                                        45
Shooting with manual adjustment

     Using the ND filter
           Using the ND filter (the ND filter 1 setting corresponds to 1/4 of the quantity of light
           and the ND filter 2 setting corresponds to 1/32 of the quantity of light), you can record
           a picture clearly by adjusting light amounts, even if you shoot under too bright
           conditions.

           When the ND1 or ND2 indicator flashes on the LCD screen or in
           the viewfinder
           The ND filter is necessary.
           When ND 1 flashes, set the ND FILTER selector to 1 so that the ND 1 indicator lights up
           on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.
           When ND 2 flashes, set the ND FILTER selector to 2 so that the ND 2 indicator lights up
           on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.

           When ND OFF flashes on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder
           The ND filter is not necessary. Set the ND FILTER selector to OFF so that the indicator
           disappears from the LCD or viewfinder screen.
           The ND filter is now deactivated.



                                                                                 ND FILTER


                                                                                   2
                                                                                   1
                                                                                 OFF




           Note
           If you set the ND FILTER selector to another positions during recording, the picture
           may be blurred or audio noise may occur. We recommend that you check the position
           of the ND FILTER selector before shooting.

           If you use the video flash light (not supplied)
           Set the ND FILTER selector to OFF when you use the flash.




46
Shooting with manual adjustment

Shooting with the zebra pattern
      You can set the camcorder to display a zebra pattern (diagonal stripes) in the portion of
      the picture on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder with a subject whose brightness
      exceeds a certain level. The portion of the picture where zebra pattern appears is an area
      of high brightness and overexposure. You can check the picture level of a subject by
      displaying the zebra pattern. Use the zebra pattern as a guide for adjusting the exposure
      and shutter speed so that you can get the desired picture.

      Set the ZEBRA selector to 70 or 100 in standby or memory mode.




                                                                                                   Advanced Recording Operations
                                                                           ZEBRA
                                                                                   OFF


                                                                                   70


                                                                                   100




      Setting    Meaning
      70         The zebra pattern appears in the portion of the picture on the LCD screen
                 or in the viewfinder with a subject whose brightness is about 70 IRE.
      100        The zebra pattern appears in the portion of the picture on the LCD screen
                 or in the viewfinder with a subject whose brightness exceeds more than
                 100 IRE.
      OFF        The zebra pattern does not appear on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.

      To erase the zebra pattern
      Set the ZEBRA selector to OFF.

      Note on shooting with the zebra pattern
      Even though you see the zebra pattern on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder, the
      zebra pattern is not recorded.




                                                                                                             47
Shooting with manual adjustment

     Releasing the SteadyShot function
           When the SteadyShot function is working, the camcorder compensates for camera-
           shake.

           You can release the SteadyShot function when you do not need to use it. The
           indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. Do not use the SteadyShot
           function when shooting a stationary object with a tripod.
           (1)   Press MENU to display the menu in standby or memory mode.
           (2)   Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select   , then press the dial.
           (3)   Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select STEADYSHOT, then press the dial.
           (4)   Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select OFF, then press the dial.
           (5)   Press MENU to erase the menu display.



                                                            2-4
                                                                  CAMERA SET
                                                                   D ZOOM
                                                                   16 : 9W I DE
                                                                   STEADYSHOT
                                                                   FRAME REC
                                                                   I NT. REC


                                                                        CAMERA SET
                                                                          D ZOOM
                                                                   [MENU] 16 : 9W I DE
                                                                          : END
                                                                          STEADYSHOT ON
                                                                          FRAME REC OFF
                                                                           I NT. REC
                                                                             RETURN


          1,5        MENU                                                    CAMERA SET
                                                                               D ZOOM
                                                                        [MENU] 16 : 9W I DE
                                                                               : END
                                                                               STEADYSHOT OFF
                                                                               FRAME REC
                                                                                I NT. REC
                                                                                  RETURN




                                                                             [MENU] : END




           To activate the SteadyShot function again
           Select ON in step 4, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.

           Notes on the SteadyShot function
           •The SteadyShot function will not correct excessive camera-shake.
           •If you use a tele conversion lens (not supplied) or a wide conversion lens (not
            supplied), these lens may influence the SteadyShot function.




48
Adjusting the white balance
     White balance adjustment makes white subjects look white and allows more natural
     color balance for camera recording. Normally, white balance is automatically adjusted.
     You can obtain better results by adjusting the white balance manually when lighting
     conditions change quickly or when recording outdoors: e.g., neon signs, fireworks.
     (1) Set the AUTO LOCK selector to the center (auto lock release) position while
         the camcorder is in standby, recording, or memory mode.
     (2) Press WHT BAL. The white balance indicator appears on the LCD screen or in
         the viewfinder.
     (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the appropriate white balance mode
         under the following conditions. As you turn the dial, the display changes as
         follows:




                                                                                              Advanced Recording Operations
             (One-push white balance) y       (Outdoor) y n (Indoor)



 1
      AUTO
      LOCK                                            2        WHT BAL




                                                      3
      HOLD




     Indicator   Shooting conditions
                 • Adjusting the white balance according to the light source.
                   This operation is not available during recording. Follow the
                   procedure described on the next page to adjust the setting again.
        (Outdoor)• Recording a sunset/sunrise, just after sunset, just before sunrise, neon
                   signs, or fireworks
                 • Under a color matching fluorescent lamp
     n (Indoor) • Lighting condition changes quickly
                 • Too bright a place such as a photography studio
                 • Under sodium lamps or mercury lamps




                                                                                                        49
Adjusting the white balance

           If you have selected            in step 3
           When you set the white balance to one-push white balance mode, the setting is locked
           and maintained even if lighting conditions change. You can achieve recording with
           natural colors without the image being affected by ambient light.
           (With the     indicator on the screen)
           (1) Shoot a white object such as paper fully.
           (2) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.
           The     indicator flashes quickly. When the white balance has been adjusted and stored
           in the memory, the indicator stops flashing. The setting will be maintained even if the
           battery is detached.

           To return to automatic adjustment
           Set the AUTO LOCK selector to AUTO LOCK or press WHT BAL. The white balance
           indicator disappears from the LCD or viewfinder screen.

           Notes on white balance
           •When you shoot with studio lighting or video lighting, use the n (indoor) mode.
           •When you shoot with fluorescent lighting, readjust the white balance using the
            (one-push white balance) mode , or use the automatic white balance mode. If you use
            the n (indoor) mode, white balance may not be adjusted appropriately.

           Shooting when lighting conditions have changed
           •When lighting conditions have changed, readjust the white balance while the
            camcorder is in standby mode.
           •In automatic white balance mode, point your camcorder at a white subject for about
            10 seconds after setting the POWER switch to CAMERA to get a better adjustment
            when:
            – You detach the battery for replacement.
            – You bring your camcorder outdoors from the interior of a house, or vice versa.

           If the   indicator does not stop flashing after you press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial
           The white balance cannot be set. Use the automatic white balance mode.




50
Adjusting recording level manually – Sound
recording level
                   You can adjust the recording sound level. Use headphones to monitor the sound when
                   you adjust it.

                   Setting up the menu
                   (1)      Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or VCR.
                   (2)      Press MENU to display the menu.
                   (3)      Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select   , then press the dial.
                   (4)      Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select MIC LEVEL, then press the dial.
                   (5)      Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select MANUAL, then press the dial.
                   (6)      Press MENU to erase the menu display.




                                                                                                                    Advanced Recording Operations
                   Adjusting the recording level
                   (7) Press AUDIO LEVEL to display the recording level adjustment display in
                       standby or recording mode.
                   (8) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the recording level.


 1                 POWER
           VCR
     (CHG)
      OFF CAMERA




                                                                     7
                   MEMORY




                                                                     AUDIO LEVEL

 2,6                        MENU
                                                                                   [a]
                                                                                                  30 20 12   0 dB




                                                                                                  [b][c]


 3,4                        TAPE SET
                                                                     5              TAPE SET
                             REC MODE                                                REC MODE
                             AUD I O MODE                                            AUD I O MODE
                                REMA I N                                                REMA I N
                             M I C LEVEL                                             M I C LEVEL  AUTO
                                                                                      RETURN      MANUAL
                                  TAPE SET                                                TAPE SET


                                                        8
                                    REC MODE                                                REC MODE
                                    AUD I O MODE                                            AUD I O MODE
                                       REMA I N                                                REMA I N
                             [MENU] M I C LEVEL
                                    : END        AUTO                                       MIC
                                                                                     [MENU] : END LEVEL  MANUAL
                                      RETURN                                                  RETURN




                                   [MENU] : END                                           [MENU] : END




                   [a] Recording level meter
                   [b] Decreases the recording level
                   [c] Increases the recording level

                   To clear the recording level adjustment display
                   Press AUDIO LEVEL again.

                   To adjust the recording level automatically
                   Select AUTO in step 5, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.

                                                                                                                              51
Adjusting recording level manually – Sound recording level

           Notes on the manual adjustment
           •The recording level setting is retained for about five minutes after removing the
            battery.
           •The recording level indicator appears at the lower-right on the LCD screen or in the
            viewfinder.

           The sound input through the AUDIO L/R jacks or        DV IN/OUT jack
           You cannot adjust the recording level.

           When MIC LEVEL is set to AUTO
           You cannot adjust the recording level, however, the recording level adjustment display
           is displayed.




52
Presetting the adjustment for picture
quality – Custom preset
      You can preset the camcorder to record the picture with the desired picture quality.
      When presetting, adjust the picture by shooting a subject and checking the picture
      displayed on a TV using the menu settings.
      (1) Press CUSTOM PRESET to display the CUSTOM PRESET menu in standby or
          memory mode.
      (2) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.
      (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select SET, then press the dial.
      (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial.
      (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired item, then press the dial.
      (6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the selected item, then press the dial.




                                                                                                           Advanced Recording Operations
      (7) Press CUSTOM PRESET.
          The CUSTOM PRESET menu disappears and the indicator         appears on the
          LCD screen or in the viewfinder.


 1        CUSTOM PRESET
           SET        OFF
                            STBY
                                                    2-4         CUSTOM PRESET
                                                                 SET
                                                                 COLOR LVL
                                                                                  OFF
                                                                                          STBY


           COLOR LVL                                             SHARPNESS
 CUSTOM    SHARPNESS                                             WB SH I FT
 PRESET    WB SH I FT                                            AE SH I FT
           AE SH I FT                                            AGC LIMIT
           AGC LIMIT  OFF                                        RESET
           RESET                                                  RETURN
                                                                       CUSTOM PRESET           STBY
                                                                         SET            OFF
                                                                         COLOR LVL
                                                                [CP] : END              ON
                                                                         SHARPNESS
          [CP] : END                                                     WB SH I FT
                                                                         AE SH I FT
                                                                         AGC LIMIT
                                                                         RESET
                                                                          RETURN
                                                                               CUSTOM PRESET        STBY
                                                                                SET           ON
                                                                                COLOR LVL
                                                                        [CP] : END
                                                                                SHARPNESS
                                                                                WB SH I FT
                                                                                AE SH I FT
                                                                                AGC LIMIT


 7
                                                                                RESET
                                                                                  RETURN
      CUSTOM
      PRESET
                                                                            [CP] : END




                                                    5,6         CUSTOM PRESET
                                                                 SET
                                                                 COLOR LVL
                                                                                   STBY


                                                                 SHARPNESS
                                                                 WB SH I FT
                                                                 AE SH I FT
                                                                 AGC LIMIT
                                                                 RESET
                                                                  RETURN
                                                                     CUSTOM PRESET      STBY

                                                                        COLOR LVL
                                                                [CP] : END




                                                                      [CP] : END




                                                                                                                     53
Presetting the adjustment for picture quality

            Items to be adjusted
            Item            Meaning                                  Adjustment value
            COLOR LVL       Color intensity                          Decreases color intensity y
                                                                     Increases color intensity
            SHARPNESS       Sharpness                                Softer y Sharper
            WB SHIFT        White balance                            Bluish y Reddish
            AE SHIFT        Brightness                               –4 y +4
            AGC LIMIT       Auto Gain-limit                          6 dB/12 dB/OFF
            RESET           Sets items above to the default
                            settings.

            To cancel using the custom preset
            Select OFF in step 4, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.

            To return to the standard setting
            Select OK from the RESET item in step 5, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. To
            cancel, select CANCEL, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.

            To check the custom preset setting
            Press CUSTOM PRESET while the camcorder is in standby, recording or memory
            mode.
            The custom preset setting appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.

            Once you adjust AE shift
            The –4 to +4 indicator is displayed on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. The
            number varies corresponding to the AE shift level.

            About the AGC Limit
            When adjusting the exposure manually, the level of the gain is up to 18 dB (OFF).

            When you preset the desired picture quality in CAMERA or memory mode
            The preset is only available in each mode you preset. If you want to use a preset both in
            CAMERA and memory modes, you have to preset in each mode.




54
Using the PROGRAM AE function
     You can select from five PROGRAM AE (Auto Exposure) modes to suit your shooting
     situation, referring to the following.

Selecting the best mode
     Select a proper PROGRAM AE mode referring to the following description.




                                                                                              Advanced Recording Operations
         A: Aperture priority mode
     Selecting the aperture to determine the desired depth of field. Gain and shutter speed
     are automatically set in combination with the aperture value to maintain appropriate
     exposure.

         S: Shutter speed priority mode
     Selecting the shutter speed manually. The exposure value changes in accordance with
     the selected shutter speed.

       : Sports lesson mode
     Capturing high-speed action in sports such as golf or tennis

        : Sunset & Moon mode
     Recording sunset, night views, fireworks or neon signs

       : Low lux mode
     For recording a subject in insufficient light. Subject becomes bright.




                                                                                                        55
Using the PROGRAM AE function

     Using the PROGRAM AE function
           (1) Set the AUTO LOCK selector to the center (auto lock release) position while
               the camcorder is in standby, recording, or memory mode.
           (2) Press PROGRAM AE. The PROGRAM AE indicator appears on the LCD
               screen or in the viewfinder.
           (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired PROGRAM AE mode.
               The PROGRAM AE mode changes as follows:
               Aperture priority mode y Shutter speed priority mode y Sports lesson
               mode y Sunset & Moon mode y Low lux mode
               When you select the aperture priority mode or the shutter speed priority
               mode, press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.
           (4) In aperture priority mode ( A) or shutter speed priority mode ( S), turn
               the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired aperture value (F value) or
               shutter speed.
              Aperture priority mode:
              Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired aperture value. As you
              turn the dial, the F value changes between F1.6 and F11.
              For a smaller aperture, select a higher value. The gain and shutter speed
              change in accordance with the selected aperture value.
              Shutter speed priority mode:
              Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired shutter speed. As you turn
              the dial, shutter speed changes between 1/60 and 1/10000.
              For a faster shutter speed, select a smaller value indicator on the LCD screen or
              in the viewfinder. The gain and aperture values change in accordance with the
              selected shutter speed.

             AUTO
      1      LOCK
                                                        3,4

             HOLD



      2    PROGRAM
             AE




           To cancel using the PROGRAM AE function
           Set the AUTO LOCK selector to AUTO LOCK or press PROGRAM AE. The PROGRAM
           AE indicator disappears from the LCD or viewfinder screen.




56
Using the PROGRAM AE function

      Notes
      •In sports lesson mode, you cannot take close-ups. This is because your camcorder is
       set to focus only on subjects in the middle to far distance.
      •In sunset & moon mode, your camcorder is set to focus only on distant subjects.
      •The old movie mode and the shutter speed adjustment do not work in PROGRAM AE
       mode.
      •The following functions do not work in low lux mode:
       – Digital effect
       – Overlap
       – Wipe
       – Dot




                                                                                                  Advanced Recording Operations
       – Spot light mode
      •While shooting in memory mode, the low lux and sports lesson modes do not work.
       (The indicator flashes.)

      If you are recording under a discharge tube such as a fluorescent lamp, sodium
      lamp or mercury lamp
      Flickering or changes in color may occur in sports lesson mode. If this happens, turn the
      PROGRAM AE function off.

      Even if the PROGRAM AE function is selected
      You can adjust the exposure.

      When you focus in telephoto
      You cannot choose F1.6 and F2.0.

      About the depth of field
      The depth of field is the in-focus range, measured from the distance behind a subject to
      the distance in front. The depth of field can vary with the iris (F value) and the focal
      length. Lowering the F value (large iris) reduces the depth of field. Raising the F value
      (small iris) provides a larger depth of field. Zooming in telephoto position offers a
      smaller depth of field while the depth of field in the wide-angle position is greater.

      The depth of field Shallow                        Deep
      Iris               Near open (Low F value)        Near close (High F value)
      Zoom               Telephoto (T)                  Wide (W)




                                                                                                            57
Focusing manually
         You can gain better results by manually adjusting the focus in the following cases:
         •The autofocus mode is not effective when shooting
          – subjects through glass coated with water droplets
          – horizontal stripes
          – subjects with little contrast with backgrounds such as walls and sky
         •When you want to change the focus from a subject in the foreground to a subject in the
          background
         •Shooting a stationary subject when using a tripod




         (1) Slide FOCUS down to MANUAL in standby, recording, or memory mode. The
             9 indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder in recording,
             standby, or memory mode.
         (2) Turn the focus ring to sharpen the focus.


                     2                                                            1  AUTO
                                                                                           FOCUS


                                                                                     MAN

                                                                                    INFINITY


                                                                                       PUSH AUTO




         To return to the autofocus mode
         Slide FOCUS up to AUTO to turn off the 9 or          indicator.

         To focus in infinity
         Slide FOCUS to INFINITY. The        indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the
         viewfinder. This function is useful when the nearer subject is focused automatically,
         even though you want to focus on a faraway subject.

         To shoot with auto focusing momentarily
         Press PUSH AUTO.
         The auto focus functions while you are pressing PUSH AUTO.
         Use this button to focus on one subject and then another with smooth focusing.
         When you release PUSH AUTO, manual focusing resumes.

         To obtain the correct focus
         First, focus on a subject manually with the zoom set toward the “T” (telephoto) side, then
         adjust the zoom by pressing the “W” side of the lever gradually.

         When you shoot close to the subject
         Focus at the end of the “W” (wide-angle) position.

         9 changes as follows:
          when recording a distant subject.
          when the subject is too close to focus on.
58
Interval recording
       You can make a time-lapse recording by        Example
       setting the camcorder to automatically record    1s                                1s
       and standby sequentially. You can achieve an          9 min 59 s                               9 min 59 s
                                                       [a]                                [a]
       excellent recording for flowering, emergence,
       etc., with this function.                                [b]                                       [b]
                                                                         10 min                   10 min
       [a] Recording time
       [b]Waiting time

       (1)   Press MENU to display the menu in standby mode.
       (2)   Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select   , then press the dial.




                                                                                                                   Advanced Recording Operations
       (3)   Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select INT. REC, then press the dial.
       (4)   Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select SET, then press the dial.
       (5)   Set INTERVAL and REC TIME.
             1 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select INTERVAL, then press the dial.
             2 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired interval time, then
                press the dial.
                The time: 30SEC y 1MIN y 5MIN y 10MIN
             3 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select REC TIME, then press the dial.
             4 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired recording time, then
                press the dial.
                The time: 0.5SEC y 1SEC y 1.5SEC y 2SEC
             5 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select     RETURN, then press the dial
                twice.


 1       MENU                           5

                                        1     CAMERA SET
                                               I NT. REC
                                                                                  2   CAMERA SET
                                                                                       I NT. REC
                                                 I NTERVAL    30SEC                      I NTERVAL    30SEC

 2-4                                             REC T I ME
                                                   RETURN
                                                                                         REC T I ME
                                                                                           RETURN
                                                                                                       1M I N
                                                                                                       5M I N
                                                                                                      10M I N




                                              [MENU] : END                            [MENU] : END
     CAMERA SET
      D ZOOM
      16 : 9W I DE
      STEADYSHOT
                                        3     CAMERA SET
                                               I NT. REC
                                                                                  4   CAMERA SET
                                                                                       I NT. REC
      FRAME REC                                  I NTERVAL                               I NTERVAL
      I NT. REC                                  REC T I ME   0 . 5SEC                   REC T I ME   0 . 5SEC
                                                   RETURN                                  RETURN         1SEC
                                                                                                      1 . 5SEC
                                                                                                          2SEC
          CAMERA SET
            D ZOOM
     [MENU] 16 : 9W I DE
            : END
            STEADYSHOT
            FRAME REC                         [MENU] : END                            [MENU] : END
            I NT. REC    OFF
              RETURN

                CAMERA SET
                  D ZOOM
           [MENU] 16 : 9W I DE
                  : END
                  STEADYSHOT
                  FRAME REC
                  I NT. REC    ON
                    RETURN     OFF
                               SET



                [MENU] : END




                                                                                                                             59
Interval recording

             (6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial.
             (7) Press MENU to erase the menu display. The interval recording indicator
                 flashes.
             (8) Press START/STOP to start interval recording. The interval recording
                 indicator lights up.


                                                       8                   POWER




                                                                   VCR
                                                             (CHG)
                                                              OFF CAMERA
                                                                           MEMORY
                                                  6                                 CAMERA SET
                                                                                     D ZOOM
                                                                                     16 : 9W I DE
                                                                                     STEADYSHOT
                                                                                     FRAME REC
                                                                                     I NT. REC    ON
                                                                                       RETURN


       7   MENU                I NTERVAL
                                                                                    [MENU] : END




             To cancel the interval recording
             •Set INT. REC to OFF in the menu settings.
             •Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG), VCR or MEMORY.

             To stop the interval recording momentarily and perform
             normal recording
             Press START/STOP. You can perform normal recording only once. To cancel the
             normal recording, press START/STOP again.

             Note on interval recording
             You cannot do interval recording in memory mode.

             On recording time
             There may be a discrepancy in recording time of up to +/– 6 frames from the selected
             time.

             Even if you press INDEX MARK during interval recording
             You cannot mark an index.




60
Frame by frame recording – Cut recording
       You can make a recording with a stop-motion animated effect using cut recording. To
       create this effect, alternately move the subject a little and make a cut recording. We
       recommend that you use a tripod, and operate the camcorder using the Remote
       Commander after step 6.
       (1) Press MENU to display the menu in standby mode.
       (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select        , then press the dial.
       (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select FRAME REC, then press the dial.
       (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial.
       (5) Press MENU to erase the menu display.
           The FRAME REC indicator lights up.
       (6) Press START/STOP to start cut recording. The camcorder makes a recording




                                                                                                              Advanced Recording Operations
           for about six frames, and returns to recording standby.
       (7) Move the subject, and repeat step 6.


 1       MENU                                                              6,7
                                                                                             POWER




                                                                                     VCR
                                                                               (CHG)
                                                                                OFF CAMERA
                                                                                             MEMORY
 2-4

     CAMERA SET
      D ZOOM
      16 : 9W I DE
      STEADYSHOT
      FRAME REC
      I NT. REC


          CAMERA SET
            D ZOOM
     [MENU] 16 : 9W I DE
            : END
            STEADYSHOT
                                                     5     MENU
                                                                                                  FRAME REC


            FRAME REC OFF
            I NT. REC    ON
              RETURN

                CAMERA SET
                  D ZOOM
           [MENU] 16 : 9W I DE
                  : END
                  STEADYSHOT
                  FRAME REC ON
                  I NT. REC
                    RETURN




                [MENU] : END




       To cancel the cut recording
       •Set FRAME REC to OFF in the menu settings.
       •Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG), VCR, or MEMORY.

       Notes on cut recording
       •The last recorded cut is longer than other cuts.
       •The proper remaining tape time is not indicated if you use this function continuously.
       •You cannot mark an index during cut recording.




                                                                                                                        61
Marking an Index
         If you mark an index at the scene you want to search for, you can easily search for the
         scene later (p. 64).

         In recording mode [a]:
         Press INDEX MARK.
         The “INDEX MARK” indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder for
         seven seconds and the index is marked after the indicator disappears.
         In standby mode [b]:
         Press INDEX MARK.
         The “INDEX STBY” indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. And
         when you press START/STOP to start recording, the “INDEX MARK” indicator
         appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder for seven seconds. The index is marked
         after the indicator disappears.
         The index signal is marked on the 11th frame from the recording start point (about 0.3
         sec).
         You can mark an index in VCR mode (p. 88).




                                      [a]                      [b]
                                                                         STBY

                                               REC
                                                                                  I NDEX
                                                                                    STBY
                         INDEX MARK
                                                      I NDEX                    REC
                                                       MARK


                                                                                           I NDEX
                                                                                            MARK




         To cancel index marking
         Press INDEX again in standby mode.

         Note on the index
         You cannot mark an index after recording.




62
— Advanced Playback Operations —

Quickly locating a scene using the zero set memory function
       Using the zero set memory function, your camcorder rewinds or advances the tape to
       locate the desired scene, and the searching automatically stops at the scene having a
       tape counter value of “0:00:00.” You can do this with the Remote Commander.
       (1) In playback mode, press DISPLAY if the counter is not on the LCD screen or in
           the viewfinder.
       (2) Press ZERO SET MEMORY at the point you want to locate later. The tape
           counter shows “0:00:00” and the ZERO SET MEMORY indicator flashes.
       (3) Press x when you want to stop playback.
       (4) Press m to rewind the tape to the tape counter’s zero point. The tape stops
           automatically when the tape counter reaches approximately zero. The ZERO
           SET MEMORY indicator disappears and the time code appears.
       (5) Press N. Playback starts.




                                                                                                 Advanced Playback Operations
                                                                 ZERO SET MEMORY
                DISPLAY


                      m                                          N


                       x


       Notes
       •When you press ZERO SET MEMORY again before rewinding the tape, the zero set
        memory function will be canceled.
       •There may be a discrepancy of several seconds from the time code.

       When there is a blank portion between pictures on a tape
       The zero set memory function may not work.

       ZERO SET MEMORY functions also in standby mode
       When you insert a scene in the middle of a recorded tape, press ZERO SET MEMORY at
       the point you want to end the insertion. Rewind the tape to the insert start point, and
       start recording. Recording stops automatically at the tape counter zero point. Your
       camcorder returns to standby mode.




                                                                                                           63
Searching for a recording by index
     – Index search
                             You can automatically search for the point where an index is marked and start playback
                             from that point (Index search). Use a tape with cassette memory for convenience. Use
                             the Remote Commander for this operation.
                             Use this function to check where indexes are marked or to edit the tape at each
                             sequence where the index is marked.

     Searching for the index point using cassette memory
                             You can use this function only when playing back a tape with cassette memory (p. 143).

                             (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
                             (2) Set CM SEARCH in        to ON in the menu settings (p. 107). The default setting
                                 is ON.
                             (3) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly, until the index
                                 search indicator appears.
                                 The indicator changes as follows:
                                 INDEX SEARCH t TITLE SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH
                                 t PHOTO SCAN t no indicator
                             (4) Press . or > on the Remote Commander to select the index point for
                                 playback.
                                 Your camcorder automatically starts playing back at the selected index point.



        1           POWER
                                                                                 3   SEARCH
                                                                                                INDEX SEARCH

                                                                                                1
                                                                                                2
                                                                                                    SEP /
                                                                                                    SEP /
                                                                                                             5
                                                                                                             6
                                                                                                                 /
                                                                                                                 /
                                                                                                                                 CH
                                                                                                                     00 5:30PM CAM
                                                                                                                     00 8:50AM LINE
            VCR




                                                                                      MODE      3   DEC /   24   /   00 10:30AM CAM
                                                                                                4   JAN /    1   /   01 11:25PM CAM
                                                                                                5   FEB /   11   /   01 4:11PM CAM
      (CHG)
       OFF CAMERA




                                                                                                6   APR /   29   /   01 1:45PM CAM
                    MEMORY




                                                                           4                    INDEX SEARCH

                                                                                                1
                                                                                                2
                                                                                                    SEP / 5 / 00 5:30PM CAM
                                                                                                                           CH

                                                                                                    SEP / 6 / 00 8:50AM LINE
                                                                                                3   DEC / 24 / 00 10:30AM CAM
                                                                                                4   JAN / 1 / 01 11:25PM CAM
                                                                                                5   FEB / 11 / 01 4:11PM CAM
                                                                                                6   APR / 29 / 01 1:45PM CAM




                             To stop searching
                             Press x.




64
Searching for a recording by index – Index search

       In the          mark
       •The bar in the        mark indicates the present point on the tape.
       •The mark in the          indicates the actual point you are trying to search for.

       If a tape has a blank portion between recorded portions
       The index search function may not work correctly.

       If you mark an index onto an external input signal
       “LINE” appears in the CH column.

 Searching for the index point without using cassette memory
       (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.




                                                                                            Advanced Playback Operations
       (2) Set CM SEARCH in        to OFF in the menu settings (p. 107). If using a tape
           without cassette memory, skip this step.
       (3) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly, until the index
           search indicator appears.
           The indicator changes as follows:
           INDEX SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH t PHOTO SCAN
           t no indicator
       (4) Press . on the Remote Commander to search for the previous index point
           or press > on the Remote Commander to search for the next index point.
           Your camcorder automatically starts playback at the selected index point. Each
           time you press . or >, your camcorder searches for the previous or next
           index point.

       To stop searching
       Press x.




                                                                                                      65
Searching the boundaries of recorded
     tape by title – Title search
                                    If you use a tape with cassette memory, you can search for the boundaries of
                                    recorded tape by title (Title search) (p. 143). Use the Remote Commander for
                                    this operation.

                             (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
                             (2) Set CM SEARCH in        to ON in the menu settings (p. 107). The default setting
                                 is ON.
                             (3) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly, until the title
                                 search indicator appears.
                                 The indicator changes as follows:
                                 INDEX SEARCH t TITLE SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH
                                 t PHOTO SCAN t no indicator
                             (4) Press . or > on the Remote Commander to select the title for playback.
                                 Your camcorder automatically starts playback of the scene having the title that
                                 you selected.


        1           POWER
                                                                                  3   SEARCH
                                                                                                 TITLE SEARCH

                                                                                                  1
                                                                                                  2
                                                                                                      HELLO!
                                                                                                      CONGRATULATIONS!
            VCR




                                                                                       MODE       3   HAPPY NEW YEAR!
                                                                                                  4   PRESENT
                                                                                                  5   GOOD MORNING
      (CHG)
       OFF CAMERA




                                                                                                  6   WEDDING
                    MEMORY




                                                                             4                   TITLE SEARCH

                                                                                                  3
                                                                                                  4
                                                                                                      HAPPY NEW YEAR!
                                                                                                      PRESENT
                                                                                                  5   GOOD MORNING
                                                                                                  6   WEDDING
                                                                                                  7   NIGHT
                                                                                                  8   BASEBALL




                             To stop searching
                             Press x.

                             If you use a tape without cassette memory
                             You cannot superimpose or search for a title.

                             In the          mark
                             •The bar in the          mark indicates the present point on the tape.
                             •The mark in the            indicates the actual point you are trying to search for.

                             If a tape has a blank portion between recorded portions
                             The title search function may not work correctly.




66
Searching a recording by date
– Date search
                        You can automatically search for the point where the recording date changes and start
                        playback from that point (Date search). Use a tape with cassette memory for
                        convenience. Use the Remote Commander for this operation.
                        Use this function to check where recording dates change or to edit the tape at each
                        recording date.

Searching for the date using cassette memory
                        You can use this function only when playing back a tape with cassette memory (p. 143).

                        (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
                        (2) Set CM SEARCH in        to ON in the menu settings (p. 107). The default setting
                            is ON.




                                                                                                                 Advanced Playback Operations
                        (3) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly, until the date
                            search indicator appears.
                            The indicator changes as follows:
                            INDEX SEARCH t TITLE SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH
                            t PHOTO SCAN t no indicator
                        (4) Press . or > on the Remote Commander to select the date for playback.
                            Your camcorder automatically starts playback at the beginning of the selected
                            date.


   1           POWER
                                                                            3   SEARCH
                                                                                           DATE SEARCH

                                                                                           1
                                                                                           2
                                                                                               SEP / 5 / 00
                                                                                               SEP / 6 / 00
       VCR




                                                                                 MODE      3   DEC / 24 / 00
                                                                                           4   JAN / 1 / 01
                                                                                           5   FEB / 11 / 01
 (CHG)
  OFF CAMERA




                                                                                           6   APR / 29 / 01
               MEMORY




                                                                      4                    DATE SEARCH

                                                                                           1
                                                                                           2
                                                                                               SEP / 5 / 00
                                                                                               SEP / 6 / 00
                                                                                           3   DEC / 24 / 00
                                                                                           4   JAN / 1 / 01
                                                                                           5   FEB / 11 / 01
                                                                                           6   APR / 29 / 01




                        To stop searching
                        Press x.




                                                                                                                           67
Searching a recording by date – Date search

           Note
           If one day’s recording is less than two minutes, your camcorder may not accurately find
           the point where the recording date changes.

           In the          mark
           •The bar in the          mark indicates the present point on the tape.
           •The mark in the            indicates the actual point you are trying to search.

           If a tape has a blank portion between recorded portions
           The date search function may not work correctly.

      Searching for the date without using cassette memory
           (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
           (2) Set CM SEARCH in         to OFF in the menu settings (p. 107). If using a tape
               without cassette memory, skip this step.
           (3) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly, until the date
               search indicator appears.
               The indicator changes as follows:
               INDEX SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH t PHOTO SCAN
               t no indicator
           (4) Press . on the Remote Commander to search for the previous date or press
               > on the Remote Commander to search for the next date. Your camcorder
               automatically starts playback at the point where the date changes. Each time
               you press . or >, your camcorder searches for the previous or next date.

           To stop searching
           Press x.




68
Searching for a photo – Photo search/
Photo scan
                        You can search for a still picture you have recorded on a mini DV tape (photo search).
                        You can also search for still pictures one after another and display each picture for five
                        seconds automatically regardless of cassette memory (photo scan). Use the Remote
                        Commander for these operations.
                        Use this function to check or edit still pictures.

Searching for a photo using cassette memory
                        You can use this function only when playing back a tape with cassette memory (p. 143).
                        (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
                        (2) Set CM SEARCH in        to ON in the menu settings (p. 107). Default setting is
                            ON.
                        (3) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly, until the photo




                                                                                                                                  Advanced Playback Operations
                            search indicator appears.
                            The indicator changes as follows:
                            INDEX SEARCH t TITLE SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH
                            t PHOTO SCAN t no indicator
                        (4) Press . or > on the Remote Commander to select the date for playback.
                            Your camcorder automatically starts playback of the photo having the date
                            that you selected.


   1           POWER
                                                                               3   SEARCH
                                                                                              PHOTO SEARCH

                                                                                              1
                                                                                              2
                                                                                                  SEP / 5
                                                                                                  SEP / 6
                                                                                                             /
                                                                                                             /
                                                                                                                 00 5 : 30 PM
                                                                                                                 00 8 : 50 AM
       VCR




                                                                                    MODE      3   DEC / 24   /   00 1 0 : 30 AM
                                                                                              4   JAN / 1    /   01 11 : 25 PM
                                                                                              5   FEB / 11   /   01 4 : 11 PM
 (CHG)
  OFF CAMERA




                                                                                              6   APR / 29   /   01 1 : 45 PM
               MEMORY




                                                                        4                     PHOTO SEARCH

                                                                                              1
                                                                                              2
                                                                                                  SEP / 5
                                                                                                  SEP / 6
                                                                                                             /
                                                                                                             /
                                                                                                                 00 5 : 30 PM
                                                                                                                 00 8 : 50 AM
                                                                                              3   DEC / 24   /   00 1 0 : 30 AM
                                                                                              4   JAN / 1    /   01 11 : 25 PM
                                                                                              5   FEB / 11   /   01 4 : 11 PM
                                                                                              6   APR / 29   /   01 1 : 45 PM




                        To stop searching
                        Press x.

                        In the          mark
                        •The bar in the           mark indicates the present point on the tape.
                        •The mark in the             indicates the actual point you are trying to search for.

                        If a tape has a blank portion between recorded portions
                        The photo search function may not work correctly.




                                                                                                                                            69
Searching for a photo – Photo search/Photo scan

      Searching for a photo without using cassette memory
                              (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
                              (2) Set CM SEARCH in        to OFF in the menu settings (p. 107).
                              (3) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly, until the photo
                                  search indicator appears.
                                  The indicator changes as follows:
                                  INDEX SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH t PHOTO SCAN
                                  t no indicator
                              (4) Press . or > on the Remote Commander to select a photo for playback.
                                  Each time you press . or >, your camcorder searches for the previous or
                                  next photo.
                                  Your camcorder automatically starts playback of the photo.

                              To stop searching
                              Press x.

      Scanning photo
                              (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
                              (2) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly, until the photo
                                  scan indicator appears.
                                  The indicator changes as follows:
                                  INDEX SEARCH t TITLE SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH
                                  t PHOTO SCAN t no indicator
                              (3) Press . or > on the Remote Commander.
                                  Each photo is played back for about five seconds automatically.


         1           POWER
                                                                           2   SEARCH
             VCR




                                                                                MODE              PHOTO 00
                                                                                                     SCAN
       (CHG)
        OFF CAMERA
                     MEMORY




                                                                                     3



                              To stop scanning
                              Press x.




70
Playing back a tape with picture effects
    During playback, you can process a scene using the picture effect functions: NEG. ART,
    SEPIA, B&W and SOLARIZE.

    In playback or playback pause mode, press PICTURE EFFECT and turn the SEL/PUSH
    EXEC dial until the desired picture effect indicator (NEG. ART, SEPIA, B&W or
    SOLARIZE) appears.
    For details of each picture effect function, see page 39.


                                                               PICTURE
                                                               EFFECT




                                                                                               Advanced Playback Operations
    To cancel the picture effect function
    Press PICTURE EFFECT so that the indicator disappears.

    Notes
    •You cannot process a picture using the picture effect function that is input from other
     equipment.
    •To record pictures that you have processed using the picture effect function, record
     the pictures on the VCR, using your camcorder as a player.

    Pictures processed by the picture effect function
    Pictures processed by the picture effect function are not output through the   DV IN/
    OUT jack.

    When you set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) or stop playing back
    The picture effect function will be automatically canceled.




                                                                                                         71
Playing back a tape with digital effects
         During playback, you can process a scene using the digital effect functions: STILL,
         FLASH, LUMI. and TRAIL.
         (1) In playback or playback pause mode, press DIGITAL EFFECT and turn the
             SEL/PUSH EXEC dial until the desired digital effect indicator (STILL, FLASH,
             LUMI. or TRAIL) flashes.
         (2) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.
             The digital effect indicator lights up and the bars appear. In STILL or LUMI.
             mode, the picture is captured and is stored in memory as a still picture at the
             time you press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.
         (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the effect.
             For details of each digital effect function, see page 40.


                                                                     2             STILL


            1          DIGITAL
                       EFFECT




                                                                             3
                        STILL




         To cancel the digital effect function
         Press DIGITAL EFFECT so that the indicator disappears.

         Notes
         •You cannot process a picture using the digital effect function that is input from other
          equipment.
         •To record pictures that you have processed using the digital effect function, record the
          pictures on the VCR, using your camcorder as a player.

         Pictures processed by the digital effect function
         Pictures processed by the digital effect function are not output through the   DV IN/
         OUT jack.

         When you set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) or stop playing back
         The digital effect function will be automatically canceled.




72
— Editing —

Dubbing a tape
       Using the A/V connecting cable
       Connect your camcorder to the VCR using the A/V connecting cable supplied with
       your camcorder.

       Before a dubbing
       Set DISPLAY to LCD in the menu settings. (Default setting is LCD.)

       Set the input selector on the VCR to LINE, if available.
       (1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to record over) into the VCR, and insert
           the recorded tape into your camcorder.
       (2) Set the input selector on the VCR to LINE. For details, refer to the operating
           instructions of the VCR.
       (3) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
       (4) Play back the recorded tape on your camcorder.
       (5) Start recording on the VCR. For details, refer to the operating instructions of




                                                                                                  Editing
           the VCR.

                                      S VIDEO


                                           (not supplied)
                                                                   IN
                                                                        S VIDEO
                                         VIDEO
                                                                        VIDEO
                              AUDIO
                              L/R
                                                                        AUDIO



              : Signal flow

       When you have finished dubbing the tape
       Press x on both your camcorder and the VCR.

       Be sure to clear the indicators from the screen
       If they are displayed, press the following buttons so as not to record the indicators on
       the dubbed tape:
       •The DISPLAY button
       •The DATA CODE button
       •The SEARCH MODE button on the Remote Commander

       You can edit on VCRs that support the following systems
         8 mm,       Hi8, Digital8,    VHS,        S-VHS,      VHSC,                   S-VHSC,
         Betamax,        ED Betamax,      mini DV or     DV

       If your VCR is a monaural type
       Connect the yellow plug of the A/V connecting cable to the video input jack and the
       white plug to the audio input jack on the VCR or the TV. The red plugs are not used.




                                                                                                    73
Dubbing a tape

           Connect using an S video cable (not supplied) to obtain high-quality pictures
           With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/V
           connecting cable. Connect the S video cable (not supplied) to the S video jacks on both
           your camcorder and the TV or the VCR. This connection produces higher quality DV
           format pictures.

           If you use a LANC cable
           You can edit precisely by connecting a LANC cable (not supplied) to this camcorder
           and other video equipment having a fine synchro-editing function, using this
           camcorder as a player.

           Using an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable)
           Simply connect the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (not supplied) to DV IN/OUT
           and to DV IN/OUT of the DV products. With a digital-to-digital connection, video and
           audio signals are transmitted in digital form for high-quality editing. You cannot dub
           the titles, display indicators or the contents of cassette memory.
           (1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to record over) into the VCR, and insert
               the recorded tape into your camcorder.
           (2) Set the input selector on the VCR to the DV input position if the VCR is
               equipped with an input selector. For details, refer to the operating instructions
               of the VCR.
           (3) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
           (4) Play back the recorded tape on your camcorder.
           (5) Start recording on the VCR.




                                                 DV IN/OUT
                                                                               DV    S VIDEO   LANC



                                                                                     DV IN/OUT

                                                        (not supplied)

             : Signal flow


           When you have finished dubbing a tape
           Press x on both your camcorder and the VCR.

           You can connect one VCR only using the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable)

           Pictures processed by the digital effect or picture effect function
           Pictures processed by the digital effect or picture effect function are not output through
           the DV IN/OUT jack.

           If you record a playback pause picture with the DV IN/OUT jack
           The recorded picture becomes rough. And when you play back the picture using other
74         video equipment, the picture may jitter.
Dubbing only desired scenes – Digital
program editing
     You can duplicate selected scenes (programs) for editing onto a tape without operating
     the VCR. Scenes can be selected by frame.
               [a]                        [a]




                                                  [b]




                                                                                              Editing
     [a] Undesired frame
     [b]Moves the scene

     Before operating the digital program editing
     Preparation 1 Connecting the VCR (p. 73, 74).
     Preparation 2 Setting the VCR to operate by infrared rays emitter (p. 76)/Setting the
      VCR to operate with an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (p. 80).
     Preparation 3 Adjusting the synchronization of the VCR (p. 81).

     When you dub using the same VCR again, you can skip Preparations 2 and 3.

     Using the digital program editing function
     Operation 1 Making programs (p. 83).
     Operation 2 Performing a digital program editing (Dubbing a tape) (p. 85).

     Notes
     •You cannot dub the titles, display indicators, or the contents of cassette memory.
     •When you connect with an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable), you may not be able to
      operate the dubbing function correctly, depending on the VCR.
      Set CONTROL to IR in the menu settings of your camcorder.
     •You cannot send the control signal of the digital program editing through the
      (LANC) jack.

     If you connect using an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable)
     With digital-to-digital connection, video and audio signals are transmitted in digital
     form for high-quality editing.


Preparation 1: Connecting the VCR
     Connect your camcorder and the VCR as shown on pages 73 and 74.
     You can use an A/V connecting cable, or an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable).




                                                                                                75
Dubbing only desired scenes – Digital program editing

      Preparation 2: Setting the VCR to operate by infrared rays
      emitter
            To edit using the VCR, send the control signal by infrared ray to the remote sensor on
            the VCR. When you connect using the A/V cable, this procedure is required.
            (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.
            (2) Turn the power of the connected VCR on, then set the input selector to LINE.
                When you connect a video camera recorder, set its POWER switch to VCR.
            (3) Press MENU to display the menu.
            (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select         , then press the dial.
            (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EDIT SET, then press the dial.
            (6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select CONTROL, then press the dial.
            (7) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select IR, then press the dial.

            Set the IR SETUP code
            (8) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select IR SETUP, then press the dial.
            (9) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the IR SETUP code of your VCR, then press
                the dial.
                See “About the IR SETUP code ” on the next page.



                                                              1
                                                                                       POWER
                                                                               VCR
                                                                         (CHG)
                                                                          OFF CAMERA
                                                                                       MEMORY




                                                              3                 MENU




        4                                     6-9
                      OTHERS
                      BEEP           MELODY
                      COMMANDER
                      D I SPLAY
                      V I DEO ED I T
                      ED I T SET
                        RETURN                     OTHERS                                       OTHERS
                                                   ED I T SET                                   ED I T SET
                                                    CONTROL    IR                                CONTROL    IR
                                                     ADJ TEST  i . L I NK                         ADJ TEST
                                                     “CUT–I N”                                    “CUT–I N”
                      [MENU] : END                   “CUT–OUT”                                    “CUT–OUT”
                                                     I R SETUP                                    I R SETUP
                                                     PAUSEMODE                                    PAUSEMODE
                                                     I R TEST                                     I R TEST
                                                       RETURN                                       RETURN


        5             OTHERS
                                                   [MENU] : END                                 [MENU] : END



                      ED I T SET                   OTHERS                                       OTHERS
                       CONTROL    IR               ED I T SET                                   ED I T SET
                        ADJ TEST                    CONTROL                                      CONTROL
                        “CUT–I N”                    ADJ TEST                                     ADJ TEST
                        “CUT–OUT”                    “CUT–I N”                                    “CUT–I N”
                        I R SETUP                    “CUT–OUT”                                    “CUT–OUT”
                        PAUSEMODE                    I R SETUP       1                            I R SETUP      3
                        I R TEST                     PAUSEMODE                                    PAUSEMODE
                          RETURN                     I R TEST                                     I R TEST
                                                       RETURN                                       RETURN
                      [MENU] : END
                                                   [MENU] : END                                 [MENU] : END


76
Dubbing only desired scenes – Digital program editing

 About the IR SETUP code
      The IR SETUP code is stored in the memory of your camcorder. Be sure to set the
      correct code, depending on your VCR. Code number 1 is the default setting.

       Brand        Remote control code          Brand           Remote control code
       Sony         1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6             Nokia           89, 36
       Aiwa         53                           Nokia Oceanic   89
       Akai         62, 50, 74                   Nordmende       76, 100
       Alba         73                           Okano           60, 62, 63
       Baird        36, 30                       Orion           70, 58*
       Blaupunkt    83, 78                       Panasonic       16, 78, 96
       Bush         74                           Philips         83, 84, 86




                                                                                            Editing
       Canon        97                           Phonola         83, 84
       CGM          47, 83, 36                   Roadstar        47
       Clatronic    73                           SABA            76, 21
       Daewoo       26                           Samsung         93, 94, 52, 22
       Ferguson     76                           Sanyo           36
       Fisher       73                           Schneider       84, 10
       Funai        80                           SEG             73
       Goldstar     47                           Seleco          47, 74
       Goodmans     26, 84                       Sharp           89
       Grundig      83, 09                       Siemens         10, 36
       Hitachi      42, 56                       Tandberg        26
       ITT/Nikia    36                           Telefunken      91, 92
       Instant                                   Thomson         76
       JVC          12, 21, 15, 11               Thorn           36, 47
       Kendo        47                           Toshiba         40
       Loewe        16, 47, 84                   Universum       92, 70, 47
       Luxor        89                           W. W. House     47
       Mark         26*                          Watson          83, 58
       Matsui       47, 60, 58*
                                                 * TV/VCR component
       Mitsubishi   28, 29

      Note on remote control code
      You cannot do assemble editing with some VCRs (for recording) if the remote control
      code does not correspond to this camcorder (for playback).




                                                                                              77
Dubbing only desired scenes – Digital program editing

           Setting the buttons to cancel the recording pause on the VCR
           (1) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select PAUSEMODE, then press the dial.
           (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the button to cancel recording pause on the
               VCR, then press the dial.
               The correct button depends on your VCR.
               Refer to the operating instructions of your VCR.



                                                1,2

                                                   OTHERS                    OTHERS
                                                   ED I T SET                ED I T SET
                                                    CONTROL                   CONTROL
                                                     ADJ TEST                  ADJ TEST
                                                     “CUT–I N”                 “CUT–I N”
                                                     “CUT–OUT”                 “CUT–OUT”
                                                     I R SETUP                 I R SETUP
                                                     PAUSEMODE PAUSE           PAUSEMODE PAUSE
                                                     I R TEST  REC             I R TEST
                                                       RETURN  PB                RETURN

                                                   [MENU] : END              [MENU] : END




           The buttons to cancel recording pause on the VCR
           The buttons vary depending on your VCR. To cancel recording pause:
           • Select PAUSE if the button to cancel recording pause is X.
           • Select REC if the button to cancel recording pause is z.
           • Select PB if the button to cancel recording pause is B.

           Setting your camcorder and the VCR to face each other
           Locate the infrared ray emitter of your camcorder and face it towards the remote sensor
           of the VCR.
           Set the devices about 30 cm (about 11 7/8 in) apart, and remove any obstacles between
           the devices.




                                                             Remote sensor




78
Dubbing only desired scenes – Digital program editing

      Confirming the VCR operation
      (1) Insert a recordable tape into the VCR, then set it to recording pause.
      (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select IR TEST, then press the dial.
      (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial.
         If the VCR starts recording, the setting is correct.
         When finished, the indicator changes to COMPLETE.



                                             2,3




                                                                                                  Editing
                                                OTHERS                     OTHERS
                                                ED I T SET                 ED I T SET
                                                 CONTROL                    CONTROL
                                                  ADJ TEST                   ADJ TEST
                                                  “CUT–I N”                  “CUT–I N”
                                                  “CUT–OUT”    ENGAGE        “CUT–OUT”
                                                  I R SETUP    REC PAUSE     I R SETUP
                                                  PAUSEMODE                  PAUSEMODE
                                                  I R TEST     RETURN        I R TEST  COMPLETE
                                                    RETURN     EXECUTE         RETURN

                                                [MENU] : END               [MENU] : END




      When the VCR does not operate correctly
      Set the IR SETUP code, or select the button to cancel the recording pause on the VCR.




                                                                                                    79
Dubbing only desired scenes – Digital program editing

      Preparation 2: Setting the VCR to operate with an i.LINK cable
      (DV connecting cable)
            When you connect using an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (not supplied), follow
            the procedures below.

            (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.
            (2) Turn the power of the connected VCR on, then set the input selector to DV input.
               When you connect a video camera recorder, set its POWER switch to VCR.
            (3) Press MENU to display the menu.
            (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select         , then press the dial.
            (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EDIT SET, then press the dial.
            (6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select CONTROL, then press the dial.
            (7) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select i.LINK, then press the dial.



                                                              1
                                                                                     POWER




                                                                             VCR
                                                                       (CHG)
                                                                        OFF CAMERA
                                                                                     MEMORY




                                                              3               MENU




        4,5                                   6,7
                    OTHERS
                    BEEP           MELODY
                    COMMANDER
                    D I SPLAY
                    V I DEO ED I T                 OTHERS                                     OTHERS
                    ED I T SET                     ED I T SET                                 ED I T SET
                      RETURN                        CONTROL    IR                              CONTROL    IR
                                                     ADJ TEST                                   ADJ TEST  i . L I NK
                                                     “CUT–I N”                                  “CUT–I N”
                                                     “CUT–OUT”                                  “CUT–OUT”
                                                     I R SETUP                                  I R SETUP
                    [MENU] : END                     PAUSEMODE                                  PAUSEMODE
                                                     I R TEST                                   I R TEST
                                                       RETURN                                     RETURN

                                                   [MENU] : END                               [MENU] : END
                    OTHERS
                    ED I T SET                     OTHERS                                     OTHERS
                     CONTROL    IR                 ED I T SET                                 ED I T SET
                      ADJ TEST                      CONTROL    IR                              CONTROL    i . L I NK
                      “CUT–I N”                      ADJ TEST  i . L I NK                       ADJ TEST
                      “CUT–OUT”                      “CUT–I N”                                  “CUT–I N”
                      I R SETUP                      “CUT–OUT”                                  “CUT–OUT”
                      PAUSEMODE                      I R SETUP                                  I R SETUP
                      I R TEST                       PAUSEMODE                                  PAUSEMODE
                        RETURN                       I R TEST                                   I R TEST
                                                       RETURN                                     RETURN
                    [MENU] : END
                                                   [MENU] : END                               [MENU] : END




80
Dubbing only desired scenes – Digital program editing

 Preparation 3: Adjusting the synchronization of the VCR
      You can adjust the synchronization of your camcorder and the VCR.
      Remove the cassette from the camcorder beforehand. We recommend that you prepare
      a pen and paper for notes.
      When you connect to a Sony VCR using an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable), and
      have set CONTROL to i.LINK, the setup below is not necessary.

      (1) Insert a recordable tape into the VCR, then set it to recording pause.
          When you connect using an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) and have set
          CONTROL to i.LINK, you do not have to turn the recording VCR to recording
          pause mode.
      (2) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
      (3) Press MENU to display the menu.




                                                                                                      Editing
      (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select      , then press the dial.
      (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EDIT SET, then press the dial.
      (6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ADJ TEST, then press the dial.
      (7) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial.
          CUT-IN and CUT-OUT are recorded on an image for five times each to calculate
          the numerical values for adjusting the synchronization.
          The EXECUTING indicator flashes on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. When
          finished, the indicator changes to COMPLETE.
      (8) Rewind the tape in the VCR, then start slow playback.
          Take a note of the opening numerical value of each CUT-IN and the closing
          numerical value of each CUT-OUT.
      (9) Calculate the average of all the opening numerical values of each CUT-IN, and the
          average of all the closing numerical values of each CUT-OUT.



                                                     4-6
                                                                 OTHERS
                                                                  ED I T SET
                                                                   CONTROL
                                                                   ADJ TEST RETURN
                                                                   “CUT–I N”      EXECUTE
                                                                   “CUT–OUT”
                                                                   I R SETUP ENGAGE
                                                                   PAUSEMODE REC PAUSE
                                                                   I R TEST
                                                                         OTHERS
                                                                     RETURN
                                                                          ED I T SET
                                                                           CONTROL
                                                                 [MENU] : END
                                                                           ADJ TEST EXECUT I NG
                                                                           “CUT–I N”
                                                                           “CUT–OUT” No . 2
                                                                           I R SETUP       IN
                                                                           PAUSEMODE +215
                                                                           I R TEST
                                                                                OTHERS
                                                                             RETURN
                                                                                 ED I T SET
                                                                         [MENU] : CONTROL
                                                                                  END
                                                                                  ADJ TEST COMPLETE
                                                                                  “CUT–I N”
                                                                                  “CUT–OUT”

        3      MENU                                                               I R SETUP
                                                                                  PAUSEMODE
                                                                                  I R TEST
                                                                                    RETURN

                                                                            [MENU] : END




                                                                                                        81
Dubbing only desired scenes – Digital program editing

           (10) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select “CUT-IN,” then press the dial.
           (11) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the average numerical value of CUT-IN,
                then press the dial.
                The calculated start position for recording is set.
           (12) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select “CUT-OUT,” then press the dial.
           (13) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the average numerical value of CUT-OUT,
                then press the dial.
                The calculated stop position for recording is set.
           (14) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select           RETURN, then press the dial.




                                                 10,11
                                                     OTHERS                     OTHERS
                                                     ED I T SET                 ED I T SET
                                                      CONTROL                    CONTROL
                                                       ADJ TEST                   ADJ TEST
                                                       “CUT–I N”    0             “CUT–I N”    0
                                                       “CUT–OUT”                  “CUT–OUT”
                                                       I R SETUP                  I R SETUP
                                                       PAUSEMODE                  PAUSEMODE
                                                       I R TEST                   I R TEST
                                                         RETURN                     RETURN

                                                     [MENU] : END               [MENU] : END




                                                 12,13
                                                     OTHERS                     OTHERS
                                                     ED I T SET                 ED I T SET
                                                      CONTROL                    CONTROL
                                                       ADJ TEST                   ADJ TEST
                                                       “CUT–I N”                  “CUT–I N”
                                                       “CUT–OUT”    0             “CUT–OUT”    0
                                                       I R SETUP                  I R SETUP
                                                       PAUSEMODE                  PAUSEMODE
                                                       I R TEST                   I R TEST
                                                         RETURN                     RETURN

                                                     [MENU] : END               [MENU] : END




           Errors in editing
           If you connect your camcorder to Sony equipment with the DV jack, the range of errors
           is within +/– 5 frames.
           The range may become wider in the following conditions:
           •The interval between CUT-IN and CUT-OUT is less than five seconds (p. 83).
           •CUT-IN or CUT-OUT is set at the beginning of the tape.

           When “ENGAGE REC PAUSE” appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder
           Turn the recording VCR to recording pause mode.

           Note
           If you start recording from the very beginning of the tape, the first few seconds of the
           tape may not record properly. Be sure to allow about 10 seconds’ lead before starting
           the recording.




82
Dubbing only desired scenes – Digital program editing

         If the VCR does not operate correctly
         Make sure the IR SETUP code is correct; reset if necessary.

         When the operations of the VCR do not work with an i.LINK cable
         Keep the i.LINK connection, and carry out Preparation 2 (p. 76) again. The audio and
         video signals are sent as digital signals.


 Operation 1: Making Programs
         (1) Insert the tape for playback into your camcorder, and insert a tape for recording into
             the VCR.
         (2) Press MENU to display the menu.
         (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select          , then press the dial.




                                                                                                                      Editing
         (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select VIDEO EDIT, then press the dial.
         (5) Search for the beginning of the first scene you want to insert using the video control
             buttons, then pause playback (p. 29).




  5                                             2        MENU
  STOP    REW    PLAY    FF    PAUSE




                                               3,4
                                                   OTHERS                     V I DEO ED I T             0:32:30:14
                                                   BEEP           MELODY       MARK                1   IN
                                                   COMMANDER                   UNDO
                                                   D I SPLAY                   ERASE ALL
                                                   V I DEO ED I T              START
                                                   ED I T SET
                                                     RETURN
                                                                              TOTAL            0:00:00:00
                                                                              SCENE            0


                                                  [MENU] : END                 [MENU] : END




                                                                                                                        83
Dubbing only desired scenes – Digital program editing

              (6) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial, or MARK on the Remote Commander.
                  The CUT-IN point of the first program is set, and the top part of the program mark
                  changes to light blue.
              (7) Search for the end of the first scene you want to insert using the video operating
                  buttons, then pause playback (p. 29).
              (8) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial, or MARK on the Remote Commander.
                  The CUT-OUT point of the first program is set, then the bottom part of the program
                  mark changes to light blue.
              (9) Repeat steps 5 to 8, then set the program.
                  When the program is set, the program mark changes to light blue.
                  You can set a maximum of 20 programs.


       7                                            6                                         V I DEO ED I T
                                                                                               MARK
                                                                                               UNDO
                                                                                               ERASE ALL
                                                                                                                       0:08:55:06
                                                                                                                   1 OUT

       STOP    REW    PLAY    FF    PAUSE                                                      START


                                                                                              TOTAL            0:00:00:00
                                                                                              SCENE            0


                                                                                              [MENU] : END




                                                    8,9
                                                      V I DEO ED I T             0:09:07:06   V I DEO ED I T             0:10:01:23
                                                       MARK                2   IN              MARK                4   IN
                                                       UNDO                                    UNDO
                                                       ERASE ALL                               ERASE ALL
                                                       START                                   START


                                                      TOTAL            0:00:12:13             TOTAL            0:00:47:12
                                                      SCENE            1                      SCENE            3


                                                      [MENU] : END                            [MENU] : END



              On a blank portion of the tape
              You cannot set CUT-IN or CUT-OUT on a blank portion of the tape.

              Note
              The total time of the programs is indicated on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder, however,
              if the time code on the tape is not continuous, the time may not be indicated properly.

              Erasing the last program
              To change the end of the last program, delete the CUT-OUT mark.
              To erase the whole program, delete both the CUT-IN and CUT-OUT marks.

              (1) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select UNDO, then press the dial. The last set
                  program mark flashes.
              (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial and the
                  setting is canceled.

              To cancel erasing
              Select RETURN in step 2, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.

              Erasing all programs
              (1) Select VIDEO EDIT in the menu settings. Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
                  ERASE ALL, then press the dial. All the program marks flash.
              (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial and the
84                settings are canceled.
Dubbing only desired scenes – Digital program editing

      To cancel erasing all programs
      Select RETURN in step 2, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.

      To cancel a program you have set
      Press MENU.
      The program is stored in memory until the tape is ejected.

 Operation 2: Performing a digital program editing (Dubbing a
 tape)
      Make sure your camcorder and VCR are connected, and that the VCR is set to recording
      pause. When you use an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable), you do not have to set the
      VCR to recording pause.
      When you use a video camera recorder, set its POWER switch to VCR.




                                                                                               Editing
      (1) Select VIDEO EDIT. Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select START, then press the
          dial.
      (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial.
          The camcorder automatically searches for the beginning of the first program, then
          starts dubbing.
          The EXECUTING indicator flashes.
          The SEARCH indicator appears during search, and the EDIT indicator appears
          during edit on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.
          The program marks light up after dubbing is complete.
          When the dubbing ends, your camcorder and the VCR automatically stop.

      To stop dubbing
      Press x on this camcorder or on the Remote Commander.

      To end the digital program editing function
      Your camcorder stops when the dubbing is complete. Then the display returns to
      VIDEO EDIT in the menu settings.
      Press MENU to end the digital program editing function.

      When the operations of the VCR do not work with an i.LINK cable
      Keep the i.LINK connection, and carry out Preparation 2 (p. 76) again.

      You cannot record on the VCR when:
      • The cassette is not inserted.
      • The tape has run out.
      • The write-protect tab is set to the protect position.
      • The IR SETUP code is not correct. (When IR is selected.)
      • The setup to cancel recording pause is not correct (p. 78). (When IR is selected.)

      NOT READY appears on the LCD screen when:
      • The program to operate the digital program edit has not been made.
      • i.LINK is selected but an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) is not connected. (When
       i.LINK is selected.)
      • The power of the connected VCR is not turned on.




                                                                                                 85
Using with an analog video unit and a PC
     – Signal convert function
         You can convert the analog input signal to the digital signal and output it from the DV
         IN/OUT jack on this camcorder. You can capture images and sound from an analog
         video unit connecting a PC which has the i.LINK (DV) jack to your camcorder.

                                    S VIDEO

                                          (not supplied)
                                                                   OUT
                                                                       S VIDEO
                                                                       VIDEO

                                                                       AUDIO




                                           DV connecting cable
                                           (not supplied)



         : Signal flow

         (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
         (2) Press MENU to display the menu.
         (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select      , then press the dial.
         (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select A/V t DV OUT, then press the dial.
         (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial.
         (6) Press MENU to erase the menu display.
         (7) Start playback on the analog video unit slightly ahead of the point from which you
             want to start capturing images.
         (8) Start capturing procedures on your PC. The operation procedures depend on your
             PC and the software which you use.
             For details on how to capture images, refer to the instruction manual of your PC and
             your software.

         After capturing images and sound
         Stop capturing procedures on your PC, and stop the playback on the analog video unit.

         Notes
         •When you edit the captured image and sound from the analog video unit by a PC, you
          need to install an appropriate software which can exchange video signals between the
          camcorder and a PC.
         •Depending on the condition of the analog video signals, the PC may not be able to
          output the images correctly when you convert analog video signals into digital video
          signals via your camcorder. Depending on the analog video unit, the image may
          contain noise or incorrect colors.
         •The camcorder cannot output the digital signal when you input the analog signal that
          includes a copyright protection signal.
86
Recording video or TV programs
     Using the A/V connecting cable
     You can record a tape from another VCR or a TV program from a TV that has video/
     audio outputs. Use your camcorder as a recorder.
     (1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to record over) into your camcorder. If
         you want to record a tape from the VCR, insert a recorded tape into the VCR.
     (2) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.
     (3) Set DISPLAY in       to LCD in the menu settings (p. 107).
     (4) Press MENU to erase the menu display.
     (5) Press z REC and the button on its right simultaneously on your camcorder,
         then immediately press X on your camcorder.
     (6) Press N on the VCR to start playback if you record a tape from a VCR. Select
         a TV program if you record from a TV. The picture from a TV or VCR appears
         on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.
     (7) Press X on your camcorder at the scene from which you want to start




                                                                                           Editing
         recording.

                              5          REC                      PAUSE




                             S VIDEO


                                   (not supplied)        OUT
                                                             S VIDEO
                                 VIDEO
                                                             VIDEO
                     AUDIO
                     L/R
                                                             AUDIO

  : Signal flow




     When you have finished recording
     Press x on both your camcorder and the VCR.

     Using the Remote Commander
     In step 5, press z REC and MARK simultaneously, then immediately press X. And in
     step 7, press X at the scene from which you want to start recording.




                                                                                             87
Recording video or TV programs

           If your VCR is a monaural type
           Connect the yellow plug of the A/V connecting cable to the video output jack and the
           white plug to the audio output jack on the VCR or the TV. The red plugs are not used.

           Connect using an S video cable (not supplied) to obtain high-quality pictures
           With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/V
           connecting cable.
           Connect an S video cable (not supplied) to the S video jacks of both your camcorder and
           the VCR.
           This connection produces higher quality DV format pictures.

           If you do various playbacks on the VCR during recording
           The recorded picture may be blurred.

           On the commander mode
           Your camcorder works in the commander mode, VTR 2. Commander modes 1, 2 and 3
           are used to distinguish your camcorder from other Sony VCRs to avoid remote control
           misoperation. If you use another Sony VCR in the commander mode VTR 2, we
           recommend changing the commander mode or covering the sensor of the VCR with
           black paper.

           On index signal
           The index is automatically marked on a tape when you start recording. If you mark the
           index using the INDEX MARK button during recording, “LINE” appears in the CH
           column on the INDEX SEARCH screen, and the index is recorded on cassette memory.




88
Recording video or TV programs

      Using an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable)
      Simply connect the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (not supplied) to DV IN/OUT
      and to DV IN/OUT of the DV products. With digital-to-digital connection, video and
      audio signals are transmitted in digital form for high-quality editing.
      (1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to record over) into your camcorder,
          and insert the recorded tape into the VCR.
      (2) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.
      (3) Set DISPLAY in       to LCD in the menu settings (p. 107).
      (4) Press MENU to erase the menu display.
      (5) Press z REC and the button on its right simultaneously on your camcorder,
          then immediately press X on your camcorder.
      (6) Press N on the VCR to start playback. The picture to be recorded appears on
          the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.
      (7) Press X on your camcorder at the scene from which you want to start




                                                                                            Editing
          recording.



                                  5          REC                     PAUSE




                                         DV IN/OUT
                                                                     DV    S VIDEO   LANC



                                                                          DV IN/OUT
                                                    (not supplied)

        : Signal flow




      When you have finished recording
      Press x on both your camcorder and the VCR.

      Using the Remote Commander
      In step 5, press z REC and MARK simultaneously, then immediately press X. And in
      step 7, press X at the scene from which you want to start recording.




                                                                                              89
Recording video or TV programs

           You can connect only one VCR using the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable)

           When you dub a picture in digital form
           The color of the display may be uneven. However this does not affect the dubbed
           picture.

           If you record a still picture in playback pause mode via the DV IN/OUT jack
           The recorded picture becomes rough. And when you play back the picture using your
           camcorder, the picture may jitter.

           Before recording
           Press DISPLAY and make sure that the DV IN indicator appears on the LCD screen or
           in the viewfinder. The DV IN indicator may appear on both pieces of equipment.




90
Inserting a scene from a VCR – Insert
editing
      You can insert a new scene from a VCR onto your originally recorded tape by
      specifying the insert start and end points. Use the Remote Commander for this
      operation. Connections are the same as on page 73 or 86.
      Insert a cassette containing the desired scene into the VCR.
                                        [a]

      [A]


                                      [b]                 [c]

      [B]




                                                                                               Editing
      [C]



      [A]: The tape that contains the scene to be superimposed
      [B]: The tape to be edited
      [C]: The tape after editing

      (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.
      (2) On the VCR, locate a point just before the insert start point [a], then press X to
          set the VCR to the playback pause mode.
      (3) On your camcorder, locate the insert end point [c] by pressing m or M.
          Then press X to set it to the playback pause mode.
      (4) Press ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote Commander. The ZERO SET
          MEMORY indicator flashes and the end point of the insert is stored in
          memory. The tape counter shows “0:00:00.” If the tape counter does not
          appear, press DISPLAY.
      (5) On your camcorder, locate the insert start point [b] by pressing m, then press
          z REC and the button on its right simultaneously, then immediately press X
          on your camcorder.
      (6) First press X on the VCR, and after a few seconds press X on your camcorder
          to start inserting the new scene.
          Inserting automatically stops near the zero point on the tape counter. Your
          camcorder automatically returns to the recording pause mode.


 4                       0:00:00

  ZERO SET            ZERO SET
  MEMORY               MEMORY




 5     REC                         PAUSE


                                                                                                 91
Inserting a scene from a VCR – Insert editing

            To change the insert end point
            Press ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote Commander again after step 5 to erase the
            ZERO SET MEMORY indicator and begin from step 3.

            Using the Remote Commander
            In step 5, press zREC and MARK simultaneously, then immediately press X. And in
            step 6, press X at the scene from which you want to start recording.

            Note
            The picture and sound recorded on the portion between the insert start and end points
            will be erased when you insert the new scene.

            If you insert scenes on the tape recorded with an other camcorder (including an
            other DCR-VX2000)
            The picture and sound may be distorted. We recommend that you insert scenes on a
            tape recorded with your camcorder.

            When the inserted picture is played back
            The picture and sound may be distorted at the end of the inserted portion. This is not
            a malfunction.
            The picture and sound at the start point and the end point may be distorted in the LP
            mode.

            To insert a scene without setting the insert end point
            Skip steps 3 and 4. Press x when you want to stop inserting.




92
Audio dubbing
     You can record an audio sound to add to the original sound on a tape by connecting
     audio equipment or a microphone. If you connect audio equipment, you can add sound
     to your recorded tape by specifying the starting and ending points. The original sound
     will not be erased. You can also use the Remote Commander for this operation.

Connecting the microphone with the MIC jack

        MIC (PLUG IN POWER)
                                                 MIC    LINE




                                           Set the MIC/LINE
                                           switch to MIC.




                                                                                              Editing
                 : Signal flow    Microphone (not supplied)

     You can check the picture on TV by connecting with the video jack. You cannot monitor
     the additional sound by the speaker. Use the headphone jack.

Connecting the audio equipment with the MIC jack


           MIC    LINE                                         Audio equipment
                                                                (not supplied)

     Set the MIC/LINE
     switch to LINE.                          MIC (PLUG IN         LINE OUT
                                              POWER)               L      R




            : Signal flow




                                                                                                93
Audio dubbing

     Connecting the microphone with the intelligent accessory shoe

                                                                      Microphone
                                                                      (not supplied)




                                                                 We recommend that you use the
                                                                 gun microphone. If the
                                                                 microphone can select the zoom
                                                                 microphone type, set it to the
                                                                 gun microphone position.

     Dubbing with the AUDIO L/R jacks


                                                                     Audio equipment
                                                                      (not supplied)


                                                                         LINE OUT
                                                                         L      R

                                 AUDIO
                                 L/R
                                                              AUDIO L               AUDIO R




                                                                             Do not connect the
              : Signal flow                                                  video (yellow) plug.


     Dubbing with the supplied microphone
           No connection is necessary.

           Notes
           • When dubbing with the built-in microphone or an external one, you can check the recorded
             picture on the LCD screen, in the viewfinder, or on the screen of equipment connected with
             the VIDEO jack, and you can check the recorded sound by using headphones.
           • When dubbing with the AUDIO L/R jacks, you can check the recorded picture on the
             LCD screen or in the viewfinder, and you can check the recorded sound by using a
             headphones.
           • You can check both the original sound and new sound that will be dubbed, with
             headphones.
           • You can adjust the balance of the new sound and original sound using AUDIO MIX in
             the menu settings. You can monitor the sound using headphones during audio dubbing.
94
Audio dubbing

Adding an audio sound on a recorded tape
      (1) Insert the recorded tape into your camcorder.
      (2) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.
      (3) Locate the recording start point by pressing N. Then press X at the point
          where you want to start recording to set your camcorder to the playback pause
          mode.
      (4) Press     AUDIO DUB. The green        X indicator appears on the LCD screen or
          in the viewfinder.
      (5) Press X and start playing back the audio you want to record at the same time.
          The new sound is recorded in stereo 2 (ST2) during playback.
      (6) Press x at the point where you want to stop recording.

                                                                         AUDIO DUB




                                                                                             Editing
                                                                      POWER switch




Monitoring the new recorded sound
      To play back the sound
      Adjust the balance between the original sound (ST1) and the new sound (ST2) by
      selecting AUDIO MIX in the menu settings (p. 107).
        VCR SET
         H i F i SOUND
         AUD I O M I X
         A/V DV OUT ST1   ST2
           RETURN




        [MENU] : END



      If you wait five minutes after you disconnect the power source or remove the battery
      pack, the setting of AUDIO MIX returns to the original sound (ST1) only. The default
      setting is for original sound only.




                                                                                               95
Audio dubbing

           Notes
           •New sound cannot be recorded on a tape already recorded in the 16-bit mode (p. 111).
           •New sound cannot be recorded on a tape already recorded in the LP mode.
           •You cannot add audio with the DV IN/OUT jack.

           If you make all the connections
           The audio input to be recorded will take precedence over others in the following order.
           •MIC (PLUG IN POWER) jack
           •Intelligent accessory shoe
           •AUDIO L/R jacks
           •Built-in microphone

           If an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (not supplied) is connected to your
           camcorder
           You cannot add sound to a recorded tape.

           If you set the write-protect tab of the tape to lock
           You cannot record on the tape. Slide the write-protect tab to release the write protection.

           We recommend that you add new sound on a tape recorded with your camcorder
           If you add new sound on a tape recorded with another camcorder (including an other
           DCR-VX2000), the sound quality may deteriorate.

           To add new sound more precisely
           Press ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote Commander at the point where you want to
           stop recording later in playback mode. Then, follow the procedure from step 3.
           Recording automatically stops at the point where ZERO SET MEMORY was pressed.

           On blank portions
           You cannot add an audio.

           You can adjust the recording level manually using the recording adjustment
           display in the following cases:
           – Dubbing with an optional external microphone or audio equipment through the MIC
             jack
           – Dubbing with an optional external microphone installed into the intelligent accessory
             shoe.
           – Dubbing with the internal microphone




96
Superimposing a title
            If you use a tape with cassette memory, you can superimpose the title while
            recording or after recording. When you play back the tape, the title is displayed
            for five seconds from the point where you superimposed it.

    You can select one of eight preset titles and two custom titles (p. 101).

                             You can also select the color, size and
                             position of titles.
        VACATION




    (1) Press TITLE to display the title menu in standby, recording, playback, or
        playback pause mode.




                                                                                                                Editing
    (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial.
    (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired title, then press the dial.
        The title flashes.
    (4) Change the color, size, or position, if necessary.
        1 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the COLOR, SIZE, or POSITION,
            then press the dial. The item appears.
        2 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired item, then press the
            dial.
        3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 until the title is laid out as desired.



                      1                TITLE
                                                                                PRESET TITLE
                                                                                 HELLO!
                                                                                 HAPPY BIRTHDAY
                                                                                 HAPPY HOLIDAYS
                                                                                 CONGRATULATIONS!
                                                                                 OUR SWEET BABY
                                                                                 WEDDING
                                                                                 VACATION
                                                                                 THE END


                                                                                [T I TLE] : END




                      2                     PRESET TITLE
                                             HELLO!
                                             HAPPY BIRTHDAY
                                             HAPPY HOLIDAYS
                                             CONGRATULATIONS!
                                                                                PRESET TITLE
                                                                                 HELLO!
                                                                                 HAPPY BIRTHDAY
                                                                                 HAPPY HOLIDAYS
                                                                                 CONGRATULATIONS!
                                             OUR SWEET BABY                      OUR SWEET BABY
                                             WEDDING                             WEDDING
                                             VACATION                            VACATION
                                             THE END                             THE END
                                                                                  RETURN

                                             [T I TLE] : END                    [T I TLE] : END




                      3                     PRESET TITLE
                                             HELLO!
                                             HAPPY BIRTHDAY
                                             HAPPY HOLIDAYS
                                             CONGRATULATIONS!
                                                                            TITLE




                                             OUR SWEET BABY                              VACATION
                                             WEDDING
                                             VACATION
                                             THE END
                                              RETURN

                                             [T I TLE] : END                    [EXEC] : SAVE [T I TLE] : END




                      4              SIZE


                                            SIZE
                                                   SMALL


                                                         LARGE
                                                                            TITLE




                                                                                  VACATION
                                                   VACATION
                                                                                [EXEC] : SAVE [T I TLE] : END




                                                                                                                  97
Superimposing a title

           (5) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial again to complete the setting.
               In playback, playback pause, or recording mode:
               The “TITLE SAVE” indicator appears on the screen for five seconds and the
               title is set.
               In standby mode:
               The “TITLE” indicator appears. When you press START/STOP to start
               recording, “TITLE SAVE” appears on the screen for five seconds and the title
               is set.

           If you set the write-protect tab to lock
           You cannot superimpose or erase the title. Slide the write-protect tab to release the write
           protection.

           To use a custom title
           If you want to use the custom title, select   in step 2.

           If the tape has a blank portion
           You cannot superimpose a title on that portion.

           If the tape has a blank portion in the middle of the recorded parts
           The title may not be displayed correctly.

           The titles superimposed with your camcorder
           •They are displayed only on the DV        format video equipment with the index titler
            function.
           •The point you superimposed the title may be detected as an index signal when
            searching a recording with other video equipment.

           To not display titles
           Set TITLE DSPL to OFF in the menu settings (p. 107).




98
Superimposing a title

      Title setting
      •The title color changes as follows:
        WHITE y YELLOW y VIOLET y RED y CYAN y GREEN y BLUE
      •The title size changes as follows:
        SMALL y LARGE
        You cannot input more than 12 characters in LARGE size.
      •If you select the title size “SMALL,” you have nine choices for the title position.
        If you select the title size “LARGE,” you have eight choices for the title position.

      If the “      FULL” mark appears
      The cassette memory is full. If you erase the title, index data, date data, photo data, or
      cassette label in the cassette, you can then superimpose a title.




                                                                                                   Editing




                                                                                                     99
Superimposing a title

       Erasing a title
             (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR or CAMERA.
             (2) Press MENU to display the menu.
             (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select        , then press the dial.
             (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select TITLEERASE, then press the dial.
                 The title erase display appears.
             (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the title you want to erase, then press
                 the dial.
                 The “ERASE OK ?” indicator appears.
             (6) Make sure the title is the one you want to erase, and turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC
                 dial to select OK, then press the dial.
                 “OK” changes to “EXECUTE.”
             (7) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.
                 “ERASING” flashes for about two seconds and “COMPLETE” appears after
                 erasing the title.



             2                                                            1
                                                                                                  POWER




                                                                                          VCR
                      MENU




                                                                                    (CHG)
                                                                                     OFF CAMERA
                                                                                                  MEMORY




             3-5         CM SET
                          CM SEARCH
                          TAPE T I TLE
                          T I TLE DSPL
                                                            6,7    T I TLE ERASE
                                                                   4 PRESENT

                                                                    ERASE OK ?     RETURN
                          T I TLEERASE                                             OK
                          I TEM ERASE
                          ERASE ALL

                              CM SET                                     T I TLE ERASE
                                CM SEARCH                                4 PRESENT
                                TAPE T I TLE
                         [MENU] TEND DSPL
                                : I TLE                             [MENU] ERASE OK ?
                                                                           : END                  RETURN
                                T I TLEERASE                                                      EXECUTE
                                 I TEM ERASE
                                ERASE ALL
                                   RETURN
                                      T I TLE ERASE                           CM SET
                                                                                CM SEARCH
                                    1 HELLO !                                   TAPE T I TLE
                                    2 CONGRATULAT I ONS !
                               [MENU] : END                              [MENU] TEND DSPL
                                                                                : I TLE
                                    3 HAPPY NEW YEAR !                          T I TLEERASE COMPLETE
                                    4 PRESENT                                    I TEM ERASE
                                    5 GOOD MORN I NG                            ERASE ALL
                                    6 WEDD I NG                                    RETURN



                                     [MENU] : END                              [MENU] : END




             To cancel erasing
             Select RETURN in step 6 or 7, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.

             To erase all the titles
             See “Erasing the cassette memory data” on page 105.

100
Making your own titles
                     You can make up to two titles and store them in cassette memory. Each title can
                     have up to 20 characters.

             (1) Press TITLE in the standby, playback, or playback pause mode.
             (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial.
             (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select CUSTOM1 SET or CUSTOM2 SET,
                 then press the dial.
             (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the column of the desired character,
                 then press the dial.
             (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired character, then press the
                 dial.
             (6) Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you have selected all characters and completed the
                 title.
             (7) To finish making your own titles, turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select




                                                                                                          Editing
                 [SET], then press the dial. The title is stored in memory.
             (8) Press TITLE to erase the title menu display.


1                             2                  TITLE SET
                                                  CUSTOM1 SET
                                                                                  TITLE SET
                                                                                   CUSTOM1 SET
                                                  CUSTOM2 SET                      CUSTOM2 SET
           TITLE                                                                     RETURN




                                                 [T I TLE] : END                  [T I TLE] : END


 PRESET TITLE
  HELLO!
  HAPPY BIRTHDAY
  HAPPY HOLIDAYS
  CONGRATULATIONS!
  OUR SWEET BABY
                              3                  TITLE SET
                                                  CUSTOM1 SET
                                                                                  TITLE SET
                                                                                  –––––––––––––––––––––
  WEDDING                                         CUSTOM2 SET
  VACATION                                          RETURN
  THE END


 [T I TLE] : END


                                                 [T I TLE] : END                  [T I TLE] : END




                              4-6      1         TITLE SET
                                                 –––––––––––––––––––––
                                                                         2        TITLE SET
                                                                                  –––––––––––––––––––––




                                                 [T I TLE] : END                  [T I TLE] : END




                                       3         TITLE SET
                                                                         4        TITLE SET
                                                 –––––––––––––––––––––            S––––––––––––––––––––




                                                 [T I TLE] : END                  [T I TLE] : END




                                                                                                          101
Making your own titles

            To change a title you have stored
            In step 3, select CUSTOM1 SET or CUSTOM2 SET, depending on which title you want
            to change, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to
            select [C], then press the dial to delete the title. The last character is erased. Enter a new
            title as desired.

            If you take five minutes or longer to enter characters in standby mode while a
            cassette is in your camcorder, the power automatically goes off
            The characters you have entered remain stored in memory. Set the POWER switch to
            OFF (CHG) once and then follow the procedure from step 7 again.
            We recommend setting the operation in playback or playback pause mode or removing
            the cassette so that your camcorder does not automatically turn off while you are
            entering title characters.

            To erase a character
            Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select [ C ], then press the dial. The last character is
            erased.

            To enter a space
            Select [        ], then select the blank part.




102
Labeling a cassette
               If you use a tape with cassette memory, you can label a cassette. The label can
               consist of up to 10 characters and is stored in cassette memory. When you insert
               the labeled cassette and set the POWER switch to VCR, CAMERA, or
               MEMORY, the label is displayed for about five seconds.
     (1)   Insert the cassette you want to label.
     (2)   Set the POWER switch to VCR or CAMERA.
     (3)   Press MENU to display the menu.
     (4)   Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select        , then press the dial.
     (5)   Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select TAPE TITLE, then press the dial. The
           tape title display appears.
     (6)   Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the column of the desired character,
           then press the dial.
     (7)   Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired character, then press the
           dial.




                                                                                                           Editing
     (8)   Repeat steps 6 and 7 until you finish the label.
     (9)   Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select [SET], then press the dial.
           The label is stored in memory.



 3     MENU
                                                       2
                                                                           POWER
                                                                   VCR
                                                             (CHG)
                                                              OFF CAMERA
                                                                           MEMORY




                                                       6-8

 4,5        CM SET
             CM SEARCH
             TAPE T I TLE
             T I TLE DSPL
                                                        TAPE T I TLE
                                                           ––––––––––
                                                                                    TAPE T I TLE
                                                                                      ––––––––––

             T I TLEERASE
             I TEM ERASE
             ERASE ALL
                   CM SET
                    CM SEARCH
                    TAPE T I TLE – – – – – – – – – –
                    T I TLE DSPL
            [MENU] TEND
                    : I TLEERASE                        [MENU] : END                [MENU] : END
                     I TEM ERASE
                    ERASE ALL
                       RETURN T I TLE
                          TAPE
                                                        TAPE T I TLE                TAPE T I TLE
                             ––––––––––                                               M– – – – – – – – –
                                                           ––––––––––

                   [MENU] : END




                           [MENU] : END
                                                        [MENU] : END                [MENU] : END




                                                                                                           103
Labeling a cassette

             To change the label you have made
             Insert the cassette to change the label, and operate in the same way as you do to make a
             new label.

             If you set the write-protect tab of the tape to lock
             You cannot label the tape. Slide the write-protect tab to release the write protection.

             If you have superimposed titles in the cassette
             When the label is displayed, up to four titles also appear.

             When the “-----” indicator has fewer than 10 spaces
             The cassette memory is full.
             The “-----” indicates the number of characters you can select for the label.

             To erase a character
             Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select [ C ], then press the dial. The last character is
             erased.

             To enter a space
             Select [        ], then select the blank part.




104
Erasing the cassette memory data
                       You can erase data stored in cassette memory, each item’s data can be erased separately.
                       You can also erase all items’ data once.

Erasing each item’s data separately
                       (1)    Set the POWER switch to VCR or CAMERA.
                       (2)    Press MENU to display the menu display.
                       (3)    Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select    , then press the dial.
                       (4)    Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ITEM ERASE, then press the dial.
                       (5)    Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the item that you want to erase its
                              data, then press the dial.

                              Item            Meaning
                              INDEX ALL       Erases all the index data.




                                                                                                                              Editing
                              TITLE ALL       Erases all the title data.
                              DATE ALL        Erases all the date data.
                              PHOTO ALL       Erases all the photo data.

                       (6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select OK, then press the dial. “OK” changes
                           to “EXECUTE.”
                       (7) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.
                           “ERASING” flashes for about two seconds and “COMPLETE” appears after
                           erasing the selected item’s data.


1             POWER
                                                                         3-5            CM SET
                                                                                         CM SEARCH
                                                                                         TAPE T I TLE
                                                                                         T I TLE DSPL
                                                                                         T I TLEERASE
      VCR




                                                                                         I TEM ERASE
                                                                                         ERASE ALL
(CHG)




                                                                                               CM SET
 OFF CAMERA




                                                                                                CM SEARCH
                                                                                                TAPE T I TLE
                                                                                                T I TLE DSPL
              MEMORY




                                                                                        [MENU] TEND
                                                                                                : I TLEERASE
                                                                                                 I TEM ERASE
                                                                                                ERASE ALL
                                                                                                   RETURN
                                                                                                      CM SET
                                                                                                       I TEM ERASE
                                                                                                         I NDEX ALL

2                      MENU
                                                                                                         T I TLE ALL
                                                                                               [MENU] : END ALL
                                                                                                         DATE
                                                                                                         PHOTO ALL
                                                                                                           RETURN




                                                                                                     [MENU] : END




                                                               6-7
                                                                 CM SET                              CM SET
                                                                  I TEM ERASE                         I TEM ERASE
                                                                    I NDEX ALL RETURN                   I NDEX ALL COMPLETE
                                                                    T I TLE ALL OK                      T I TLE ALL
                                                                    DATE ALL                            DATE ALL
                                                                    PHOTO ALL                           PHOTO ALL
                                                                      RETURN                              RETURN




                                                                  [MENU] : END                       [MENU] : END



                       To cancel erasing
                       Select RETURN in step 6 or 7, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.                                       105
Erasing the cassette memory data

       Erasing all the data in cassette memory
            (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR or CAMERA.
            (2) Press MENU to display the menu display.
            (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select    , then press the dial.
            (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ERASE ALL, then press the dial.
            (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select OK, then press the dial. “OK” changes
                to “EXECUTE.”
            (6) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.
                “ERASING” flashes for about two seconds and “COMPLETE” appears after
                erasing all the data.

            To cancel erasing
            Select RETURN in step 5 or 6, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.




106
— Customizing Your Camcorder —

Changing the menu settings
         To change the mode settings in the menu settings, select the menu items with the SEL/
         PUSH EXEC dial. The default settings can be partially changed. First, select the icon,
         then the menu item and then the mode.
         (1) In standby, or when the POWER switch is set to VCR or MEMORY, press
             MENU.
         (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired icon, then press the dial to
             set it.
         (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired item, then press the dial to
             set it.
         (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired mode, then press the dial
             to set it.
         (5) If you want to change other items, select RETURN and press the dial, then
             repeat steps 2 to 4.
         For details, see “Selecting the mode setting of each item” (p. 108).



 1                                                       2
                                                                          MANUAL SET




                                                                                                            Customizing Your Camcorder
                                                                           AUTO SHTR
                 CAMERA                     VCR                            PROG. SCAN

                                                                              OTHERS
             MANUAL SET            VCR SET                                      WORLD TIME
              AUTO SHTR             H i F i SOUND                               BEEP
  MENU        PROG. SCAN            AUD I O M I X
                                                                                COMMANDER
                                    A/V DV OUT
                                                                                DISPLAY
                                                                                REC LAMP
                                                                                COLOR BAR
                                                                          [MENU] : END


                                                                                OTHERS
             [MENU] : END          [MENU] : END
                                                                                 WORLD TIME          0 HR
                                                                                 BEEP
                                                                                 COMMANDER
                                                                                 DISPLAY
                MEMORY                                                           REC LAMP
                                                                                 COLOR BAR
                                                                                  RETURN
             MANUAL SET
              AUTO SHTR


                                                         3                OTHERS
                                                                           WORLD TIME
                                                                           BEEP
                                                                                              0 HR

                                                                              OTHERS
                                                                                WORLD TIME
                                                                                BEEP
                                                                                COMMANDER ON
             [MENU] : END                                                       DISPLAY
                                                                                REC LAMP
                                                                                COLOR BAR
                                                                          [MENU] : END
                                                                                   RETURN


                                                                                OTHERS
                                                                                 WORLD TIME
                                                                                 BEEP
                                                                                 COMMANDER ON
                                                                                 DISPLAY    OFF
                                                                                 REC LAMP
                                                                                 COLOR BAR
                                                                                  RETURN




                                                         4
                                                                                OTHERS
                                                                                 WORLD TIME
                                                                                 BEEP
                                                                                 COMMANDER ON
                                                                                 DISPLAY    OFF
                                                                                 REC LAMP
                                                                                 COLOR BAR
                                                                                  RETURN



                                                                                OTHERS
                                                                                 WORLD TIME
                                                                                 BEEP
                                                                                 COMMANDER OFF
                                                                                 DISPLAY
                                                                                 REC LAMP
                                                                                 COLOR BAR
                                                                                  RETURN




                                                                                                            107
Changing the menu settings

             To make the menu display disappear
             Press MENU.

             Menu items are displayed as the following icons:
                     MANUAL SET
                     CAMERA SET
                     VCR SET
                     LCD/VF SET
                     MEMORY SET
                     CM SET
                     TAPE SET
                     SETUP MENU
                     OTHERS

      Selecting the mode setting of each item                    z is the default setting.

             Menu items differ depending on the position of the POWER switch.
             The LCD screen or viewfinder screen shows only the items you can operate at the
             moment.
                                                                                       POWER
      Icon/item       Mode              Meaning                                        switch
          AUTO SHTR   z ON              To automatically adjust the electronic         CAMERA
                                        shutter speed.                                 MEMORY
                     OFF                To fix the electronic shutter speed.
        PROG. SCAN z OFF                Records still/moving pictures in the           CAMERA
                                        interlace format.
                         ON             Records still/moving pictures in
                                        progressive mode.
        D ZOOM        z OFF             To deactivate the digital zoom. Up to 12×      CAMERA
                                        zoom is carried out.
                         24×            To activate the digital zoom. More than 12×
                                        zoom is performed digitally. This value goes
                                        up to 24× (p. 21).
                         48×            To activate the digital zoom. More than 12×
                                        zoom is performed digitally. This value goes
                                        up to 48× (p. 21).
        16:9WIDE   z OFF                To not record a 16:9 wide picture.             CAMERA
                     ON                 To record a 16:9 wide picture (p. 36).
        STEADYSHOT z ON                 To compensate for camera-shake.                CAMERA
                     OFF                To cancel the SteadyShot function. Natural     MEMORY
                                        pictures are produced when shooting a
                                        stationary object with a tripod.

             Notes on the SteadyShot function
             •The SteadyShot function will not correct excessive camera-shake.
             •Attachment of a conversion lens (not supplied) may influence the SteadyShot
              function.

             If you cancel the SteadyShot function
             The SteadyShot OFF indicator    appears. Your camcorder prevents excessive
             compensation for camera-shake.
108
Changing the menu settings

                                                                                POWER
Icon/item       Mode             Meaning                                        switch
   FRAME REC    z OFF            Does not make a cut recording.                 CAMERA
                  ON             Makes a cut recording (p. 61).
  INT. REC        ON             Makes an interval recording (p. 59).           CAMERA
                z OFF            Does not make an interval recording.
                  SET            Sets the interval time and recording time.
  HiFi SOUND    z STEREO         To play back a stereo tape or dual sound       VCR
                                 track tape with main and sub sound (p. 144).
                    1            To play back a stereo tape with the left
                                 sound or a dual sound tape with main
                                 sound.
                    2            To play back a stereo tape with the right
                                 sound or a dual sound track tape with sub
                                 sound.




                                                                                            Customizing Your Camcorder
  AUDIO MIX     —                To adjust the balance between the stereo 1     VCR
                                 and stereo 2 (p. 95).


                                               ST1          ST2

  A/VtDV OUT z OFF           To output analog images in digital format          VCR
                             using your camcorder.
                  ON         To output digital images in analog format
                             using your camcorder.
  LCD B. L.     z BRT NORMAL To set the brightness on the LCD screen to         VCR
                             normal.                                            CAMERA
                  BRIGHT     To brighten the LCD screen.                        MEMORY
  LCD COLOR       —          To adjust the color on the LCD screen with         VCR
                             the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.                            CAMERA
                                                                                MEMORY

                                 To get low-                   To get high-
                                 intensity                     intensity

  VF B.L.    z BRT NORMAL To set the brightness on the viewfinder               VCR
                          screen to normal.                                     CAMERA
               BRIGHT     To brighten the viewfinder screen.                    MEMORY
  GUIDEFRAME z OFF        Does not display the guide frame.                     CAMERA
               ON         Displays the guide frame (p. 35).                     MEMORY

       Notes on LCD B.L. and VF B.L.
       •When you select “BRIGHT,” battery life is reduced a little during recording.
       •When you use power sources other than the battery pack, “BRIGHT” is automatically
        selected.




                                                                                            109
Changing the menu settings

                                                                                          POWER
      Icon/item     Mode               Meaning                                            switch
         CONTINUOUS z OFF              Not to record continuously.                        MEMORY
                      ON               To record four images continuously (p. 121).
                      MULTI SCRN       To record nine images continuously (p. 121).
         QUALITY    z SUPER FINE       To record still images in the super fine           VCR
                      (SFN)            image quality mode, using a “Memory                MEMORY
                                       Stick” (p. 118).
                        FINE           To record still images in the fine image quality
                        (FINE)         mode, using a “Memory Stick” (p. 118).
                        STANDARD       To record still images in the standard image
                        (STD)          quality mode, using a “Memory Stick”
                                       (p. 118).
        PRINT MARK z OFF               To erase print marks on still images.              VCR
                     ON                To write a print mark on the recorded still        MEMORY
                                       images you want to print out later.
        PROTECT      z OFF             To release protection from still images.           VCR
                       ON              To protect selected still images against           MEMORY
                                       accidental erasure (p. 138).
        SLIDE SHOW                     To play back all the images as a slide show        MEMORY
                                       (p. 137).
        DELETE ALL                     To delete all unprotected images (p. 140).         MEMORY
        FORMAT       z RETURN          To cancel formatting.                              MEMORY
                       OK              To format an inserted “Memory Stick.”
                                       1. Select FORMAT with the SEL/PUSH
                                       EXEC dial, then press the dial. 2. Turn the
                                       SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select OK, then
                                       press the dial. 3. After “EXECUTE” appears,
                                       press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.
                                       “FORMATTING” appears during
                                       formatting. “COMPLETE” appears when
                                       formatting is finished.
        PHOTO SAVE                     To duplicate images on a mini DV tape onto         VCR
                                       a “Memory Stick” (p. 130).

            Formatting erases all information on the “Memory Stick”
            Check the contents of the “Memory Stick” before formatting:
            •Formatting erases sample images on the “Memory Stick.”
            •Formatting erases the protected image data on the “Memory Stick.”

            Notes on formatting
            •Supplied or optional “Memory Stick”s have been formatted at the factory. Formatting
             with this camcorder is not required.
            •While the display shows “FORMATTING,” do not turn the POWER switch, press any
             button, or eject a “Memory Stick.”
            •You cannot format a “Memory Stick” if the write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is
             set to LOCK.
            •Format again if the message “ ” appears.

            If formatting fails
            The “ FORMAT ERROR” message appears.
110
Changing the menu settings

                                                                                POWER
Icon/item       Mode              Meaning                                       switch
   CM SEARCH    z ON              To search using cassette memory (p. 64, 66,   VCR
                                  67, 69).
                    OFF           To search without using cassette memory.
  TAPE TITLE                      To label a cassette (p. 103).               VCR
                                                                              CAMERA
  TITLE DSPL    z ON              To display the title you have superimposed. VCR
                  OFF             Not to display the title.
  TITLEERASE    —                 To erase the title you have superimposed    VCR
                                  (p. 100).                                   CAMERA
  ITEM ERASE    —                 To erase each item’s data in cassette       VCR
                                  memory (p. 105).                            CAMERA
  ERASE ALL     —                 To erase all the data in cassette memory    VCR
                                  (p. 106).                                   CAMERA




                                                                                              Customizing Your Camcorder
  REC MODE      z SP              To record in the SP (Standard Play) mode.   VCR
                  LP              To increase the recording time to 1.5 times CAMERA
                                  the SP mode.
  AUDIO MODE z 12BIT              To record in 12-bit mode (two stereo        VCR
                                  sounds).                                    CAMERA
                    16BIT         To record in 16-bit mode (one stereo sound
                                  with high quality).

       Notes on the LP mode
       •When you record a tape in the LP mode on your camcorder, we recommend playing
        back the tape on your camcorder. When you play back the tape on other camcorders
        or VCRs, noise may occur in pictures or sound.
       •When you record in the LP mode, we recommend using a Sony Excellence/Master
        mini DV cassette so that you can get the most out of your camcorder.
       •You cannot make audio dubbing on a tape recorded in the LP mode. Use the SP mode
        for the tape to be audio-dubbed.
       •When you record in the SP and LP modes on one tape or you record some scenes in
        the LP mode, the playback picture may be distorted or the time code may not be
        written properly between scenes.

       Notes on AUDIO MODE
       •You cannot dub an audio sound on a tape recorded in the 16-bit mode.
       •When playing back a tape recorded in the 16-bit mode, you cannot adjust the balance
        in AUDIO MIX.




                                                                                              111
Changing the menu settings

                                                                                        POWER
      Icon/item       Mode              Meaning                                         switch
         qREMAIN      z AUTO            To display the remaining tape indication:       VCR
                                        • for about eight seconds after your            CAMERA
                                          camcorder is turned on and calculates the
                                          remaining amount of tape
                                        • for about eight seconds after a cassette is
                                          inserted and your camcorder calculates the
                                          remaining amount of tape
                                        • for about eight seconds after N is pressed
                                          in VCR mode
                                        • for about eight seconds after DISPLAY is
                                          pressed to display the screen indicators
                                        • for the period of tape rewinding,
                                          forwarding or picture search in the VCR
                                          mode
                        ON              To always display the remaining tape
                                        indicator.
        DATA CODE     z DATE/CAM        To display date, time and various settings      VCR
                                        during playback.
                       DATE             To display date and time during playback.
        MIC LEVEL     z AUTO            Adjusts audio recording level automatically.    VCR
                        MANUAL          Adjusts audio recording level manually          CAMERA
                                        (p. 51).
        CLOCK SET     —                 To reset the date or time (p. 114).             CAMERA
                                                                                        MEMORY
        LTR SIZE      z NORMAL          To display selected menu items in normal        VCR
                                        size.                                           CAMERA
                        2×              To display selected menu items at twice the     MEMORY
                                        normal size.
        DEMO MODE z ON                  To make the demonstration appear.               CAMERA
                   OFF                  To cancel the demonstration mode.
        WORLD TIME                      To set the clock to the local time. Turn the    CAMERA
                                        SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to set a time                MEMORY
                                        difference. The clock changes by the time
                                        difference you set here. If you set the time
                                        difference to 0, the clock returns to the
                                        originally set time.


             Notes on DEMO MODE
             •You cannot select DEMO MODE when a cassette is inserted in your camcorder.
             •DEMO MODE is set to STBY (Standby) at the factory and the demonstration starts
              about 10 minutes after you have set the POWER switch to CAMERA without a
              cassette inserted.
              To cancel the demonstration, insert a cassette, set the POWER switch to other than
              CAMERA, or set DEMO MODE to OFF.




112
Changing the menu settings

                                                                                  POWER
Icon/item        Mode     Meaning                                                 switch
   BEEP          z MELODY To chime a melody in normal operations,                 VCR
                          and beep a warning sound for five seconds.              CAMERA
                NORMAL    To beep in the following situations:                    MEMORY
                          turning on the power, pressing the start/
                          stop button, and when a warning message
                          appears.
                OFF       To cancel the melody, beep, and shutter
                          click sound.
   COMMANDER z ON         To activate the Remote Commander                        VCR
                          supplied with your camcorder.                           CAMERA
                OFF       To deactivate the Remote Commander to                   MEMORY
                          avoid remote control misoperation caused
                          by an other VCR’s remote control.
   DISPLAY    z LCD       To show the display on the LCD screen and               VCR




                                                                                                  Customizing Your Camcorder
                          viewfinder screen.                                      CAMERA
                V-OUT/LCD To show the display on a TV screen, LCD                 MEMORY
                          screen and viewfinder screen.
   REC LAMP   z ON        To light up the camera recording lamps at               CAMERA
                          the front and rear of your camcorder.                   MEMORY
                OFF       To turn the camera recording lamps off.
   COLOR BAR z OFF        Does not display the color bar.                         CAMERA
                ON        Displays the color bar.
   VIDEO EDIT             To make programs and perform video                      VCR
                          editing (p. 83).
   EDIT SET               To adjust and set the synchronization of                VCR
                          your camcorder and a VCR for dubbing in
                          video program editing mode (p. 76).


        Note
        If you press DISPLAY with DISPLAY set to V-OUT/LCD in the menu settings, the
        picture from a TV or VCR will not appear on the LCD screen even when your
        camcorder is connected to outputs on the TV or VCR (except using an i.LINK cable (DV
        connecting cable)).

        When recording a close subject
        When REC LAMP is set to ON, the red camera recording lamps on the front and rear of
        the camcorder may reflect on the subject if it is close. In this case, we recommend you
        set REC LAMP to OFF.

        After more than five minutes after removing the power source
        The “PROG. SCAN,” “HiFi SOUND,” “AUDIO MIX,” “MIC LEVEL,” and
        “COMMANDER” items are returned to their default settings.
        The other menu items are held in memory even when the power source is removed.




                                                                                                  113
Resetting the date and time
                 The default clock setting is set to Tokyo time for the models sold in Japan, and New
                 York time for other models.
                 If you do not use your camcorder for about four months, the date and time settings may
                 be released (bars may appear) because the vanadium-lithium battery installed in your
                 camcorder will have been discharged (p. 158).
                 First, set the year, then the month, the day, the hour and then the minute.
                 (1) Press MENU to display the menu in the standby mode.
                 (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select      , then press the dial.
                 (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select CLOCK SET, then press the dial.
                 (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to adjust to the desired year, then press the dial.
                 (5) Set the month, day and hour by turning the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial and
                     pressing the dial.
                 (6) Set the minute by turning the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial and pressing the dial by
                     the time signal. The clock starts to move.
                 (7) Press MENU to erase the menu display.


      1,7            MENU                  2                                                                     3
                                           MANUAL SET                  SETUP MENU                                    SETUP MENU
                                            AUTO SHTR                   CLOCK SET JAN 1 2000                          CLOCK SET
                                            PROG. SCAN                  LTR SIZE  1 2 : 0 0 : 0 0AM                   LTR SIZE
                                                                        DEMO MODE                                     DEMO MODE 2000   JAN 1
                                                                         RETURN                                        RETURN


                                                                                                                                    12 00 AM



                                           [MENU] : END                 [MENU] : END                                 [MENU] : END




                                           6
      4
                                                    SETUP MENU                               SETUP MENU
                                                     CLOCK SET                                CLOCK SET JUL 4 2000
                                                     LTR SIZE                                 LTR SIZE    5 : 3 0 : 0 0PM
                                                     DEMO MODE 2000   JUL 4                   DEMO MODE
                                                      RETURN                                   RETURN


          2000 JAN   1      2000 JAN   1                           5 30 PM



                                                    [MENU] : END                             [MENU] : END
            12 00 AM          12 00 AM




                 The year changes as follows:
                 1995       1996           2000                    2079



                 If you do not set the date and time
                 “– –:– –:– –” (time) and “--- -- ----” (date) are recorded on the data code of the tape and
                 the “Memory Stick.”

                 Note on the time indicator
                 The internal clock of your camcorder operates on a 12-hour cycle.
                 •12:00 AM stands for midnight.
114              •12:00 PM stands for noon.
— “Memory Stick” Operations —

Using a “Memory Stick” – introduction
       You can record and play back still images on the “Memory Stick” supplied with your
       camcorder. You can easily play back, record or delete still images. You can exchange
       image data with other equipment such as a personal computer etc., using the Memory
       Stick Reader/Writer supplied with your camcorder or a PC card adaptor for Memory
       Stick (not supplied).

       On file format (JPEG)
       Your camcorder compresses image data in JPEG format (extension .jpg).

       Typical image data file name
       100-0001: As displayed on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder of the camcorder.
       Dsc00001.jpg: As displayed on your PC screen.

       Before using a “Memory Stick”
                                       Terminal


                   Write-protect tab




                                                                                                “Memory Stick” Operations
                                                            Labeling position

                                        Rear       Front
       •You cannot record or erase still images when the write-protect tab on the “Memory
        Stick” is set to LOCK.
       •We recommend backing up important data.
       •Image data may be damaged in the following cases:
        – If you remove the “Memory Stick,” turn the power off, or detach the battery for
          replacement when the access lamp is flashing.
        – If you use a “Memory Stick” near static electricity or magnetic fields.
       •Prevent metallic objects or your finger from coming into contact with the metal parts
        of the connecting section.
       •Stick its label on the labeling position.
       •Do not bend, drop or apply strong shock to a “Memory Stick.”
       •Do not disassemble or modify a “Memory Stick.”
       •Do not let the “Memory Stick” get wet.
       •Do not use or keep a “Memory Stick” in locations that are:
        – Extremely hot such as in a car parked in the sun or under the scorching sun.
        – Under direct sunlight.
        – Very humid or subject to corrosive gases.
       •When you carry or store a “Memory Stick,” put it in its case.

       A “Memory Stick” formatted by a computer
       A “Memory Stick” formatted by the Windows OS or Macintosh computers does not
       have a guaranteed compatibility with this camcorder.




                                                                                                115
Using a “Memory Stick” – introduction

            Notes on image data compatibility
            •Image data files recorded on a “Memory Stick” by your camcorder conform to the
             Design Rules for Camera File Systems universal standard (DCF98 standard)
             established by the JEIDA (Japan Electronic Industry Development Association). You
             cannot play back on your camcorder still images recorded on other equipment (DCR-
             TRV890E/TRV900/TRV900E or DSC-D700/D770) that does not conform to this
             universal standard. (These models are not sold in some areas.)
            •If you cannot use a “Memory Stick” that is used with other equipment, format it with
             this camcorder (p. 110). However, formatting erases all information on the “Memory
             Stick.”

            “Memory Stick” and       are trademarks of Sony Corporation.

            •Windows is a registered trademark licensed to Microsoft Corporation, registered in
             the U.S.A. and other countries.
            •Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
            •All other product names mentioned herein may be the trademarks or registered
             trademarks of their respective companies.
            Furthermore, “™” and “®” are not mentioned in each case in this manual.




116
Using a “Memory Stick” – introduction

 Inserting a “Memory Stick”
      Insert the “Memory Stick” with the Sony logo pointing toward the LCD panel and the b
      mark pointing inward.




                                                                Access lamp




      To eject a “Memory Stick”




                                                                                                  “Memory Stick” Operations
      Push the “Memory Stick” inward, then release your finger. The “Memory Stick” comes
      out a little.




      Note
      The “Memory Stick” may pop out depending on the way you push it.

      When the access lamp is lit or flashing
      Never shake or strike your camcorder. Do not turn the power off , eject a “Memory
      Stick” or remove the battery pack. Otherwise, image data breakdown may occur.

      If the “ MEMORY STICK ERROR” indicator appears
      The “Memory Stick” is broken or the file format is not proper. Eject the “Memory
      Stick,” check it, and insert it again. If the same indicator appears, use another “Memory
      Stick.”




                                                                                                  117
Using a “Memory Stick” – introduction

       Selecting the image quality mode
                            You can select the image quality mode in still picture recording. The default setting is
                            SUPER FINE.
                            (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR or MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch
                                is set to the right (unlock) position.
                            (2) Press MENU to display the menu.
                            (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select    , then press the dial.
                            (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select QUALITY, then press the dial.
                            (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired image quality, then press
                                the dial.


      1                     POWER                                     3                        MEMORY SET
                                                                                                CONT I NUOUS
                                                                                                QUAL I TY
                   VCR




                                                                                                PR I NT MARK
                                                                                                PROTECT
           (CHG)




                                                                                                SL I DE SHOW
               OFF CAMERA




                                                                                                DELETE ALL
                                                                                                FORMAT
                            MEMORY




                                                                                                [MENU] : END




                                                                      4                        MEMORY SET
                                                                                                CONT I NUOUS
                                                                                                QUAL I TY
                                                                                                PR I NT MARK
                                                                                                             SUPER F I NE

                                                                                                PROTECT
                                                                                                SL I DE SHOW
                                                                                                DELETE ALL
                                                                                                FORMAT
                                                                                                 RETURN


                                                                                                [MENU] : END




                                                                      5                        MEMORY SET
                                                                                                CONT I NUOUS
                                                                                                QUAL I TY
                                                                                                PR I NT MARK
                                                                                                               SFN

                                                                                                               SUPER F I NE
                                                                                                               F I NE

      2                        MENU
                                                                                                PROTECT
                                                                                                SL I DE SHOW
                                                                                                DELETE ALL
                                                                                                FORMAT
                                                                                                               STANDARD



                                                                                                 RETURN


                                                                                                [MENU] : END




                            Image quality settings

                                     Setting (Display)   Meaning
                                     SUPER FINE (SFN)    This is the highest image quality in this camcorder. The
                                                         number of still images you can record is fewer than FINE.
                                                         The image is compressed to about 1/3.
                                     FINE (FINE)         Use this mode when you want to record high quality images.
                                                         The image is compressed to about 1/6.
                                     STANDARD (STD)      This is the standard image quality. The image is compressed
                                                         to about 1/10.

                            Note
                            In some cases, changing the image quality mode may not affect the image quality,
                            depending on the types of images you are shooting.


118
Using a “Memory Stick” – introduction

      Differences in image quality mode
      Recorded images are compressed in JPEG format before being stored in memory. The
      memory capacity allotted to each image varies depending on the image quality mode
      selected. Details are shown in the table below.

       Image quality mode         Memory capacity
       SUPER FINE                 Approx. 190 KB
       FINE                       Approx. 100 KB
       STANDARD                   Approx. 60 KB

      Note on the image quality mode indicator
      This is only displayed during recording.

      The approximate number of images you can record on a
      “Memory Stick”
      The approximate number of images you can record on a “Memory Stick” that is
      formatted using this camcorder varies depending on which image quality mode you
      select and the complexity of the subject.




                                                                                          “Memory Stick” Operations
                                  Image quality mode
                                SUPER FINE (SFN)    FINE (FINE)   STANDARD (STD)
       4 MB type (supplied)        20 images         40 images       60 images
       8 MB type (not supplied)    40 images         81 images       122 images
       16 MB type (not supplied)   82 images        164 images       246 images
       32 MB type (not supplied) 164 images         329 images       494 images
       64 MB type (not supplied) 329 images         659 images       988 images




                                                                                          119
Recording still images on a “Memory
      Stick” – Memory Photo recording
          You can record still images on a “Memory Stick.”

          Before operation
          Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.

          (1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to
              the right (unlock) position.
          (2) Keep pressing PHOTO lightly until the desired still picture appears. The green
              z mark stops flashing, then lights up. The brightness of the picture and focus
              are re-adjusted, being targeted for the middle of the picture and are fixed.
              Recording does not start yet.
          (3) Press PHOTO deeply. The shutter clicks and the image is frozen. The image
              displayed on the screen will be recorded on the “Memory Stick.” Recording is
              complete when the bar scroll indicator disappears.




            1                        POWER
                            VCR
                    (CHG)
                        OFF CAMERA
                                     MEMORY




                                                          [a]
            2                                 SFN   1/6
                                                                3                      SFN

                   PHOTO
                                                          [b]       PHOTO




          [a] The number of images that can be recorded on the “Memory Stick”
          [b] The number of recorded images

          When the POWER switch is set to MEMORY
          The following functions do not work: wide TV mode, digital effect, picture effect, title,
          digital zoom, fader, shutter speed (1/30 or smaller) adjustment, and low lux mode and
          sports lesson mode in PROGRAM AE. (The indicator flashes in the low lux or sports
          lesson mode.)

          Note
          When you press the PHOTO button lightly at step 2, the focus of the image seems to be
          momentarily out.




120
Recording still images on a “Memory Stick” – Memory Photo
recording

      While you are recording a still image
      You can neither turn off the power nor press PHOTO.

      When you press PHOTO on the Remote Commander
      Your camcorder immediately records the image that is on the screen when you press
      the button.


 Recording images continuously
      You can record still images continuously. Select one of the two modes described below
      before recording.

      Continuous mode [a]
      You can four record still images continuously. The number of images is in accordance
      with remaining capacity of the “Memory Stick.”

      Multi screen mode [b]
      You can record nine still images continuously on a single page.




                                                                                              “Memory Stick” Operations
       [a]                                            [b]




      While pressing down PHOTO, the camcorder shoots still images continuously. The
      maximum number of recordable still images is up to four. If you release the button
      during shooting, the recording stops even if it is in progress.




                                                                                              121
Recording still images on a “Memory Stick” – Memory Photo
      recording

             (1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to
                 the right (unlock) position.
             (2) Press MENU to display the menu.
             (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select    , then press the dial.
             (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select CONTINUOUS, then press the dial.
             (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired setting, then press the
                 dial.


                                                                         1                              POWER


       2




                                                                                               VCR
           MENU




                                                                                       (CHG)
                                                                                           OFF CAMERA
                                                                                                        MEMORY
       3                         4              MEMORY SET
                                                 CONT I NUOUS OFF
                                                 QUAL I TY
                                                 PR I NT MARK
                                                 PROTECT
                                                                                       MEMORY SET
                                                                                        CONT I NUOUS OFF
                                                                                        QUAL I TY    ON
                                                                                        PR I NT MARK MULT I SCRN
                                                                                        PROTECT
                                                 SL I DE SHOW                           SL I DE SHOW
                                                 DELETE ALL                             DELETE ALL
                                                 FORMAT                                 FORMAT
                                                  RETURN                                 RETURN


                                                [MENU] : END                           [MENU] : END

            MEMORY SET


                                 5
             CONT I NUOUS                                              MEMORY SET
             QUAL I TY                                                  CONT I NUOUS ON
             PR I NT MARK                                               QUAL I TY
             PROTECT                                                    PR I NT MARK
             SL I DE SHOW                                               PROTECT
             DELETE ALL                                                 SL I DE SHOW
             FORMAT                                                     DELETE ALL
                                                                        FORMAT
                                                                         RETURN
            [MENU] : END
                                                                        [MENU] : END




             Continuous shooting settings
              Setting    Meaning (indicator on the screen)
              OFF        Your camcorder shoots one image at a time. (no indicator)
              ON         Your camcorder shoots four still images at about 0.5 sec intervals. (
                            )
              MULTI SCRN Your camcorder shoots nine still images at about 0.5 sec intervals
                         and displays the images on a single page divided into nine boxes.
                         (    )

             If the capacity of the “Memory Stick” becomes full
             ”    FULL” appears on the screen, and you cannot record still pictures on this “Memory
             Stick.”

             The number of images in continuous shooting
             The number of images you can shoot continuously varies depending on the remaining
             capacity of the “Memory Stick.” The shutter always clicks four times, however, the
             number of images recordable may be less than four.




122
Recording still images on a “Memory Stick” – Memory Photo
recording

      Note on using a video flash light (not supplied)
      The video flash light does not work in the continuous or multi screen mode if you
      install it to the intelligent accessory shoe.

      When shooting with the self-timer function or the Remote Commander
      The camcorder automatically records up to the maximum recordable number of still
      pictures.


 Self-timer memory photo recording
      You can make a memory photo recording with the self-timer. This mode is useful when
      you want to record yourself. You can also use the Remote Commander.
      (1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to
          the right (unlock) position.
      (2) Press     (self-timer) in standby mode. The  (self-timer) indicator appears on
          the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.
      (3) Press PHOTO deeply.
          The self-timer starts counting down from 10 with a beep sound. In the last two




                                                                                                               “Memory Stick” Operations
          seconds of the countdown, the beep sound gets faster, then recording starts
          automatically.

                        PHOTO

                                                                           3                           PHOTO




                                                                           1
       2
                                                                                              POWER
                                                                                     VCR
                                                                             (CHG)
                                                                                 OFF CAMERA
                                                                                              MEMORY




      To cancel self-timer recording
      Press    (self-timer) so that the    indicator disappears from the LCD or viewfinder
      screen. You cannot cancel the self-timer recording using the Remote Commander.

      Note
      The self-timer recording mode is automatically canceled when:
      – Self-timer recording is finished.
      – The POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG) or VCR.



                                                                                                               123
Superimposing a still image in a “Memory
      Stick” on a moving picture – MEMORY MIX
           You can superimpose a still image you have recorded on a “Memory Stick” on the top
           of the moving picture you are recording.

           M. CHROM (Memory chromakey)
           You can swap a blue area of a still image such as an illustration or a frame with a
           moving picture.

           M. LUMI (Memory luminancekey)
           You can swap a brighter area of a still image such as a handwritten illustration or title
           with a moving picture. Record a title on a “Memory Stick” before a trip or event for
           convenience.

           C. CHROM (Camera chromakey)
           You can superimpose a moving picture on a still image that used as background. Shoot
           the subject against a blue background. The blue area of the moving picture will be
           swapped with a still image.

           M. OVERLAP (Memory overlap)
           You can make a moving picture fade in on top of a still image.

                      Still image           Moving picture       Moving picture + Still image

        M. CHROM


                      Background: blue

                      Still image           Moving picture       Moving picture + Still image

        M. LUMI




                      Still image           Moving picture       Moving picture + Still image


        C. CHROM


                                         Background: blue

                      Still image           Moving picture       Moving picture
                                            + Still image

        M.OVERLAP




124
Superimposing a still image in a “Memory Stick” on a moving
picture – MEMORY MIX

          Before operation
          Insert a recorded “Memory Stick” and a mini DV tape to be recorded into your
          camcorder.

          (1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA.
          (2) Press MEMORY MIX in standby mode.
              The last recorded or last composed image appears on the lower part of the
              screen as a thumbnail image.
          (3) Press MEMORY+/– or +/– on the Remote Commander to select the still
              image you want to superimpose.
              To see the previous image, press MEMORY – or – on the Remote Commander.
              To see the next image, press MEMORY+ or + on the Remote Commander.
          (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired mode.
              The mode changes as follows:
              M. CHROM y M. LUMI y C. CHROM y M. OVERLAP
          (5) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.
              The still image is superimposed on the moving picture, and your camcorder is
              in standby mode.




                                                                                                              “Memory Stick” Operations
          (6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the effect.
          (7) Press START/STOP to start recording.


                                                                     1
                                                                                        POWER




                                                                                VCR
                                                                          (CHG)
 2                                                                         OFF CAMERA
                                                                                        MEMORY
       MEMORY MIX




                                                                     7
                                                                                        POWER
                                                                                VCR
                                                                          (CHG)
                                                                           OFF CAMERA




     M. CHROM
                                                                                        MEMORY




                100-0019



        Still image
                            3                         4                            M. LUMI

                                –          +

                                                                                                   100-0019




                                                      5                            M. LUMI I I I • • • •




                                                                                                   100-0019




                                                      6                            M. LUMI I • • • • • •




                                                                                                   100-0019




                                                                                                              125
Superimposing a still image in a “Memory Stick” on a moving
      picture – MEMORY MIX

            Items to be adjusted
             M. CHROM             The color (blue) scheme of the area in the still picture which is to
                                  be swapped with a moving picture
             M. LUMI              The color (bright) scheme of the area in the still picture which is
                                  to be swapped with a moving picture
             C. CHROM             The color (blue) scheme of the area in the moving picture which
                                  is to be swapped with a still picture
             M. OVERLAP           No adjustment necessary

            As the bar is shorter, the effect is enhanced.

            To change the still image to be superimposed
            Do either of the following:
            – Press MEMORY+/– after step 6.
            – Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial after step 6, and repeat the procedure from step 4
              (except M. OVERLAP).

            To change the mode setting
            Press SEL/PUSH EXEC dial after step 6, and repeat the procedure from step 4 (except
            M. OVERLAP).

            To cancel MEMORY MIX
            Press MEMORY MIX.

            During recording
            You cannot change the mode setting.

            The “Memory Stick” supplied with your camcorder has 20 images stored
            – For M. CHROM: 18 images (such as a frame) 100-0001 to 100-0018
            – For C. CHROM: two images (such as background) 100-0019 to 100-0020

            Sample images
            Sample images stored in the “Memory Stick” supplied with your camcorder are
            protected (p. 138).

            If a still image to be superimposed has lots of white areas
            The thumbnail image may not be displayed clearly.

            Image data modified with personal computers or shot with other equipment
            You may not be able to play them back with your camcorder.




126
Recording an image from a mini DV tape
as a still image
    Your camcorder can read moving picture data recorded on a mini DV tape and record
    it as a still image on a “Memory Stick.” Your camcorder can also take in moving
    picture data through the input connector and record it as a still image on a “Memory
    Stick.”

    Before operation
    Insert a recorded mini DV tape and a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.

    (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
    (2) Press N. The picture recorded on the mini DV tape is played back.
    (3) Keep pressing PHOTO lightly until the picture from the mini DV tape freezes.
        “CAPTURE” appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. Recording does
        not start yet.
    (4) Press PHOTO deeper. The image displayed on the screen will be recorded on
        a “Memory Stick.” Recording is complete when the bar scroll indicator
        disappears.




                                                                                                 “Memory Stick” Operations
           2                                                         1                  POWER




                                                                                VCR
            REW     PLAY      FF




                                                                          (CHG)
                                                                           OFF CAMERA
                                                                                        MEMORY

            3                            CAPTURE    4
                PHOTO                                   PHOTO




    When the access lamp is lit or is flashing
    Never shake or strike the unit. Also, do not turn the power off , eject a “Memory Stick”
    or remove the battery pack. Otherwise, image data breakdown may occur.

    If “ ” appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder
    The inserted “Memory Stick” is incompatible with your camcorder because its format
    does not conform to that of your camcorder. Check the format of the “Memory Stick.”

    If you press PHOTO lightly in the playback mode
    The playback pauses momentarily.

    Sound recorded on a mini DV tape
    You cannot record the sound from a mini DV tape.




                                                                                                 127
Recording an image from a mini DV tape as a still image

             Titles that are already recorded on mini DV tapes
             You cannot record the titles on a “Memory Stick.”

             When you press PHOTO on the Remote Commander
             Your camcorder immediately records the image that is on the screen when you press
             the button.

       Recording a still image from other equipment
             (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder and set DISPLAY in           to
                 LCD in the menu settings.
             (2) Play back the recorded tape, or turn the TV on to see the desired program.
                 The picture from the other equipment appears on the LCD screen or in the
                 viewfinder.
             (3) Follow steps 3 and 4 on page 127.

             When recording an image through the VIDEO jack

                                     S VIDEO



                                           (not supplied)
                                                                    OUT
                                                                       S VIDEO
                               VIDEO                                   VIDEO



           : Signal flow
               Connect the yellow plug of the A/V connecting cable supplied with your camcorder to
               the video output jack on the VCR or the TV.

             Connect using an S video cable (not supplied) to obtain high-quality pictures
             With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/V
             connecting cable.
             Connect an S video cable (not supplied) to the S video jacks of both your camcorder and
             the VCR/TV.
             This connection produces higher quality DV format pictures.




128
Recording an image from a mini DV tape as a still image

      When recording the image through the                  DV IN/OUT jack




                                       DV IN/OUT
                                                                    DV       S VIDEO   LANC




                                                                         DV IN/OUT


         : Signal flow

                         i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (not supplied)




                                                                                              “Memory Stick” Operations




                                                                                              129
Copying still images from a mini DV tape
      – Photo save
            Using the search function, you can automatically take in only still images from mini DV
            tapes and record them on a “Memory Stick” in sequence.

            Before operation
            •Insert a recorded mini DV tape into your camcorder and rewind the tape.
            •Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.

            (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
            (2) Press MENU to display the menu.
            (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select     , then press the dial.
            (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select PHOTO SAVE, then press the dial.
                “PHOTO BUTTON” appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.
            (5) Press PHOTO deeply. The still image from the mini DV tape is recorded on the
                “Memory Stick.” The number of still images copied is displayed. “END” is
                displayed when copying is completed.


        1                  POWER
                                                                                             5                       PHOTO SAVE       00 : 00 : 00 : 00
                   VCR




                                                                                                                                            4 / 15
                                                                                                                                                 SFN

                                                                                                         PHOTO
             (CHG)




                                                                                                                           SAV I NG
              OFF CAMERA




                                                                                                                              0
                           MEMORY




                                                                                                                       [MENU] : END




        2
                                                                                                                     PHOTO SAVE       00 : 30 : 00 : 00
                                                                                                                                            8 / 15
                                    MENU                                                                                                         SFN


                                                                                                                              END
                                                                                                                               4
                                                                                                                       [MENU] : END




        3                                                      MEMORY SET
                                                                QUAL I TY
                                                                PR I NT MARK
                                                                PROTECT
                                                                PHOTO SAVE




                                                               [MENU] : END




        4                                  MEMORY SET
                                            QUAL I TY
                                            PR I NT MARK
                                            PROTECT
                                            PHOTO SAVE READY
                                                                               PHOTO SAVE        00 : 00 : 00 : 00
                                                                                                       4 / 15
                                                                                                            SFN

                                             RETURN
                                                                               PHOTO BUTTON

                                           [MENU] : END                        [PHOTO] : START   [MENU] : END




130
Copying still images from a mini DV tape – Photo save

      To cancel copying
      Press MENU.

      When the memory of the “Memory Stick” is full
      “MEMORY FULL” appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder, and the copying
      stops. Insert another “Memory Stick” and repeat the procedure from step 2.

      When the access lamp is lit or flashing
      Never shake or strike your camcorder. Also, do not turn the power off, eject the
      “Memory Stick” or remove the battery pack. Otherwise, the image data breakdown may
      occur.

      To record all the images recorded on the mini DV tape
      Rewind the tape all the way back and start copying.

      If the write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK
      “NOT READY” appears when you select the item in the menu settings.

      When you change the “Memory Stick” in the middle of copying




                                                                                           “Memory Stick” Operations
      Your camcorder resumes copying from the last image recorded on the previous
      “Memory Stick.”




                                                                                           131
Viewing a still picture – Memory Photo
      playback
           You can play back still images recorded on a “Memory Stick.” You can also play back
           six images at a time by selecting the index screen.

           Before operation
           Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.

           (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR or MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch
               is set to the right (unlock) position.
           (2) Press MEMORY PLAY. The last recorded image is displayed.
           (3) Press MEMORY +/– or +/– on the Remote Commander to select the desired
               still image. To see the previous image, press MEMORY – or – on the Remote
               Commander. To see the next image, press MEMORY + or + on the Remote
               Commander.


       2       PLAY                                                       1                     POWER




                                                                                       VCR
                                                                               (CHG)
                                                                                   OFF CAMERA
                                                                                                MEMORY
       3   –          +




           To stop memory photo playback
           Press MEMORY PLAY again.

           To play back recorded images on a TV screen
           •Connect your camcorder to the TV with the A/V connecting cable supplied with your
            camcorder before operation.
           •When operating memory photo playback on a TV or on the LCD screen, the image
            quality may appear to have deteriorated. This is not a malfunction. The image data is
            as good as ever.
           •Turn the volume of the TV down before operation, or noise (howling) may be output
            from the TV speakers.

           When no images are recorded on the “Memory Stick”
           The message “ NO FILE” appears.

           Image data modified with personal computers or shot with other equipment
           You may not be able to play them back with your camcorder.

           Note on the date/time indicator
           Recording date/time is not displayed, however, it is automatically recorded on the
           “Memory Stick.” You can check the recording date/time while in memory playback
           mode by pressing DATA CODE.

132
Viewing a still picture – Memory Photo playback

 Screen indicators during still image playback

                                                   Image number/
                                   6 / 15          Total number of recorded images
               100–0002       MEMORY PLAY

                                                   Print mark

                                                   Protect indicator




       Data file name
       On data file name
       •When the hyphen is indicated between the directory and the file number, this data file
        name means that this file corresponds to the DCF98 standard.
       •When the underbar is indicated between the directory and the file number, this data




                                                                                                      “Memory Stick” Operations
        file name means that this file does not correspond to the DCF98 standard.
       •The directory is not indicated if the file structure in the “Memory Stick” does not
        correspond to the DCF98 standard.
       •The “    - DIRECTORY ERROR” message may appear if the file structure in the
        “Memory Stick” does not correspond to the DCF98 standard. In this case, you cannot
        record on that “Memory Stick,” however, you can play back images in the “Memory
        Stick.”
       •When the data file name is flashes, the file may be broken or the file format does not
        correspond to your camcorder.

 Playing back six recorded images at a time (index screen)
       You can play back six recorded images at a time. This function is especially useful when
       searching for a particular image.
       (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR or MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch
           is set to the right (unlock) position.
       (2) Press MEMORY INDEX to display the index screen.




  2                                                                    1                     POWER
                                                                                    VCR




       INDEX
                                                                            (CHG)
                                                                                OFF CAMERA
                                                                                             MEMORY




                                                                                                      133
Viewing a still picture – Memory Photo playback

            A red B mark appears above the image that is displayed before changing to the index
            screen mode.
            MEMORY – : to display the previous six images
            MEMORY + : to display the following six images
            If you select the desired image by turning the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial, then press the
            dial, the selected image will be displayed on full screen.

                    7        8         9



                   10       11        12
                                                 [b]

                100-0019           12 / 19


                   [a]
            [a] File name
            [b] B mark

            To return to the normal playback screen (single screen)
            Press MEMORY +/– to move the B mark to the image you want to display on full
            screen, then press MEMORY PLAY.

            Files modified with personal computers
            These files may not be displayed on the index screen. Image files shot with other
            equipment may not be displayed on the index screen either.

            Note
            When displaying the index screen, a number appears above each image. This indicates
            the order in which images are recorded on the “Memory Stick.” These numbers are
            different from the data file names.

       Viewing the recorded images using a personal computer
            The image data recorded with your camcorder is compressed in the JPEG format. If you
            use the application software, “PictureGear 4.1Lite” supplied with your camcorder, you
            can see images recorded on a “Memory Stick” on a computer screen. Use the Memory
            Stick Reader/Writer supplied with your camcorder, the Memory Stick/PC card kit or
            PC card adaptor for Memory Stick (not supplied) for this operation. For detailed
            instructions on operation, refer to the operating instructions of the serial port adaptor,
            Memory Stick/PC card kit or PC card adaptor for Memory Stick and your application
            software. For details, refer to the operating instructions of your accessory.
            •Do not modify the directory of the file that corresponds to the DCF98 standard. The
              modified file will not be read.
            •If you use the new “Memory Stick,” be sure to use it first with this camcorder.

            Recommended Windows environment
            •OS: Microsoft Windows 98 standard installation
             Operation in an environment upgraded to Windows 98 is not assured.
            •CPU: MMX Pentium 200 MHz or faster

            Recommended Macintosh environment
            •OS: Mac OS system 8.5/8.6 standard installation
134         •Model: iMac/G3
Copying an image recorded on a
“Memory Stick” to mini DV tapes
    You can copy still images or titles recorded on a “Memory Stick” to a mini DV tape.

    Before operation
    Insert a mini DV tape for recording and a “Memory Stick” for playback into your
    camcorder.

    (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
    (2) Using the video control buttons, search for a point where you want to record
        the desired still image. Set the mini DV tape to playback pause mode.
    (3) Press z REC and the button on its right simultaneously on your camcorder.
        The mini DV tape is set to the recording pause mode.
    (4) Press MEMORY PLAY to play back the still image you want to copy.
    (5) Press X to start recording and press X again to stop.
    (6) If you have more to copy, repeat steps 4 and 5.


                                                               1                  POWER




                                                                          VCR
                                                                    (CHG)
                                                                     OFF CAMERA




                                                                                             “Memory Stick” Operations
                                                                                  MEMORY
                                                3
                                                 REC




           4      PLAY
                              2


                              5
                                    PAUSE




    To stop copying in the middle
    Press x.

    During copying
    •You cannot operate the following buttons:
     MEMORY PLAY, MEMORY INDEX, MEMORY DELETE, MEMORY +, MEMORY –,
     and MEMORY MIX.
    •If you continue copying, do not use EDITSEARCH to search for the point where you
     want to record the desired still image. If you do, the playback image disappears from
     the screen.


                                                                                             135
Copying an image recorded on a “Memory Stick” to mini DV tapes

            Note on the index screen
            You cannot record the index screen.

            Image data modified with personal computers or shot with other equipment
            You may not be able to copy them with your camcorder.

            If you press DISPLAY in standby or recording mode
            You can see memory playback and the file name indicators in addition to the indicators
            pertinent to mini DV tapes, such as the time code indicator.




136
Playing back images continuously
– SLIDE SHOW
      You can automatically play back images in sequence. This function is useful especially
      when checking recorded images or during a presentation.

      Before operation
      Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.

      (1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to
          the right (unlock) position.
      (2) Press MENU to display the menu.
      (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select    , then press the dial.
      (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select SLIDE SHOW, then press the dial.
      (5) Press MEMORY PLAY. Your camcorder plays back the images recorded on the
          “Memory Stick” in sequence.


                                                            1                      POWER




                                                                          VCR
                                                                  (CHG)
                                                                      OFF CAMERA




                                                                                                                            “Memory Stick” Operations
                                                                                   MEMORY




    2      MENU
                       3                                        MEMORY SET
                                                                 CONT I NUOUS
                                                                 QUAL I TY
                                                                 PR I NT MARK
                                                                 PROTECT
                                                                 SL I DE SHOW
                                                                 DELETE ALL
                                                                 FORMAT



                                                                [MENU] : END




5   PLAY
                       4              MEMORY SET
                                       CONT I NUOUS
                                       QUAL I TY
                                       PR I NT MARK
                                       PROTECT
                                                                                            SL I DE SHOW
                                                                                            100-0019
                                                                                                                10 / 15




                                       SL I DE SHOW READY
                                       DELETE ALL
                                       FORMAT
                                        RETURN


                                       [MENU] : END                                         [M PLAY] : START [MENU] : END




      To stop or end the slide show
      Press MENU.

      To pause during a slide show
      Press MEMORY PLAY.

      To start the slide show from a particular image
      Select the desired image using MEMORY +/– buttons before step 2.

      To view the recorded images on TV
      Connect your camcorder to a TV with the A/V connecting cable supplied with your
      camcorder before operation.

      If you change the “Memory Stick” during operation
      Be sure to follow the steps again from the beginning.

                                                                                                                            137
Preventing accidental erasure
      – Image protection
            To prevent accidental erasure of important images, you can protect selected images.

            Before operation
            Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.

            (1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or VCR. Make sure that the LOCK switch
                is set to the right (unlock) position.
            (2) Play back the image you want to protect (p. 132).
            (3) Press MENU to display the menu.
            (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select       , then press the dial.
            (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select PROTECT, then press the dial.
            (6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial.
            (7) Press MENU to erase the menu display. The “-“ mark is displayed beside
                the data file name of the protected image.



                                                                         1                      POWER




                                                                                       VCR
                                                                               (CHG)
                                                                                   OFF CAMERA
                                                                                                MEMORY




      3,7       MENU         4                                               MEMORY SET
                                                                              CONT I NUOUS
                                                                              QUAL I TY
                                                                              PR I NT MARK
                                                                              PROTECT
                                                                              SL I DE SHOW
                                                                              DELETE ALL
                                                                              FORMAT



                                                                             [MENU] : END




                             5               MEMORY SET
                                              CONT I NUOUS
                                              QUAL I TY
                                              PR I NT MARK
                                              PROTECT      OFF
                                                               10 / 15                                   MEMORY SET
                                                                                                          CONT I NUOUS
                                                                                                          QUAL I TY
                                                                                                          PR I NT MARK
                                                                                                          PROTECT      ON
                                                                                                                          10 / 15




                                              SL I DE SHOW                                                SL I DE SHOW OFF
                                              DELETE ALL                                                  DELETE ALL
                                              FORMAT                                                      FORMAT
                                               RETURN                                                      RETURN


                                             [MENU] : END                                                [MENU] : END




                             6                                               MEMORY SET
                                                                              CONT I NUOUS
                                                                              QUAL I TY
                                                                              PR I NT MARK
                                                                              PROTECT      ON
                                                                                              10 / 15




                                                                              SL I DE SHOW
                                                                              DELETE ALL
                                                                              FORMAT
                                                                               RETURN


                                                                             [MENU] : END




            To cancel image protection
            Select OFF in step 6, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.

            Note
            Formatting erases all information on the “Memory Stick,” including the protected
            image data. Check the contents of the “Memory Stick” before formatting.

            If the write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK
            You cannot carry out image protection.
138
Deleting images
     You can delete images stored in a “Memory Stick.”

Deleting selected images
     Before operation
     Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.

     (1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or VCR. Make sure that the LOCK switch
         is set to the right (unlock) position.
     (2) Play back the image you want to delete (p. 132).
     (3) Press MEMORY DELETE. “DELETE?” appears on the LCD screen or in the
         viewfinder.
     (4) Press MEMORY DELETE again. The selected image is deleted.




                                                                          1                    POWER




                                                                                      VCR




                                                                                                        “Memory Stick” Operations
                                                                              (CHG)
                                                                                  OFF CAMERA
                                                                                               MEMORY

                3,4                    DELETE
                                       100-0019
                                                             10 / 15



                         DELETE               DELETE?


                                        [DELETE] : DEL   [ – ] : CANCEL




     To cancel deleting an image
     Press MEMORY – in step 4.

     To delete an image displayed on the index screen
     Press MEMORY +/– to move the B mark to the desired image and follow steps 3 and 4.

     Notes
     •To delete a protected image, first cancel image protection.
     •Once you delete an image, you cannot restore it. Check the images to be deleted
      carefully before deleting them.

     While “DELETING” appears
     Do not turn the POWER switch or press any buttons.

     If the write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK
     You cannot delete any image.



                                                                                                        139
Deleting images

      Deleting all the images
            You can delete all the unprotected images in a “Memory Stick.”

            Before operation
            Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.

            (1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to
                the right (unlock) position.
            (2) Press MENU to display the menu.
            (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select      , then press the dial.
            (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select DELETE ALL, then press the dial.
            (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select OK, then press the dial. “OK” changes
                to “EXECUTE.”
            (6) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. “DELETING” appears on the LCD screen or
                in the viewfinder. When all the unprotected images are deleted, “COMPLETE”
                is displayed.



                                                                      1                           POWER




                                                                                         VCR
                                                                                 (CHG)
                                                                                     OFF CAMERA
                                                                                                  MEMORY




      2      MENU            3                                                  MEMORY SET
                                                                                 CONT I NUOUS
                                                                                 QUAL I TY
                                                                                 PR I NT MARK
                                                                                 PROTECT
                                                                                 SL I DE SHOW
                                                                                 DELETE ALL
                                                                                 FORMAT



                                                                                [MENU] : END




                             4              MEMORY SET
                                             CONT I NUOUS
                                             QUAL I TY
                                             PR I NT MARK
                                             PROTECT
                                                                                                           MEMORY SET
                                                                                                            CONT I NUOUS
                                                                                                            QUAL I TY
                                                                                                            PR I NT MARK
                                                                                                            PROTECT
                                             SL I DE SHOW                                                   SL I DE SHOW
                                             DELETE ALL READY                                               DELETE ALL RETURN
                                             FORMAT                                                         FORMAT       OK
                                              RETURN                                                         RETURN


                                            [MENU] : END                                                   [MENU] : END




                             5              MEMORY SET
                                             CONT I NUOUS
                                             QUAL I TY
                                             PR I NT MARK
                                             PROTECT
                                                                                                           MEMORY SET
                                                                                                            CONT I NUOUS
                                                                                                            QUAL I TY
                                                                                                            PR I NT MARK
                                                                                                            PROTECT
                                             SL I DE SHOW                                                   SL I DE SHOW
                                             DELETE ALL RETURN                                              DELETE ALL RETURN
                                             FORMAT       OK                                                FORMAT       EXECUTE
                                              RETURN                                                         RETURN


                                            [MENU] : END                                                   [MENU] : END




                             6                                   MEMORY SET
                                                                  CONT I NUOUS
                                                                  QUAL I TY
                                                                  PR I NT MARK
                                                                  PROTECT
                                                                                                           MEMORY SET
                                                                                                            CONT I NUOUS
                                                                                                            QUAL I TY
                                                                                                            PR I NT MARK
                                                                                                            PROTECT
                                                                  SL I DE SHOW                              SL I DE SHOW
                                                                  DELETE ALL DELET I NG                     DELETE ALL COMPLETE
                                                                  FORMAT                                    FORMAT
                                                                   RETURN                                    RETURN


                                                                 [MENU] : END                              [MENU] : END




140
Deleting images

      To cancel deleting all the images in the “Memory Stick”
      Select RETURN in step 5 or 6, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.




                                                                         “Memory Stick” Operations




                                                                         141
Writing a print mark – Print mark
            You can specify the recorded still image to be printed out. This function is useful for
            printing out still images later.
            Your camcorder conforms with the DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standard for
            specifying the still images to print out.

            Before operation
            Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.

            (1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or VCR. Make sure that the LOCK switch
                is set to the right (unlock) position.
            (2) Play back the image to be printed out (p. 132).
            (3) Press MENU to display the menu.
            (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select       , then press the dial.
            (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select PRINT MARK, then press the dial.
            (6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial.
            (7) Press MENU to erase the menu display. The “       ” mark is displayed beside
                the data file name of an image.


                                                                          1                     POWER




                                                                                       VCR
                                                                               (CHG)
                                                                                   OFF CAMERA
                                                                                                MEMORY




      3,7       MENU          4                                               MEMORY SET
                                                                               CONT I NUOUS
                                                                               QUAL I TY
                                                                               PR I NT MARK
                                                                               PROTECT
                                                                               SL I DE SHOW
                                                                               DELETE ALL
                                                                               FORMAT



                                                                              [MENU] : END




                              5               MEMORY SET
                                               CONT I NUOUS
                                               QUAL I TY
                                               PR I NT MARK OFF
                                               PROTECT
                                                                10 / 12                                  MEMORY SET
                                                                                                          CONT I NUOUS
                                                                                                          QUAL I TY
                                                                                                          PR I NT MARK ON
                                                                                                          PROTECT      OFF
                                                                                                                          10 / 12




                                               SL I DE SHOW                                               SL I DE SHOW
                                               DELETE ALL                                                 DELETE ALL
                                               FORMAT                                                     FORMAT
                                                RETURN                                                     RETURN


                                              [MENU] : END                                               [MENU] : END




                              6                                               MEMORY SET
                                                                               CONT I NUOUS
                                                                               QUAL I TY
                                                                               PR I NT MARK ON
                                                                               PROTECT
                                                                                               10 / 12




                                                                               SL I DE SHOW
                                                                               DELETE ALL
                                                                               FORMAT
                                                                                RETURN


                                                                              [MENU] : END




            To cancel writing print marks
            Select OFF in step 6, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.

            If the write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK
            You cannot write print marks on still images.

142
— Additional Information —

Usable cassettes
 Selecting cassette types
        You can use the       mini DV cassette only*. You cannot use any other 8 mm,
             Hi8,   Digital8,    VHS,        VHSC,         S-VHS,          S-VHSC,
        Betamax,        ED Betamax or     DV cassette.

        * There are two types of mini DV cassettes: with cassette memory and without cassette
          memory. Tapes with cassette memory have         (Cassette Memory) mark. Sony
          recommends that you use a tape with       mark to enjoy your camcorder fully.

        The IC memory is built in the cassette with cassette memory. Using this IC memory,
        your camcorder can read, write, and search data such as the date of recording or titles.
        The functions using the cassette memory require successive signals recorded on the
        tape. If the tape has a blank portion in the beginning or between the recorded portions,
        a title may not be displayed properly or the search functions may not work correctly.
        Not to make any blank portion on the tape, press END SEARCH to return to the end of
        the recorded portion before you begin the next recording when:
        – You have ejected the cassette while recording.
        – You have played back the tape in VCR mode.
        If there is a blank portion or discontinuous signal on your tape, re-record from the
        beginning to the end of the tape concerning above.




                                                                                                   Additional Information
        When you record, using a digital video camera recorder without a cassette memory
        function, on a tape recorded by one with the cassette memory function, the same result
        may occur.

              mark on the cassette
        The memory capacity of tapes marked with        is 4 Kb. Your camcorder can
        accommodate up to 16 Kb. 16 Kb tape is marked with         .

        The maximum number of data recordable on cassette memory (when using 4 Kb
        cassette memory)
        Data                          Numbers
        INDEX                         32
        TITLE                         25
        DATE                          6 (10 bytes/1 data)
        PHOTO                         12 (10 bytes/1 data)
        CASSETTE LABEL                1 (6 bytes/1 data)

 Copyright signal
        When you play back
        When you connect your camcorder to any other video camera recorder to dub a tape
        that has recorded copyright control signals for copyright protection, you may not
        record the tape that played back on your camcorder.

        When you record
        You cannot record software on your camcorder that contains copyright control
        signals for copyright protection of software.
        “COPY INHIBIT” appears on the LCD screen, in the viewfinder or on the TV screen if
        you try to record such software.
        Your camcorder does not record copyright control signals on the tape when it records.

                                                                                                   143
Usable cassettes

       Audio mode
            12-bit mode: The original sound can be recorded in stereo 1, and the new sound in
            stereo 2 in 32 kHz. The balance between stereo 1 and stereo 2 can be adjusted by
            selecting AUDIO MIX in the menu settings during playback. Both sounds can be played
            back.
            16-bit mode: A new sound cannot be recorded but the original sound can be recorded in
            high quality. Moreover, it can also play back sound recorded in 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or
            48 kHz. When playing back a tape recorded in the 16-bit mode, 16BIT indicator appears
            on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.

       When you play back a dual sound track tape
            When you play back a dual sound track tape recorded in a stereo system, set HiFi
            SOUND to the desired mode in the menu settings (p. 107).

            Sound from speaker
             HiFi SOUND       Playing back         Playing back a dual
             mode             a stereo tape        sound track tape
             STEREO           Stereo               Main sound and
                                                   sub sound
             1                Left sound           Main sound
             2                Right sound          Sub sound

            You cannot record dual sound programs on your camcorder.

       Notes on the mini DV cassette
            When affixing a label on the mini DV cassette
            Be sure to affix a label only on the locations as illustrated below [a] so as not to cause
            malfunction of your camcorder.

            After using the mini DV cassette
            Rewind the tape to the beginning, put the cassette in its case, and store it in an upright
            position.

            If the cassette memory function does not work
            Reinsert a cassette a few times. The gold-plated connector of mini DV cassettes may be
            dirty or dusty.

            Cleaning the connector
            If the gold-plated connector of mini DV cassettes is dirty or dusty, you may not operate
            the function using cassette memory. Clean up the gold-plated connector with cotton-
            wool swab, about every 10 times ejection of a cassette. [b]

                                         Do not affix a label
                                         around this border.                                     [b]




144                 [a]
About i.LINK
    Your camcorder is equipped with the DV input/output connector based on i.LINK
    (IEEE1394) standard.
    This section explains the specifications and features of i.LINK.

    What is i.LINK?
    i.LINK is a digital serial interface designed to integrate the devices equipped with
    i.LINK connector. By connecting i.LINK devices, i.LINK allows your device to:
    – Transmit and receive data such as digital audio and digital video signals in two ways
    – Control other i.LINK devices
    – Easily connect with another device using just an i.LINK cable.
    Your i.LINK device is capable of connecting AV devices and perform various
    operations and data transfer. Further availability for connections with versatile
    equipment and operations will be planned in the future.
    Other advantages include the following feature. When connecting multiple i.LINK
    devices, your device cannot only perform operations and data transfer with the directly
    connected device but also perform them with any of the devices that are connected via
    other devices. Therefore, you will not need to concern the order of connecting devices.
    However, depending on the features and specifications of the connected devices, you
    may need to operate certain functions differently or may not be able to perform certain
    operations or data transfer.

    Note
    Your camcorder can be connected to one device with the i.LINK cable (DV cable).




                                                                                               Additional Information
    When you connect with a device that has two or more i.LINK connectors, refer to the
    operating instructions supplied with the connected device.

    Tips
    •i.LINK, a nickname for IEEE 1394 that Sony proposed, is a trademark supported by a
      majority of companies worldwide.
    •IEEE 1394 is an international standard defined by IEEE, The Institute of Electrical and
      Electronics Engineers, Inc.

    About data transfer speed of i.LINK
    i.LINK defines a maximum data transfer speed of approximately 100, 200 and 400
    Mbps* that are described as S100, S200 and S400 respectively.
    For i.LINK devices, a maximum data transfer speed that the device supports is
    identified on “Specifications” page of the operating instructions supplied with the
    device or near its i.LINK connector.
    With a device that does not identify the data transfer speed, the maximum data transfer
    speed that the device supports is S100.
    When connecting with the device that support different data transfer speed, the actual
    data transfer speed may be different from those described on the i.LINK connectors.

    *What is Mbps?
    Mega bits per second. A measure of the rate at which data is transmitted per second. In
    case of 100 Mbps, 100 Mega bits of data can be transmitted per second.

    i. LINK operation with your camcorder
    For details on dubbing your camcorder to your VCR equipped with DV input/output
    connector , see page 74, 89.
    Your camcorder is available for use with other devices equipped with Sony i.LINK (DV)
    connector (eg. VAIO personal computer series).
    For details on connection with i.LINK cable and necessary software, refer to the
    operating instructions supplied with the connected device.

    Use Sony i.LINK cables
    Use Sony i.LINK cables to connect the i.LINK devices.
    4 pins y 4 pins (For dubbing)

    i.LINK and   are trademarks.
                                                                                               145
Troubleshooting
               If you run into any problem using your camcorder, use the following table to
               troubleshoot the problem. If the problem persists, disconnect the power source and
               contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility. If “C:ss:ss”
               appears on the LCD screen, display window or in the viewfinder, the self-diagnosis
               display function has worked. See page 152.

      In the recording mode

      Symptom                         Cause and/or Corrective Actions
      START/STOP does not             •The POWER switch is not set to CAMERA.
      operate.                         c Set it to CAMERA. (p. 15)
                                      •The tape has run out.
                                       c Rewind the tape or insert a new one. (p. 14, 29)
                                      •The write-protect tab on the cassette is set to expose the red
                                       mark.
                                       c Use a new tape or slide the tab. (p. 14)
                                      •The tape is stuck to the drum (moisture condensation).
                                       c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at least
                                         one hour to acclimatize. (p. 156)
      The power goes off.             •While being operated in CAMERA mode, your camcorder
                                       has been in the standby mode for more than five minutes.
                                       c Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) and then to
                                         CAMERA again. (p. 16)
                                      •The battery pack is dead or nearly dead.
                                       c Install a charged battery pack. (p. 9, 10)
      The image on the viewfinder     •The viewfinder lens is not adjusted.
      screen is not clear.             c Adjust the viewfinder lens. (p. 19)
      The SteadyShot function         •STEADYSHOT is set to OFF in the menu settings.
      does not work.                   c Set it to ON. (p. 107)
      The autofocusing function       •The camcorder is in manual focus mode.
      does not work.                   c Turn to auto focus mode. (p. 58)
                                      •Shooting conditions are not suitable for autofocus.
                                       c Adjust focus manually. (p. 58)
      The fader function does not     •The digital effect function is working.
      work.                            c Cancel it. (p. 40)
      A vertical band appears         •The contrast between the subject and background is too
      when you shoot a subject         high. This is not a malfunction.
      such as lights or a candle
      flame against a dark
      background.
      Vertical streaks appear         •This is called the smear phenomenon. This is not a
      when you shoot a very            malfunction.
      bright subject.




146
Troubleshooting

Symptom                         Cause and/or Corrective Actions
Some tiny white spots           • When the shutter speed is too low or the low lux mode is
appear on the LCD screen or       selected.
in the viewfinder.
Unknown pictures or             • If 10 minutes elapse after you set the POWER switch to
messages are displayed on         CAMERA or DEMO MODE is set to ON in the menu settings
the LCD screen or in the          without a cassette inserted, your camcorder automatically
viewfinder.                       starts the demonstration.
                                  c Insert a cassette. The demonstration stops.
                                     You can also cancel DEMO MODE. (p. 112)
The click of the shutter does   • BEEP is set to OFF in the menu settings.
not sound.                        c Set it to MELODY or NORMAL. (p. 107)
The image is not bright even    • The ND FILTER selector is set to 1 or 2.
if you use the video flash        c Set it to OFF. (p. 46)
light.                          • The manual adjustment is not suitable for the situations.
                                  (The indicator flashes.)
                                  c Set the AUTO LOCK selector to AUTO LOCK, or cancel
                                     the manual adjustment. (p. 43)

In the playback mode




                                                                                                  Additional Information
Symptom                         Cause and/or Corrective Actions
The tape does not move          • The POWER switch is not set to VCR.
when a video control button       c Set it to VCR. (p. 26)
is pressed.
The playback button does        • The tape has run out.
not function.                     c Rewind the tape. (p. 29)
There are horizontal lines on   • The video head may be dirty.
the picture or the playback       c Clean the heads using the Sony DVM12CL cleaning
picture is not clear or does        cassette (not supplied). (p. 157)
not appear.
No sound or only a low          • The volume is turned to minimum.
sound is heard when               c Turn up the volume. (p. 26)
playing back a tape.            • AUDIO MIX is set to the ST2 side in the menu settings.
                                  c Adjust AUDIO MIX. (p. 107)
The title search function       • The tape has no cassette memory.
does not work.                    c Use a tape with cassette memory. (p. 66, 143)
                                • CM SEARCH is set to OFF in the menu settings.
                                  c Set it to ON. (p. 107)
                                • There is no title in the tape.
                                  c Superimpose the titles. (p. 97)
                                • The tape has a blank portion in the recorded portion. (p. 66)


                                                              (continued on the following page)




                                                                                                  147
Troubleshooting

      Symptom                       Cause and/or Corrective Actions
      Displaying the recorded       •The tape has no cassette memory.
      date, date search function     c Use a tape with cassette memory. (p. 67, 143)
      does not work.                •CM SEARCH is set to OFF in the menu settings.
                                     c Set it to ON. (p. 107)
                                    •The tape has a blank portion in the recorded portion. (p. 68)
      The new sound now being       •AUDIO MIX is set to ST1 side in the menu settings.
      added, or that has been        c Set it to the side you want to monitor. (p. 107)
      added to the recorded tape
      is not heard.
      The title is not displayed.   •TITLE DSPL is set to OFF in the menu settings.
                                     c Set it to ON. (p. 107)
      The sound is muted or          c Pull out the A/V connecting cable from the AUDIO L/R
      images do not appear when        and VIDEO jacks, then connect it again.
      monitoring images through
      TV/VCR.

      In the recording and playback modes

      Symptom                       Cause and/or Corrective Actions
      The power does not turn on.   •The battery pack is not installed, or is dead or nearly dead.
                                     c Install a charged battery pack. (p. 9, 10)
                                    •The AC power adaptor is not connected to a wall outlet.
                                     c Connect the AC power adaptor to a wall outlet. (p. 13)
      The end search function       •The tape was ejected after recording when using a tape
      does not work.                 without cassette memory. (p. 25, 29)
                                    •You have not recorded on the new cassette yet. (p. 25, 29)
      The end search function       •The tape has a blank portion in the beginning or middle.
      does not work correctly.       (p. 25)
      The picture does not appear   •The LCD panel is open.
      in the viewfinder.             c Close the LCD panel. (p. 17)
      The battery pack is quickly   •The operating temperature is too low.
      discharged.                   •The battery pack is not fully charged.
                                     c Charge the battery pack fully. (p. 10)
                                    •The battery pack is completely dead, and cannot be
                                     recharged.
                                     c Replace with a new battery pack. (p. 9)
      The battery remaining         •You have used the battery pack in an extremely hot or cold
      indicator does not indicate    environment for a long time.
      the correct time.             •The battery pack is completely dead, and cannot be
                                     recharged.
                                     c Replace with a new battery pack. (p. 9)
                                    •The battery is dead.
                                     c Use a full-charged battery pack. (p. 9, 10)




148
Troubleshooting

Symptom                        Cause and/or Corrective Actions
The cassette cannot be         • The power source is disconnected.
removed from the holder.         c Connect it firmly. (p. 9, 13)
                               • The battery is dead.
                                 c Use a charged battery pack. (p. 9, 10)
The % and Z indicators         • Moisture condensation has occurred.
flash and no functions           c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at least
except for cassette ejection       one hour to acclimatize. (p. 156)
work.
    indicator does not         • The gold-plated connector of the tape is dirty or dusty.
appear when using a tape         c Clean the gold-plated connector. (p. 144)
with cassette memory.
Remaining tape indicator is    • The q REMAIN is set to AUTO in the menu settings.
not displayed.                   c Set it to ON to always display the remaining tape
                                   indicator. (p. 107)

When operating using the “Memory Stick”

Symptom                        Cause and/or Corrective Actions




                                                                                                 Additional Information
Operations do not function.    • The POWER switch is set to CAMERA or OFF (CHG).
                                 c Set it to MEMORY or VCR.
                               • The “Memory Stick” is not inserted.
                                 c Insert a “Memory Stick.” (p. 117)
Recording does not function.   • The “Memory Stick” has already been recorded to its full
                                 capacity.
                                 c Erase unnecessary images and record again. (p. 120, 139)
                               • The “Memory Stick” formatted incorrectly is inserted.
                                 c Format the “Memory Stick” or use another “Memory
                                   Stick.” (p. 110)
                               • The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK.
                                 c Set the tab to write. (p. 115)
The image cannot be            • The image is protected.
deleted.                         c Cancel image protection. (p. 138)
                               • The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK.
                                 c Set the tab to write. (p. 115)
You cannot format the          • The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK.
“Memory Stick.”                  c Set the tab to write. (p. 115)
Deleting all the images        • The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK.
cannot be carried out.           c Set the tab to write. (p. 115)
You cannot protect the         • The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK.
image.                           c Set the tab to write. (p. 115)
                               • The image to be protected is not being played back.
                                 c Press MEMORY PLAY to play back the image. (p. 132)
You cannot write a print       • The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK.
mark on the still image.         c Set the tab to write. (p. 115)
                               • The image that you will write a print mark is not being
                                 played back.
                                 c Press MEMORY PLAY to play back the image. (p. 132)

                                                             (continued on the following page)

                                                                                                 149
Troubleshooting

      Symptom                       Cause and/or Corrective Actions
      The photo save function       •The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK.
      does not work.                 c Set the tab to write. (p. 115)
                                    •The battery pack is dead.
                                     c Install a charged battery pack or use the AC power
                                       adaptor instead of the battery pack. (p. 9, 13)

      Others

      Symptom                       Cause and/or Corrective Actions
      The title is not recorded.    •The tape has no cassette memory.
                                     c Use a tape with cassette memory. (p. 97, 143)
                                    •The cassette memory is full.
                                     c Erase unnecessary title. (p. 100)
                                    •The tape is set to prevent accidental erasure.
                                     c Slide the write-protect tab so that red portion is not
                                       visible. (p. 14)
                                    •Nothing is recorded in that position on the tape.
                                     c Superimpose the title to the recorded position. (p. 97)
      The cassette label is not     •The tape has no cassette memory.
      recorded.                      c Use a tape with cassette memory. (p. 103, 143)
                                    •The cassette memory is full.
                                     c Erase some data. (p. 105)
                                    •The tape is set to prevent accidental erasure.
                                     c Slide the write-protect tab so that red portion is not
                                       visible. (p. 14)
      While editing using the        c Disconnect the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable), and
      i.LINK cable (DV connecting      connect it again. (p. 74)
      cable), recording picture
      cannot be monitored.
      Digital program editing       •The input selector on the VCR is not set correctly.
      does not function.             c Check the connection and set up the selector position.
                                       (p. 73)
                                    •The camcorder is not connected to Sony DV equipment.
                                     c Set CONTROL to IR in the menu settings and set the
                                       recording VCR to be controlled by infrared rays.
                                    •Setting program on a blank portion of the tape is attempted.
                                     c Set the program again on a recorded portion. (p. 84)
                                    •Your camcorder and the VCR are not synchronized.
                                     c Synchronize them. (p. 81)




150
Troubleshooting

Symptom                        Cause and/or Corrective Actions
The Remote Commander           • COMMANDER is set to OFF in the menu settings.
supplied with your               c Set it to ON. (p. 107)
camcorder does not work.       • Something is blocking the infrared rays.
                                 c Remove the obstacle.
                               • The batteries are inserted in the battery holder with the + –
                                 polarities incorrectly.
                                 c Insert the batteries with the correct polarity. (p. 168)
                               • The batteries are dead.
                                 c Insert new ones. (p. 168)
The picture from a TV or       • DISPLAY is set to V-OUT/LCD in the menu settings.
VCR does not appear even         c Set it to LCD. (p. 107)
when your camcorder is
connected to outputs on the
TV or VCR.
The melody or beep sounds      • Moisture condensation has occurred.
for five seconds.                c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at least
                                   one hour to acclimatize. (p. 156)
                               • Some troubles have occurred in your camcorder.
                                 c Remove the cassette and insert it again, then operate your
                                   camcorder.




                                                                                                 Additional Information
When charging the battery      • The AC power adaptor is disconnected.
pack, no indicator appears       c Connect it properly.
or the indicator flashes on    • The battery pack malfunctions.
the display window.              c Contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service
                                   facility.
You cannot charge the          • The POWER switch is not set to OFF (CHG).
battery pack.                    c Set it to OFF (CHG).
The camcorder is                 c Charge the battery pack fully again.
immediately turned off even        The correct remaining time is displayed.
if the amount of the battery
remaining time is enough to
operate.
No function works though        c Disconnect the power cord of the AC power adaptor or
the power is on.                  remove the battery, then reconnect it after about one
                                  minute. Turn the power on. If the functions still do not
                                  work, press the RESET button located at the lower-right of
                                  the ZEBRA selector using a sharp-pointed object. (If you
                                  press the RESET button, all the settings including the date
                                  and time return to the default.) (p. 13, 163)




                                                                                                 151
Self-diagnosis display
      Your camcorder has a self-diagnosis display
      function.
                                                               On the LCD screen or in the
      This function displays the current condition of          viewfinder, on the display
      your camcorder as a 5-digit code (a                      window
      combination of a letter and figures) on the                          C:21:00
      LCD screen, display window, or in the
      viewfinder. If a 5-digit code is displayed, check
      the following code chart. The last two digits
      (indicated by ss) will differ depending on
      the state of your camcorder.
                                                               Self-diagnosis display
                                                               •C:ss:ss
                                                               You can service your camcorder
                                                               yourself.
                                                               •E:ss:ss
                                                               Contact your Sony dealer or
                                                               nearest local authorized Sony
                                                               service facility.

      Five-digit display     Cause and/or Corrective Actions
      C:04:ss                •You are using a battery pack that is not an “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack.
                              c Use an “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack. (p. 10)
      C:21:ss                •Moisture condensation has occurred.
                              c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at least one hour to
                                acclimatize. (p. 156)
      C:22:ss                •The video heads are dirty.
                              c Clean the heads using the Sony DVM12CL cleaning cassette (not
                                supplied). (p. 157)
      C:31:ss                •A malfunction other than the above.
      C:32:ss                 c Remove the cassette and insert it again, then operate your camcorder.
                              c Disconnect the power cord of the AC power adaptor or remove the
                                battery pack. After reconnecting the power source, operate your
                                camcorder.
      E:61:ss                •A malfunction that you cannot service has occurred.
      E:62:ss                 c Contact your Sony dealer and inform them of the 5-digit code.
                                (example: E:61:10)


                If you are unable to rectify the problem even if you try corrective actions a few times,
                contact your Sony dealer or nearest local authorized Sony service facility.




152
Warning indicators and messages
    If indicators and messages appear on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder, check the following:
    See the page in parentheses “( )” for more information.

    Warning indicators
    E The battery is dead or nearly dead
    Slow flashing:
    •The battery is nearly dead.
      Depending on conditions, the E indicator may flash, even if there are five to 10
      minutes remaining. If this flashes, we recommend that you charge the battery or
      install the charged battery.
    Fast flashing:
    •The battery is dead (p. 10).
    •The battery is completely dead.

        Warning indicator as to tape
    Slow flashing:
    •The tape is near the end.
    •No tape is inserted (p. 14).*
    •The write-protect tab on the cassette is out (red) (p. 14).*
    Fast flashing:
    •The tape has run out (p. 29).*




                                                                                                     Additional Information
    Z You need to eject the cassette
    Slow flashing:
    •The write-protect tab on the cassette is out (red) (p. 14).*
    Fast flashing:
    •Moisture condensation has occurred (p. 156).*
    •The tape has run out (p. 29).*
    •The self-diagnosis display function is activated (p. 152).*

    % Moisture condensation has occurred*
    Fast flashing:
    •Eject the cassette, turn off your camcorder, and leave it for about one hour with the
     cassette compartment open (p. 156).

        Warning indicator as to cassette memory
    Slow flashing:
    •No tape with cassette memory is inserted (p. 143).*

    Self-diagnosis display (p. 152)

    - The still image is protected
    Slow flashing:
    •The still image is protected (p. 138).*

       Warning indicator as to “Memory Stick”*
    Slow flashing:
    •No “Memory Stick” is inserted (p. 117).
    Fast flashing:
    • Unreadable “Memory Stick” is inserted.




                                                                                                     153
Warning indicators and messages

            100-0001 “(Warning indicators) Memory Stick” file error*
            Slow flashing:
            •File is broken.
            •File has no compatibility.

               “Memory Stick” format error*
            Fast flashing:
            •There are tow directories or more.
            •Data is broken.
            •“Memory Stick” is not formatted correctly (p. 110).

            Warning messages
            •CLOCK SET           Reset the date and time (p. 114).
            •FOR “InfoLITHIUM” Use an “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack (p. 10).
              BATTERY ONLY
            •MEMORY FULL         The “Memory Stick” is full in photo save function (p. 131).
            •     CLEANING CASSETTE
                                 The video heads are dirty (p. 157).**
            •     FULL           The tape cassette memory is full (p. 99).*
            •    16BIT           AUDIO MODE is set to 16BIT.* You cannot dub new sound
                                 (p. 111).
            •    REC MODE        REC MODE is set to LP.* You cannot dub new sound (p. 111).
            •    TAPE            There is no recorded portion on the tape.* You cannot dub
                                 new sound (p. 96).
            •    “i.LINK” CABLE i.LINK cable is connected (p. 96).* You cannot dub new
                                 sound.
            •   FULL             The “Memory Stick” is full (p. 122).*
            •   -               The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK
                                (p. 115).*
            •   NO FILE          No still image is recorded on the “Memory Stick” (p. 132).*
            •   NO MEMORY STICK
                                 No “Memory Stick” is inserted (p. 117).*
            •   MEMORY STICK ERROR
                                  The “Memory Stick“ data is corrupted (p. 117).*
            •   FORMAT ERROR (p. 110)*
            •   - DIRECTORY ERROR
                                 (p. 133)*
            •COPY INHIBIT        The tape contains copyright control signals for copyright
                                 protection of software (p. 143).*
            •Q Z TAPE END        The tape has reached the end of the tape (p. 29).*
            •Q NO TAPE           Insert a cassette tape (p. 14).*

            * You hear the melody or beep sound.
            ** x and the message appear alternately.




154
Using your camcorder abroad
Using your camcorder abroad
      You can use your camcorder in any country or area with the AC power adaptor
      supplied with your camcorder within 100 V to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.

      When charging the battery pack, use a commercially available AC plug adaptor [a], if
      necessary, depending on the design of the wall outlet [b].


      AC-L10A/L10B/L10C


                                                          [a]            [b]

      Your camcorder is an NTSC system based camcorder. If you want to view the playback
      picture on a TV, it must be an NTSC system based TV with the AUDIO/VIDEO input
      jack.
      The following shows TV color systems used overseas.

      NTSC system
      Bahama Islands, Bolivia, Canada, Central America, Chile, Colombia, Ecuador, Jamaica,




                                                                                                  Additional Information
      Japan, Korea, Mexico, Peru, Surinam, Taiwan, the Philippines, the U.S.A., Venezuela,
      etc.

      PAL system
      Australia, Austria, Belgium, China, Czech Republic, Denmark, Finland, Germany, Great
      Britain, Holland, Hong Kong, Italy, Kuwait, Malaysia, New Zealand, Norway, Portugal,
      Singapore, Slovak Republic, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Thailand, etc.

      PAL-M system
      Brazil

      PAL-N system
      Argentina, Paraguay, Uruguay

      SECAM system
      Bulgaria, France, Guyana, Hungary, Iran, Iraq, Monaco, Poland, Russia, Ukraine, etc.

Simple setting of clock by time difference
      You can easily set the clock to the local time by setting a time difference. Select WORLD
      TIME in the menu settings. See page 107 for more information.




                                                                                                  155
Maintenance information and
      precautions
      Moisture condensation
           If your camcorder is brought directly from a cold place to a warm place, moisture may
           condense inside your camcorder, on the surface of the tape, or on the lens. In this
           condition, the tape may stick to the head drum and be damaged or your camcorder may
           not operate correctly. If there is moisture inside your camcorder, the beep sounds and
           the % indicator flashes. When the Z indicator flashes at the same time, the cassette is
           inserted in your camcorder. If moisture condenses on the lens, the indicator will not
           appear.

           If moisture condensation occurred
           None of the functions except cassette ejection will work. Eject the cassette, turn off your
           camcorder, and leave it for about one hour with the cassette compartment open. Your
           camcorder can be used again if the % indicator does not appear when the power is
           turned on again.

           Note on moisture condensation
           Moisture may condense when you bring your camcorder from a cold place into a warm
           place (or vice versa) or when you use your camcorder in a hot place as follows:
           •You bring your camcorder from a ski slope into a place warmed up by a heating
            device.
           •You bring your camcorder from an air-conditioned car or room into a hot place
            outside.
           •You use your camcorder after a squall or a shower.
           •You use your camcorder in a high temperature and humidity place.

           How to prevent moisture condensation
           When you bring your camcorder from a cold place into a warm place, put your
           camcorder in a plastic bag and tightly seal it. Remove the bag when the air temperature
           inside the plastic bag has reached the surrounding temperature (after about one hour).




156
Maintenance information and precautions

 Removing Dust from Inside the Viewfinder
      Before cleaning, remove the sticker below the viewfinder lens adjustment lever.
      (1) While holding down the hook 1, slide the eyecup in the direction of the arrow
          and remove it out 2.
      (2) Clean the surface with a commercially available blower.


 1                                             2




                                                                                               Additional Information
      To reattach the eyecup
      Do step 1 above sliding the eyecup in the reverse direction of the arrow.

 Maintenance information
      Cleaning the video head
      To ensure normal recording and clear pictures, clean the video heads. The video head
      may be dirty when:
      •mosaic-pattern noise appears on the playback picture.
      •playback pictures do not move.
      •playback pictures do not appear.
      •the x indicator and “    CLEANING CASSETTE” message appear one after another
       on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.

      If the above problem, [a] or [b] occurs, clean the video heads for 10 seconds with the
      Sony DVM12CL cleaning cassette (not supplied). Check the picture and if the above
      problem persists, repeat cleaning.
                                                [a]                                [b]


                                                                  or




      Cleaning the LCD screen
      If fingerprints or dust make the LCD screen dirty, we recommend using a LCD
      Cleaning Cloth (not supplied) to clean the LCD screen.



                                                                                               157
Maintenance information and precautions

       Charging the vanadium-lithium battery in your camcorder
            Your camcorder is supplied with a vanadium-lithium battery installed so as to retain
            the date and time, etc., regardless of the setting of the POWER switch. The vanadium-
            lithium battery is always charged as long as you are using your camcorder. The battery,
            however, will get discharged gradually if you do not use your camcorder. It will be
            completely discharged in about four months if you do not use your camcorder at all.
            Even if the vanadium-lithium battery is not charged, it will not affect the camcorder
            operation. To retain the date and time, etc., charge the battery if the battery is
            discharged.

            Charging the vanadium-lithium battery:
            •Connect your camcorder to house current using the AC power adaptor supplied with
             your camcorder, and leave your camcorder with the POWER switch turned off for
             more than 24 hours.
            •Or install the fully charged battery pack in your camcorder, and leave your camcorder
             with the POWER switch turned off for more than 24 hours.


       Precautions
            Camcorder operation
            •Operate your camcorder on 7.2 V (battery pack) or 8.4 V (AC power adaptor).
            •For DC or AC operation, use the accessories recommended in this operating
             instructions.
            •If any solid object or liquid get inside the casing, unplug your camcorder and have it
             checked by a Sony dealer before operating it any further.
            •Avoid rough handling or mechanical shock. Be particularly careful of the lens.
            •Keep the POWER switch set to OFF (CHG) when you are not using your camcorder.
            •Do not wrap your camcorder with a towel, for example, and operate it. Doing so
             might cause heat to build up inside.
            •Keep your camcorder away from strong magnetic fields or mechanical vibration.
             Noise may appear on the image.
            •Do not touch the LCD screen with a sharp-pointed object.
            •If your camcorder is used in a cold place, a residual image may appear on the LCD
             screen. This is not a malfunction.
            •While using your camcorder, the back of the LCD screen may heat up. This is not a
             malfunction.

            On handling tapes
            •Do not insert anything into the small holes on the rear of the cassette. These holes are
             used to sense the type and thickness of the tape and if the recording tab is in or out.
            •Do not open the tape protect cover or touch the tape.
            •Avoid touching or damaging the terminals. To remove dust, clean the terminals with
             a soft cloth.

            Camcorder care
            •Remove the tape, and periodically turn on the power, operate the CAMERA and VCR
             sections and play back a tape for about three minutes when your camcorder is not to
             be used for a long time.
            •Clean the lens with a soft brush to remove dust. If there are fingerprints on the lens,
             remove them with a soft cloth.
            •Clean the camcorder body with a dry soft cloth, or a soft cloth lightly moistened with
             a mild detergent solution. Do not use any type of solvent which may damage the
158          finish.
Maintenance information and precautions

      •Do not let sand get into your camcorder. When you use your camcorder on a sandy
       beach or in a dusty place, protect it from the sand or dust. Sand or dust may cause
       your camcorder to malfunction, and sometimes this malfunction cannot be repaired.

      AC power adaptor
      •Unplug the unit from the wall outlet when you are not using the unit for a long time.
       To disconnect the power cord, pull it out by the plug. Never pull the power cord itself.
      •Do not operate the unit with a damaged cord or if the unit has been dropped or
       damaged.
      •Do not bend the power cord forcibly, or place a heavy object on it. This will damage
       the cord and may cause fire or electrical shock.
      •Prevent metallic objects from coming into contact with the metal parts of the
       connecting section. If this happens, a short may occur and the unit may be damaged.
      •Always keep metal contacts clean.
      •Do not disassemble the unit.
      •Do not apply mechanical shock or drop the unit.
      •While the unit is in use, particularly during charging, keep it away from AM receivers
       and video equipment. AM receivers and video equipment disturb AM reception and
       video operation.
      •The unit becomes warm during use. This is not a malfunction.
      •Do not place the unit in locations that are:
       – Extremely hot or cold




                                                                                                  Additional Information
       – Dusty or dirty
       – Very humid
       – Vibrating

      Battery pack
      •Use only the specified charger or video equipment with the charging function.
      •To prevent accident from a short circuit, do not allow metal objects to come into
       contact with the battery terminals.
      •Keep the battery pack away from fire.
      •Never expose the battery pack to temperatures above 60 °C (140 °F), such as in a car
       parked in the sun or under direct sunlight.
      •Keep the battery pack dry.
      •Do not expose the battery pack to any mechanical shock.
      •Do not disassemble nor modify the battery pack.
      •Attach the battery pack to video equipment securely.
      •Charging while some capacity remains does not affect the original battery capacity.
      •The battery pack is not resistant to water. Do not wet the battery pack.
      •Unless you use the battery pack for a long period, store the battery pack after you
       charge it fully and use it completely once a year.
      •Store the battery pack in a cool, dry place.

      Notes on dry batteries
      To avoid possible damage from battery leakage or corrosion, observe the following:
      •Be sure to insert the batteries with the + – polarities matched to the + – marks.
      •Dry batteries are not rechargeable.
      •Do not use a combination of new and old batteries.
      •Do not use different types of batteries.
      •Current flows from batteries when you are not using them for a long time.
      •Do not use leaking batteries.



                                                                                                  159
Maintenance information and precautions

            If batteries are leaking
            •Wipe off the liquid in the battery compartment carefully before replacing the batteries.
            •If you touch the liquid, wash it off with water.
            •If the liquid get into your eyes, wash your eyes with a lot of water and then consult a
              doctor.

            If any problem occurs, unplug your camcorder and contact your nearest Sony dealer.




160
Specifications
                                      Video input/output
 Video camera                         Input/output auto switch
                                                                             AC power adaptor
 recorder                             RCA pin-jack, 1 Vp-p, 75 ohms,
                                                                            Power requirements
                                      unbalanced, sync negative
                                                                            100 - 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
 System                               Audio input/output
                                                                            Power consumption
                                      Input/output auto switch
Video recording system                                                      23 W
                                      RCA pin-jack, 327 mV, (at output
2 rotary heads                                                              Output voltage
                                      impedance more than 47 kilohms)
Helical scanning system                                                     DC OUT: 8.4 V, 1.5 A in the
                                      Output impedance with less than
Audio recording system                                                      operating mode
                                      2.2 kilohms
Rotary heads, PCM system                                                    Operating temperature
                                      Input impedance more than
Quantization: 12 bits (Fs 32 kHz,                                           0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)
                                      47 kilohms
stereo 1, stereo 2), 16 bits                                                Storage temperature
                                      Headphones jack
(Fs48 kHz, stereo)                                                          –20 °C to +60 °C (–4 °F to +140 °F)
                                      Stereo minijack (ø 3.5 mm)
Video signal                                                                Dimensions (approx.)
                                         LANC control jack
NTSC color, standards                                                       125 × 39 × 62 mm
                                      Stereo mini-minijack (ø 2.5 mm)
Usable cassette                                                             (5 × 1 9/16 × 2 1/2 in) (w/h/d)
                                      MIC jack
Mini DV cassette with the                                                   excluding projecting parts
                                      Minijack, 0.388 mV low imped-
mark printed                                                                Mass (approx.)
                                      ance with 2.5 to 3.0 V DC, output
Tape speed                                                                  280 g (9.8 oz)
                                      impedance 6.8 kilohms (ø 3.5 mm)
SP: Approx. 18.81 mm/s                                                      excluding power cord
                                      Stereo type
LP: Approx. 12.56 mm/s                                                      Cord length (approx.)
                                        DV input/output
Recording/playback time (using                                              Power cord: 2 m (6.6 feet)
                                      4-pin connector
cassette DVM60)                                                             Connecting cord: 1.6 m (5.2 feet)
                                      Speaker
SP: 1 h




                                                                                                                  Additional Information
                                      Dynamic speaker (ø 20 mm)
LP: 1.5 h
Fast-forward/rewind time                                                     Battery pack
(using cassette DVM60)                 LCD screen
Approx. 2 min and 30 s                                                      Output voltage
                                      Picture
Viewfinder                                                                  DC 7.2 V
                                      2.5 type measured diagonally
                                                                            Capacity
Electric viewfinder (color)           49.9× 37.3 mm (2 × 1 1/2 in)
Image device                                                                5.0 Wh
                                      Total dot number
                                                                            Dimensions (approx.)
1/3 type CCD (3 Charge Coupled        200 640 (880 × 228)
Device)                                                                     38.4 × 20.6 × 70.8 mm (1 9/16 ×
Approx. 380 000 pixels                                                      13/16 × 2 7/8 in) (w/h/d)
                                       General                              Mass (approx.)
(Effective: Approx. 340 000 pixels)
Lens                                  Power requirements                    70 g (2.5 oz)
Combined power zoom lens              7.2 V (battery pack)                  Type
Filter diameter 58 mm (2 3/8 in)      8.4 V (AC power adaptor)              Lithium ion
12× (Optical), 48× (Digital)          Average power consumption
F1.6 - 2.4                            (when using the battery pack)          “Memory Stick”
Focal length                          During camera recording using
6 - 72 mm (1/4 - 2 7/8 in)            LCD                                   Memory
When converted to a 35 mm still       4.7 W                                 Flash memory
camera                                Viewfinder                            4 MB: MSA-4A
43.2 - 518.4 mm (1 3/4 - 20 1/2 in)   4.0 W                                 Operating voltage
Color temperature                     Operating temperature                 2.7 V -3.6 V
Auto, nIndoor (3 200 K),              0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)       Power consumption
    Outdoor (5 800 K),                Storage temperature                   Approx. 45 mA in the operating
Minimum illumination                  –20 °C to +60 °C (–4 °F to +140 °F)   mode
2 lux (F1.6)                          Dimensions (approx.)                  Approx. 130 µA in the standby
                                      115 × 146 × 342 mm (4 5/8 × 5 3/4     mode
                                      × 13 1/2 in) (w/h/d)                  Dimensions (approx.)
 Input/Output connectors
                                      Mass (approx.)                        50 × 2.8 × 21.5 mm
S video input/output                  1.4 kg (3 lb 1 oz)                    (2 × 1/8 × 7/8 in) (w/h/d)
Input/output auto switch              main unit only                        Mass (approx.)
4-pin mini DIN                        1.6 kg (3 lb 8 oz)                    4 g (0.14 oz)
Luminance signal: 1 Vp-p,             including the battery pack,
75 ohms, unbalanced                   NP-F330, cassette DVM60 and           Design and specifications are
Chrominance signal: 0.286 Vp-p,       hood cap                              subject to change without notice.
75 ohms, unbalanced                   Supplied accessories
                                      See page 8.
                                                                                                                  161
— Quick Reference —

      Identifying the parts and controls
       Camcorder

      1                                                                                          9
      2                                                                                          0
      3                                                                                          qa
      4                                                                                          qs
      5                                                                                          qd
      6                                                                                          qf
      7                                                                                          qg
      8
      1 INDEX MARK button (p. 62)                       8 BACK LIGHT button (p. 22)
      2 Zoom ring (p. 20)                               9 END SEARCH button (p. 25)
      3 Focus ring (p. 58)                              0 EDITSEARCH buttons (p. 25)
      4 ND FILTER selector (p. 46)                      qa EXPOSURE dial (p. 44)
      5 FOCUS selector (p. 58)                          qs EXPOSURE button (p. 44)
      6 PUSH AUTO button (p. 58)                        qd Display window (p. 168)
      7 FADER button (p. 38)                            qf OPEN button (p. 15, 26)
                                                        qg SPOT LIGHT button (p. 23)

                             This mark indicates that this product is a genuine accessory for Sony
                             video products.
                             When purchasing Sony video products, Sony recommends that you
                             purchase accessories with this “GENUINE VIDEO ACCESSORIES”
                             mark.



               These are trademarks of Sony corporation.


               Notes on the intelligent accessory shoe
               •The intelligent accessory shoe supplies power to optional accessories such as a video
                light or microphone.
               •The intelligent accessory shoe is linked to the POWER switch, allowing you to turn
                the power supplied by the shoe on and off. Refer to the operating instructions of the
                accessory for further information.
               •The intelligent accessory shoe has a safety device for fixing the installed accessory
                securely. To connect an accessory, press down and push it to the end, and then
                tighten the screw.
               •To remove an accessory, loosen the screw, and then press down and pull out the
162             accessory.
Identifying the parts and controls




qh
qj                                                                                           wh
qk                                                                                           wj
ql                                                                                           wk
w;                                                                                           wl
                                                         MEMORY

wa                                 DISPLAY     PLAY       INDEX     DELETE
                                                                                             e;
ws                                 DATA CODE                       MEMORY MIX
                                                                                             ea
                                               DIGITAL   PICTURE

wd                                  TITLE      EFFECT    EFFECT
                                                                                             es
wf                                                                                           ed
wg                                                                                           ef




                                                                                                  Quick Reference
qh Speaker                                                wh Battery pack (p. 9)
qj LCD screen (p. 17)                                     wj ZEBRA selector (p. 47)
qk LCD BRIGHT buttons (p. 18)                             wk RESET button (p. 151)
ql VOLUME buttons (p. 26)                                 wl MEMORY INDEX button (p. 133)
w; MEMORY PLAY button (p. 132)                            e; MEMORY DELETE button (p. 139)
wa DISPLAY button (p. 27)                                 ea MEMORY + button (p. 125, 132)
ws MEMORY – button (p. 125, 132)                          es MEMORY MIX button (p. 125)
wd DATA CODE button (p. 27)                               ed PICTURE EFFECT button (p. 39)
wf TITLE button (p. 97)                                   ef DIGITAL EFFECT button (p. 41)
wg    (self-timer) button (p. 24, 32, 123)




                                                                                                  163
Identifying the parts and controls

      eg                                                                                                eh
           SLOW         REC           AUDIO DUB


        STOP      REW         PLAY   FF     PAUSE
                                                                                                        ej


                                                                                                        ek
                                                                                                        el
                                                                                                        r;
                                                                                                        ra
      eg Video control buttons (p. 26, 29, 83)               ej Camera recording lamp (p. 15)
         C SLOW (slow playback)
                                                             ek REC START/STOP (p. 18)
             AUDIO DUB (dubbing)
         x STOP (stop)                                       el Lens
         m REW (rewind)
         N PLAY (playback)                                   r; Lens hood fixing screw
         M FF (Fast-forward)                                 ra Lens hood
         X PAUSE (pause)                                        You can attach a wide teleconversion
         z REC (recording)                                      lens (not supplied) by removing the lens
         The control buttons light up when you                  hood.
         set the POWER switch to VCR.
      eh Remote sensor/infrared ray emitter

                    Removing the lens hood
                    To remove the lens hood for attachment of the wide teleconversion lens, etc., loosen the
                    lens hood fixing screw, and unscrew the lens hood conuterclockwise.

                    When using additional filters
                    We recommend that you use Sony made filters having the genuine accessory mark.




164
Identifying the parts and controls

rs                                                                                 td
rd
rf                                                                                 tf
rg
rh                                                                                 tg
rj                                                                                 th
rk                                                                                 tj
rl                                                                                 tk
t;                                                                                 tl
ta                                                                                 y;
ts                                                                                 ya




                                                                                          Quick Reference
rs Hooks for shoulder strap              ts “Memory Stick” slot (p. 117)
rd Power zoom lever (p. 20)              td Cassette lid (p. 14)
rf PHOTO button (p. 31, 120)             tf Hood cap (p. 15)
rg BATT (battery) RELEASE lever (p. 9)   tg PUSH button (p. 14)
rh PROGRAM AE button (p. 56)             th Grip strap
rj AUTO LOCK selector (p. 43)            tj LOCK switch (p. 15)
rk WHT BAL button (p. 49)                tk POWER switch (p. 15)
rl AUDIO LEVEL button (p. 51)            tl START/STOP button (p. 15)
t; MENU button (p. 107)                  y; SHUTTER SPEED button (p. 45)
ta SEL/PUSH EXEC dial (p. 107)           ya Access lamp (p. 117)

Fastening the grip strap                 Attaching the shoulder strap
                                         Attach the shoulder strap supplied with your
                                         camcorder to the hooks for the shoulder strap.




Fasten the grip strap firmly.


                                                                                          165
Identifying the parts and controls

      ys                                                                                        ua
      yd                                                                                        us
      yf                                                                                        ud
      yg                                                                                        uf
      yh                                                                                        ug
      yj                                                                                        uh
      yk                                                                                        uj
      yl                                                                                        uk
      u;                                                                                        ul
                                                                                                i;
      ys Carrying handle                              uf Microphone (p. 94)
      yd Remote sensor                                ug S VIDEO ID-2 jack (p. 30, 33, 73, 87, 128)
      yf Camera recording lamp (p. 15)                uh VIDEO ID-2 jack (p. 30, 33, 73, 87, 128)
      yg CUSTOM PRESET button (p. 53)                 uj AUDIO L/R jack (p. 30, 73, 87, 94)
      yh Viewfinder adjustment lever (p. 19)          uk     DV IN/OUT jack (p. 74, 89, 129)
                                                           This “i.LINK” mark is a trademark of
      yj Hook for removing the viewfinder
                                                           Sony Corporation and indicates that this
         (p. 157)
                                                           product is in agreement with IEEE 1394-
      yk EJECT switch (p. 14)                              1995 specifications and their revisions.
      yl DC IN jack (p. 10)                                The DV IN/OUT jack is i.LINK
      u; Tripod receptacle                                 compatible.
         Make sure that the length of the tripod      ul     LANC jack
         screw is less than 6.5 mm (9/32 inch).               LANC stands for Local Application
         Otherwise, you cannot attach the tripod           Control Bus System. The LANC
         securely and the screw may damage                 control jack is used for controlling the
         your camcorder.                                   tape transport of video equipment and
      ua Intelligent accessory shoe                        peripherals connected to it. This jack has
                                                           the same function as the jack indicated
      us MIC/LINE switch (p. 93)                           as CONTROL L or REMOTE.
      ud MIC jack (PLUG IN POWER) (p. 93)             i; i (headphones) jack
         Connect an external microphone (not             When you use headphones, the speaker
         supplied). This jack also accepts a “plug-      on your camcorder is silent.
         in-power” microphone.
         When using a “plug-in-power”
         microphone, set the MIC/LINE swithc
         to MIC, when using a non-“plug-in-
         power” microphone or audio
166      equipment, set the MIC/LINE switch to
         LINE.
Identifying the parts and controls

 Remote Commander
         The buttons that have the same name on the Remote Commander as on your camcorder
         function identically to the buttons on your camcorder.

                     1
                     2                                          9
                     3                                          0
                     4
                     5                                          qa

                     6                                          qs
                     7
                     8                                          qd



1 Transmitter                                 9 DATA CODE button (p. 27)
  Point toward the remote sensor to




                                                                                            Quick Reference
                                              0 START/STOP button (p. 15)
  control your camcorder after turning on
  your camcorder.                             qa Power zoom button (p. 20)
2 ZERO SET MEMORY button (p. 63)              qs ./> buttons (p. 64, 66, 67, 69)
3 PHOTO button (p. 31, 120)                   qd AUDIO DUB button (p. 95)
4 DISPLAY button (p. 27)
5 Memory control buttons (p. 125, 132)
6 SEARCH MODE button
  (p. 64, 66, 67, 69)
7 Video control buttons (p. 29)
8 REC button (p. 87)/MARK button
  (p. 83)




                                                                                            167
Identifying the parts and controls

               To prepare the Remote Commander
               Insert two size AA (R6) batteries by matching the + and – polarities on the batteries to
               the + – marks inside the battery compartment.




               Notes on the Remote Commander
               •Point the remote sensor away from strong light sources such as direct sunlight or
                overhead lighting. Otherwise, the Remote Commander may not function properly.
               •Your camcorder works in the commander mode VTR 2. Commander modes 1, 2 and 3
                are used to distinguish your camcorder from other Sony VCRs to avoid remote control
                misoperation. If you use another Sony VCR in the commander mode VTR 2, we
                recommend changing the commander mode or covering the sensor of the VCR with
                black paper.

       Display window



                                                                                                2

          1                                                                                     3


      1 Remaining battery time indicator
        (p. 10)/Tape counter (p. 63)/Memory
        counter (p. 133)/Time code indicator
        (p. 21)/Self-diagnosis indicator (p. 152)
      2 FULL charge indicator (p. 10)
      3 Remianing battery indicator (p. 10)




168
Identifying the parts and controls

 Operation indicators
    1                                                                                       qh
    2                                                                                       qj
    3                                                                                       qk
    4                                                                                       ql
                                    1 2 0 min       S T BY       0:1 2:3 4
    5                           W              T               1 2 0 min                    w;
                                ST I L L                     Z ERO SE T
    6                           1 6 : 9 W I DE                   MEMORY                     wa
                                NEG . ART                             END
    7                                                            SEARCH                     ws
    8                             AUTO
                                                                                            wd
    9                             6 0 AWB                           DV I N                  wf
                                F11   0 dB         ND1            1 6B I T
    0                                                      100–0019                         wg
                                JUL    4 2000            1 2 : 0 5 : 5 6 AM
    qa                                                                                      wh
    qs                                                                                      wj
    qd                                                                                      wk
    qf                                                                                      wl
    qg




                                                                                                     Quick Reference
1 Cassette memory indicator (p. 143)                         Image quality mode indicator (p. 118)
2 Remaining battery time indicator (p. 21)            qk Warning indicators (p. 153)
3 Zoom indicator (p. 20)/Exposure                     ql Tape counter indicator (p. 63)/Time
  indicator (p. 44)/Data file name                       code indicator (p. 21)/Self-diagnosis
  indicator (p. 115)                                     indicator (p. 152)/Photo mode
                                                         indicator (p. 31)/Image number
4 Digital effect indicator (p. 40)/FADER
                                                         indicator (p. 133)
  indicator (p. 37)/MEMORY MIX
  indicator (p. 125)                                  w; Remaining tape indicator (p. 21)/
                                                         Memory playback indicator (p. 133)
5 16:9WIDE indicator (p. 36)/PROG.
  SCAN indicator (p. 34)                              wa ZERO SET MEMORY indicator (p. 63)/
                                                         FRAME REC indicator (p. 61)/Interval
6 Picture effect indicator (p. 39)
                                                         recording indicator (p. 59)
7 ND filter indicator (p. 46)
                                                      ws END SEARCH indicator (p. 25)
8 Custom preset indicator (p. 53)
                                                      wd DV IN indicator (p. 90)/A/VtDV OUT
9 Data code indicator (p. 28)                            indicator
0 LCD bright indicator (p. 18)/Volume                 wf Audio mode indicator (p. 111)
  indicator (p. 26)
                                                      wg Data file name indicator
qa Date indicator                                        This indicator appears when the
qs PROGRAM AE indicator (p. 55)                          MEMORY MIX functions work.
qd Backlight indicator (p. 22)/Spot light             wh Audio input level/Time indicator
   indicator (p. 23)                                  wj Continuous mode indicator (p. 122)
qf SteadyShot OFF indicator (p. 108)                  wk Video flash ready indicator
qg Manual focus/Infinity indicator (p. 58)               This indicator appears when you use the
                                                         video flash light (not supplied).
qh Recording mode indicator (p. 111)
                                                      wl Self-timer indicator (p. 24)
qj Standby/Recording indicator (p. 15)/                                                              169
   Video control mode indicator (p. 29)/
Quick Function Guide
          Functions to adjust exposure (in the recording mode)
          •In insufficient light                                    Low lux mode (p. 55)
          •In dark environments such as sunset, fireworks, or       Sunset & moon mode (p. 55)
           general night views
          •Shooting backlit subjects                                BACK LIGHT (p. 22)
          •In spotlight, such as at the theater or a formal event   SPOT LIGHT (p. 23)

          Functions to give images more impact (in the recording mode)
          •Smooth transition between scenes                         FADER (p. 37)
          •Taking a still picture                                   PHOTO (p. 31, 120)
          •Digital processing of images                             PICTURE EFFECT (p. 39)/
                                                                    DIGITAL EFFECT (p. 40)
          •Superimposing a title                                    TITLE (p. 97)

          Functions to give a natural appearance to your recordings
          (in the recording mode)
          •Preventing deterioration of picture quality in digital   D ZOOM [MENU] (p. 107)
           zoom
          •Focusing manually                                        Manual focus (p. 58)
          •Recording fast-moving subjects                           Sports lesson mode (p. 55)

          Functions to be used in editing (in the recording mode)
          •Watching the picture on a wide-screen TV                 Wide mode (p. 36)
          •Viewing images using a personal computer                 “Memory Stick” (p. 115)

          Functions to be used after recording (in the playback mode)
          •Digital processing of recorded images                    PICTURE EFFECT (p. 71)/
                                                                    DIGITAL EFFECT (p. 72)
          •Displaying the date/time or various settings when        Data code (p. 28)
           you recorded
          •Quickly locating a desired scene                         Zero set memory (p. 63)
          •Searching for scenes having a title                      Title search (p. 66)
          •Searching for scenes recorded in the photo mode          Photo search (p. 69)
          •Scanning scenes recorded in the photo mode               Photo scan (p. 70)
          •Playing back monaural sound or sub sound                 HiFi SOUND [MENU] (p. 107)




170
Index
                                                  Full charge ............................. 10      Power zoom ........................... 20
A, B                                              Grip strap ............................. 165      Print mark ............................ 142
A/V connecting cable                              Guide frame ........................... 35        PROGRAM AE ...................... 55
  ................................ 30, 73, 87     Headphones jack ................ 166              Progressive ............................ 34
AC power adaptor ................ 10              Heads .................................... 157
Adjusting shutter speed ...... 45                 HiFi SOUND ....................... 109
Adjusting viewfinder ........... 19
                                                                                                    R, S
AE SHIFT ............................... 53                                                         Rec Review ............................ 25
Audio dubbing ...................... 93
                                                  I, J, K, L
                                                                                                    Recording level ..................... 51
AUDIO LEVEL ..................... 51              i.LINK ................................... 166    Recording time ...................... 11
AUDIO MIX ........................ 109            Image protection ................. 138            Remaining battery time
Audio mode .......................... 111         Image quality mode ........... 118                  indicator .............................. 21
AUTO SHTR ........................ 108            INDEX MARK ....................... 62             Remaining tape indicator .... 21
BACK LIGHT ........................ 22            INDEX (Multiple)                                  Remote Commander .......... 167
Battery pack ............................. 9        display ............................... 133     Remote control jack (LANC)
BEEP ..................................... 113    Index search ........................... 64          ............................................ 166
                                                  “InfoLITHIUM” battery ...... 10                   Remote sensor ..................... 164
                                                  Intelligent accessory shoe .... 94                RESET ................................... 151
C, D                                              Interval recording ................. 59           S VIDEO jack ........... 30, 73, 87
Camera chromakey ............ 124                 JPEG ...................................... 115   SEL/PUSH EXEC dial ....... 107
Cassette memory ........... 6, 143                Labeling a cassette .............. 103            Self-diagnosis display ........ 152
Charging battery ................... 10           LANC ................................... 166      Self-timer ................ 24, 32, 123
Charging vanadium-lithium                         LCD screen ............................ 17        Serial port adaptor .............. 134
 battery ............................... 158      LUMINANCEKEY ............... 40                   Skip scan ................................ 29
Clock set ............................... 114                                                       Slide show ............................ 137
COLOR BAR ....................... 113                                                               Slow playback ....................... 29




                                                                                                                                                          Quick Reference
Connection
                                                  M, N                                              Spotlight mode ...................... 23
   (dubbing a tape) ............. 73                                                                STEADYSHOT .................... 108
                                                  Main sound .......................... 109
   (viewing on TV) ............. 30                                                                 Stereo tape ........................... 144
                                                  Manual adjustment .............. 43
Continuous .......................... 121                                                           STILL ...................................... 40
                                                  Manual focus ......................... 58
Custom preset ....................... 53                                                            Sub sound ............................ 109
                                                  Memory chromakey ........... 124
Cut recording ........................ 61         Memory luminancekey ...... 124
Data code ............................... 28      Memory mix ........................ 124
Date search ............................ 67
                                                                                                    T, U, V
                                                  Memory overlap ................. 124
Date/time indicator ............. 28              Memory photo recording .. 120                     Tape counter .......................... 63
DEMO ................................... 112      “Memory Stick” .................. 115             Tape photo recording ........... 31
DIGITAL EFFECT ................. 40               Menu settings ...................... 107          Telephoto ............................... 20
Digital program editing ....... 75                MIC (PLUG IN POWER) ..... 93                      Time code ............................... 21
DISPLAY ................................ 27       Mirror mode .......................... 17         Title ......................................... 97
DOT ........................................ 37   Moisture condensation ...... 156                  Title search ............................. 66
Dual sound track tape ........ 144                MONOTONE ........................ 37              TRAIL ..................................... 40
Dubbing a tape ...................... 73          ND filter ................................. 46    Transition ............................... 16
DV connecting cable ............. 74              Normal charge ...................... 10           TV color system .................. 155
                                                  NTSC system ....................... 155
E                                                                                                   W, X, Y, Z
EDITSEARCH ....................... 25
                                                  O, P, Q
                                                                                                    Warning indicators ............. 153
END SEARCH ................ 25, 29                OLD MOVIE .......................... 40           White balance ........................ 49
Exposure ................................ 44      Operation indicators .......... 169               Wide mode ............................. 36
External microphone (not                          OVERLAP .............................. 37         Wide-angle ............................. 20
 supplied) ........................... 166        Photo scan .............................. 70      WIPE ....................................... 37
                                                  Photo search .......................... 69        WORLD TIME ..................... 112
                                                  PICTURE EFFECT ................ 39                Write-protect tab ................... 14
F, G, H                                           Picture search ........................ 29        Zebra pattern ......................... 47
Fade in/out ............................ 37       Playback pause ...................... 29          Zero set memory function ... 63
FADER .................................... 37     Power sources                                     Zoom ...................................... 20
FLASH MOTION .................. 40                    (battery pack) ................... 9
FOCUS .................................... 58         (car battery) .................... 13
Format .................................. 110         (house current) ............... 13
                                                                                                                                                          171
Sony Corporation   Printed in Japan

More Related Content

PPT
Пересування по скельному рельєфу, спорядження, страховка
PDF
Soal un smp 2017 ipa
PDF
شرح برنامج Keynote للعروض التقديمية بوربوينت power point للأيفون
PPT
Vm2000 Spanish
DOC
Bts Directory
PPT
Curso - Ensamblaje de Computadoras - Semana 7 Dispositivos Perifericos
DOC
DOC
Пересування по скельному рельєфу, спорядження, страховка
Soal un smp 2017 ipa
شرح برنامج Keynote للعروض التقديمية بوربوينت power point للأيفون
Vm2000 Spanish
Bts Directory
Curso - Ensamblaje de Computadoras - Semana 7 Dispositivos Perifericos

Similar to Vx2000 Manual (20)

PDF
Sony digi cam_hvrz1u
PDF
Canon XF100
PDF
1 pdfsam hdcsd60-mul
PDF
Indoor_Cam_2K_Pan&Tilt_manual_us.pdf
PDF
Tl wn725 n user guide TL-WN725N
PDF
Tl wn723 n user guide TL-WN723N
PDF
싸이퍼랩PDA CipherLab 9700 2D 3.5인치 윈도우즈PDA 산업용PDA 기업용 모바일컴퓨터 바코드PDA 매뉴얼
PDF
Sony cyber shot dsc-wx150 PDF Manual
PDF
Pcgf420 copy
PDF
Msi k9 n_series_manual
PDF
Sony PMW-EX3 Operation Manual
PDF
Eb1304 Net Sata&Sata+ Manual En
PDF
Manual placa base
PDF
Sony PMW-350K Operation Manual
PDF
Sharp xv z20000
PDF
Datavideo SE-800
PDF
User guide home_series
PDF
Ag Hpx500 E Manual
PDF
How to use the good obd tuning Honda GNA600?
PDF
Manual de table tb100 unitech
Sony digi cam_hvrz1u
Canon XF100
1 pdfsam hdcsd60-mul
Indoor_Cam_2K_Pan&Tilt_manual_us.pdf
Tl wn725 n user guide TL-WN725N
Tl wn723 n user guide TL-WN723N
싸이퍼랩PDA CipherLab 9700 2D 3.5인치 윈도우즈PDA 산업용PDA 기업용 모바일컴퓨터 바코드PDA 매뉴얼
Sony cyber shot dsc-wx150 PDF Manual
Pcgf420 copy
Msi k9 n_series_manual
Sony PMW-EX3 Operation Manual
Eb1304 Net Sata&Sata+ Manual En
Manual placa base
Sony PMW-350K Operation Manual
Sharp xv z20000
Datavideo SE-800
User guide home_series
Ag Hpx500 E Manual
How to use the good obd tuning Honda GNA600?
Manual de table tb100 unitech
Ad

More from Basic Video Production (20)

PPT
Documentary storytelling
DOC
Music video finals
DOC
Bts directory
DOC
Bts directory
DOC
Workshop liquidation
DOC
Bavideo remaining calendar of activities
DOC
Vidprd2 midterms grading sheet
DOCX
BAVIDEO-VIDPRD2 MUSIC VIDEO WORKSHOP
DOC
First term 11 12 grading sheet
DOC
FIRST TERM 2011-2012 FINAL GRADE
DOC
1ST TERM 2011-2012 FINALS PROJECT RESULTS
DOC
BAVIDEO FINALS GUIDELINES SHEET
DOC
Revisions to First and Second Term Academic Calendar:
DOC
Bavideo calendar
DOC
Bavid exercise
PPT
Introduction to Video Production
PPT
Introduction to Video Technology
XLS
1 st term 2011 2012 calendar of activities
DOC
First term 2011 2012 syllabus
XLS
1 st term 2011 2012 calendar of activities
Documentary storytelling
Music video finals
Bts directory
Bts directory
Workshop liquidation
Bavideo remaining calendar of activities
Vidprd2 midterms grading sheet
BAVIDEO-VIDPRD2 MUSIC VIDEO WORKSHOP
First term 11 12 grading sheet
FIRST TERM 2011-2012 FINAL GRADE
1ST TERM 2011-2012 FINALS PROJECT RESULTS
BAVIDEO FINALS GUIDELINES SHEET
Revisions to First and Second Term Academic Calendar:
Bavideo calendar
Bavid exercise
Introduction to Video Production
Introduction to Video Technology
1 st term 2011 2012 calendar of activities
First term 2011 2012 syllabus
1 st term 2011 2012 calendar of activities
Ad

Recently uploaded (20)

PPTX
IMM.pptx marketing communication givguhfh thfyu
PDF
income tax laws notes important pakistan
PDF
Comments on Clouds that Assimilate Parts I&II.pdf
PDF
Sustainable Digital Finance in Asia_FINAL_22.pdf
PDF
Second Hand Fashion Call to Action March 2025
PPTX
df0ee68f89e1a869be4bff9b80a7 business 79f0.pptx
PPTX
Portfolio Example- Market & Consumer Insights – Strategic Entry for BYD UK.pptx
PPTX
Understanding Procurement Strategies.pptx Your score increases as you pick a ...
PPTX
operations management : demand supply ch
PPTX
2 - Self & Personality 587689213yiuedhwejbmansbeakjrk
PDF
Communication Tactics in Legal Contexts: Historical Case Studies (www.kiu.ac...
PDF
Business Communication for MBA Students.
DOCX
80 DE ÔN VÀO 10 NĂM 2023vhkkkjjhhhhjjjj
PDF
Consumer Behavior in the Digital Age (www.kiu.ac.ug)
PDF
533158074-Saudi-Arabia-Companies-List-Contact.pdf
PPTX
chapter 2 entrepreneurship full lecture ppt
PPTX
IITM - FINAL Option - 01 - 12.08.25.pptx
PDF
Value-based IP Management at Siemens: A Cross-Divisional Analysis
PDF
Middle East's Most Impactful Business Leaders to Follow in 2025
PPTX
Market and Demand Analysis.pptx for Management students
IMM.pptx marketing communication givguhfh thfyu
income tax laws notes important pakistan
Comments on Clouds that Assimilate Parts I&II.pdf
Sustainable Digital Finance in Asia_FINAL_22.pdf
Second Hand Fashion Call to Action March 2025
df0ee68f89e1a869be4bff9b80a7 business 79f0.pptx
Portfolio Example- Market & Consumer Insights – Strategic Entry for BYD UK.pptx
Understanding Procurement Strategies.pptx Your score increases as you pick a ...
operations management : demand supply ch
2 - Self & Personality 587689213yiuedhwejbmansbeakjrk
Communication Tactics in Legal Contexts: Historical Case Studies (www.kiu.ac...
Business Communication for MBA Students.
80 DE ÔN VÀO 10 NĂM 2023vhkkkjjhhhhjjjj
Consumer Behavior in the Digital Age (www.kiu.ac.ug)
533158074-Saudi-Arabia-Companies-List-Contact.pdf
chapter 2 entrepreneurship full lecture ppt
IITM - FINAL Option - 01 - 12.08.25.pptx
Value-based IP Management at Siemens: A Cross-Divisional Analysis
Middle East's Most Impactful Business Leaders to Follow in 2025
Market and Demand Analysis.pptx for Management students

Vx2000 Manual

  • 1. 3-060-791-11 (1) Digital Video Camera Recorder Operating Instructions Before operating the unit, please read this manual thoroughly, and retain it for future reference. Owner’s Record The model and serial numbers are located on the bottom. Record the serial number in the space provided below. Refer to these numbers whenever you call upon your Sony dealer regarding this product. Model No. DCR-VX2000 Model No. AC- Serial No. Serial No. DCR-VX2000 ©2000 Sony Corporation
  • 2. Welcome! Congratulations on your purchase of this Sony Digital Handycam camcorder. With your Digital Handycam, you can capture life’s precious moments with superior picture and sound quality. Your Digital Handycam is loaded with advanced features, but at the same time it is very easy to use. You will soon be producing home video that you can enjoy for years to come. For the customers in the U.S.A. WARNING If you have any questions about this product, you may call: Sony Customer Information Center 1- To prevent fire or shock hazard, do 800-222-SONY (7669) or write to: Sony Customer not expose the unit to rain or Information Center 1 Sony Drive, Mail Drop #T1- 11, Park Ridge, NJ 07656 moisture. Declaration of Conformity Trade Name: SONY Model No.: DCR-VX2000 Responsible Party: Sony Electronics Inc. Address: 1 Sony Drive, Park Ridge, NJ, 07656 USA Telephone No.: 201-930-6972 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions.: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. CAUTION You are cautioned that any changes or modifications This symbol is intended to alert not expressly approved in this manual could void your the user to the presence of authority to operate this equipment. uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure Note: that may be of sufficient This equipment has been tested and found to comply magnitude to constitute a risk of with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to electric shock to persons. Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful This symbol is intended to alert interference in a residential installation. This the user to the presence of equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in important operating and accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful maintenance (servicing) interference to radio communications. However, there instructions in the literature is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a accompanying the appliance. particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, Never expose the battery pack to temperatures which can be determined by turning the equipment off above 140 °F (60 °C) such as in a car parked in and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the the sun or under direct sunlight. interference by one or more of the following measures: — Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. For customers in the U.S.A. and — Increase the separation between the equipment and CANADA receiver. — Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit DISPOSAL OF LITHIUM ION BATTERY. different from that to which the receiver is connected. LITHIUM ION BATTERY. — Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV DISPOSE OF PROPERLY. technician for help. You can return your unwanted lithium ion batteries For customers in CANADA to your nearest Sony Service Center or Factory Service Center. CAUTION TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE Note: In some areas the disposal of lithium ion BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT. batteries in household or business trash may be prohibited. “Memory Stick” For the Sony Service Center nearest you call For the customers in the U.S.A. 1-800-222-SONY (United States only). This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. For the Sony Factory Service Center nearest you call Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) 416-499-SONY (Canada only). This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, Caution: Do not handle damaged or leaking lithium including interference that may cause undesired operation. ion battery. For customers in CANADA This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian 2 ICES-003.
  • 3. Table of contents Quick Start Guide ............................................... 4 Editing Getting started Dubbing a tape .................................................. 73 Using this manual ............................................... 6 Dubbing only desired scenes Checking supplied accessories ......................... 8 – Digital program editing ............................. 75 Step 1 Preparing the power supply ................ 9 Using with an analog video unit and a PC Step 2 Inserting a cassette ............................... 14 – Signal convert function .............................. 86 Recording video or TV programs .................. 87 Recording – Basics Inserting a scene from a VCR Recording a picture .......................................... 15 – Insert editing ............................................... 91 Shooting backlit subjects (BACK Audio dubbing .................................................. 93 LIGHT) .......................................... 22 Superimposing a title ....................................... 97 Using the spot light function ............ 23 Making your own titles .................................. 101 Self-timer recording ........................... 24 Labeling a cassette .......................................... 103 Erasing the cassette memory data ................ 105 Checking the recording – END SEARCH / EDITSEARCH / Rec Review ....................... 25 Customizing Your Camcorder Playback – Basics Changing the menu settings ......................... 107 Resetting the date and time ........................... 114 Playing back a tape ........................................... 26 Viewing the recording on TV ......................... 30 “Memory Stick” Operations Advanced Recording Operations Using a “Memory Stick” – introduction ...... 115 Recording still images on a “Memory Stick” Recording a still image on a tape – Memory Photo recording ........................ 120 – Tape Photo recording ................................. 31 Superimposing a still image in a “Memory Shooting with all the pixels Stick” on a moving picture – PROG. SCAN ............................................... 34 – MEMORY MIX .......................................... 124 Using the guide frame ..................................... 35 Recording an image from a mini DV tape as a Using the wide mode ....................................... 36 still image ...................................................... 127 Using the fader function .................................. 37 Copying still images from a mini DV tape Using special effects – Picture effect .............. 39 – Photo save .................................................. 130 Using special effects – Digital effect .............. 40 Viewing a still picture – Memory Photo Shooting with manual adjustment ................. 43 playback ........................................................ 132 Adjusting the white balance ........................... 49 Copying an image recorded on a “Memory Adjusting recording level manually – Sound Stick” to mini DV tapes ............................... 135 recording level ................................................ 51 Playing back images continuously Presetting the adjustment for picture quality – SLIDE SHOW ............................................ 137 – Custom preset ............................................. 53 Preventing accidental erasure Using the PROGRAM AE function ................ 55 – Image protection ....................................... 138 Focusing manually ........................................... 58 Deleting images .............................................. 139 Interval recording ............................................. 59 Writing a print mark – Print mark ............... 142 Frame by frame recording – Cut recording .. 61 Marking an Index ............................................. 62 Additional Information Advanced Playback Operations Usable cassettes ............................................... 143 About i.LINK ................................................... 145 Quickly locating a scene using the zero set Troubleshooting .............................................. 146 memory function ........................................... 63 Self-diagnosis display .................................... 152 Searching for a recording by index Warning indicators and messages ............... 153 – Index search ................................................. 64 Using your camcorder abroad ...................... 155 Searching the boundaries of recorded tape by Maintenance information and title – Title search ........................................... 66 precautions ................................................... 156 Searching a recording by date Specifications ................................................... 161 – Date search ................................................... 67 Searching for a photo Quick Reference – Photo search/Photo scan ........................... 69 Identifying the parts and controls ................ 162 Playing back a tape with picture effects ........ 71 Quick Function Guide .................................... 170 Playing back a tape with digital effects ......... 72 Index ................................................................. 171 3
  • 4. Quick Start Guide This guide introduces you to the basic way of recording/ playback. See the pages in parentheses “( )” for more information. Connecting the power cord (p. 13) Use the battery pack when using your camcorder outdoors (p. 9). Connect the plug with its v mark facing toward the LCD panel side. AC power adaptor Open the DC IN jack (supplied) cover. Quick Start Guide Inserting a cassette (p. 14) 1 While pressing the 2 Push the middle 3 Close the cassette small blue button on portion of the back of compartment by the EJECT switch, the cassette to insert it. pressing the PUSH slide it in the direction Insert the cassette into mark on it. of the arrow. the cassette compartment with the 4 Close the cassette lid window facing out by pressing the and the write-protect PUSH button on the tab facing upward. cassette lid. Window PUSH 4 Write-protect tab
  • 5. Recording a picture (p. 15) Viewfinder When the LCD panel 1 Remove the hood cap. is closed, use the viewfinder placing your eye against its eyecup. 4 Press START/ 2 Set the POWER switch to STOP. Your CAMERA while pressing the camcorder small green button. The date starts and time is indicated for five recording. To seconds. stop recording, POWER press START/ VCR STOP again. 3 Slide OPEN (CHG) OPEN OFF CAMERA POWER back in the VCR B mark MEMORY (CHG) direction to OFF CAMERA Quick Start Guide open the If the ND1 or ND2 indicator MEMORY LCD panel. flashes, see page 46. Monitoring the playback picture on the LCD screen (p. 26) POWER 1 Set the POWER VCR switch to VCR while (CHG) OFF CAMERA pressing the small MEMORY green button. NOTE Do not pick up your camcorder by holding the viewfinder, the LCD panel, the battery pack, or the microphone. 2 Press m to rewind the REW tape. 3 Press N to start PLAY playback. 5
  • 6. — Getting started — Using this manual As you read through this manual, buttons and settings on your camcorder are shown in capital letters. e.g. Set the POWER switch to CAMERA. When you carry out an operation, you can hear a beep or a melody sound to indicate that the operation is being carried out. Note on cassette memory Your camcorder is based on the DV format. You can only use mini DV cassettes with your camcorder. We recommend that you use a tape with cassette memory . The functions which require different operations depending on whether or not the tape has cassette memory are: •Searching the end point of the recording – end search (p. 25, 29) •Searching a recording by index – index search (p. 64) •Searching a recording by date – date search (p. 67) •Searching for a photo – photo search (p. 69). The functions you can operate only with cassette memory are: •Searching the boundaries of recorded tape by title – title search (p. 66) •Superimposing a title (p. 97) •Making your own titles (p. 101) •Labeling a cassette (p. 103). For details, see page 143. You see this mark in the introduction of the features that are operated only with cassette memory. Tapes with cassette memory are marked with (Cassette Memory). 6
  • 7. Using this manual Note on TV color systems TV color systems differ from country to country. To view your recordings on a TV, you need an NTSC system-based TV. Getting started Copyright precautions Television programs, films, video tapes, and other materials may be copyrighted. Unauthorized recording of such materials may be contrary to the provision of the copyright laws. Precautions on camcorder care •The LCD screen and the viewfinder are manufactured using high-precision technology. However, there may be some tiny black points and/or bright points (red, blue, green or white) that constantly appear on the LCD screen and in the viewfinder. These points occur normally in the manufacturing process and do not affect the recorded picture in any way. Effective ratio of pixels and/or screen is 99.99% or more. •Do not let your camcorder get wet. Keep your camcorder away from rain and sea water. Letting your camcorder get wet may cause your camcorder to malfunction. Sometimes this malfunction cannot be repaired [a]. •Never leave your camcorder exposed to temperatures above 60 °C (140 °F), such as in a car parked in the sun or under direct sunlight [b]. •Do not place your camcorder so as to point the viewfinder or the LCD screen or lens toward the sun. The inside of the viewfinder, LCD screen, or lens may be damaged [c]. [a] [b] [c] Contents of the recording cannot be compensated if recording or playback is not made due to a malfunction of the camcorder, video tape, etc. 7
  • 8. Checking supplied accessories Make sure that the following accessories are supplied with your camcorder. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 qa qs 1 Wireless Remote Commander (1) 7 A/V connecting cable (1) (p. 30, 73) (p. 167) 8 Hood cap (1) (p. 15) 2 AC-L10A/L10B/L10C AC power 9 Shoulder strap (1) (p. 165) adaptor (1), Power cord (1) (p. 10) 0 Application software: PictureGear 3 NP-F330 battery pack (1) (p. 9, 10) 4.1Lite (CD ROM) (1) (p. 134) 4 Size AA (R6) battery for Remote qa Lens hood (1) (p. 164) Commander (2) (p. 168) qs Eyecup (large) (1) (p. 19) 5 Memory Stick Reader/Writer (1), USB cable (1) 6 “Memory Stick” (1) (p. 115) 8
  • 9. Step 1 Preparing the power supply Installing the battery pack Install the battery pack to use your camcorder outdoors. (1) Lift up the viewfinder. Getting started (2) Insert the battery pack in the direction of the V mark on the battery pack. Slide the battery pack until it is locked. 1 2 To remove the battery pack Lift up the viewfinder. Slide the battery pack out in the direction of the arrow while pressing BATT RELEASE down. BATT RELEASE 9
  • 10. Step 1 Preparing the power supply Charging the battery pack Use the battery pack after charging it. Your camcorder operates only with the “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack (L series). (1) Open the DC IN jack cover and connect the AC power adaptor supplied with your camcorder to the DC IN jack with the plug’s v mark facing toward the LCD panel side. (2) Connect the power cord to the AC power adaptor. (3) Connect the power cord to a wall outlet. (4) Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG). Charging begins. The remaining battery time is indicated in minutes on the display window. When the remaining battery indicator changes to u, normal charge is completed. To fully charge the battery (full charge), leave the battery pack attached for about one hour after normal charge is completed until FULL appears on the display window. Fully charging the battery allows you to use the battery longer than usual. 4 POWER VCR 1 (CHG) OFF CAMERA MEMORY After charging the battery pack Disconnect the AC power adaptor from the DC IN jack on your camcorder. Note on the remaining battery time indicator The remaining battery time indicator on the LCD screen/display window or in the viewfinder indicates the recording time using the viewfinder. The indicator may not be correct, depending on the conditions in which you are recording. When you close the LCD panel and open it again, it takes about one minute for the correct remaining battery time to be displayed. Notes •Prevent metallic objects from coming into contact with the metal parts of the DC plug of the AC power adaptor. This may cause a short-circuit, damaging the AC power adaptor. •Keep the battery pack dry. •When the battery pack is not to be used for a long time, charge the battery pack once 10 fully, and then use it until it fully discharges again. Keep the battery pack in a cool place.
  • 11. Step 1 Preparing the power supply Until your camcorder calculates the actual remaining battery time “- - - - min” appears in the display window. While charging the battery pack, no indicator appears or the indicator flashes in the display window in the following cases: Getting started – The battery pack is not installed correctly. – The AC power adaptor is disconnected. – Something is wrong with the battery pack. Charging time Battery pack Full charge (Normal charge) NP-F330 (supplied) 150 (90) NP-F530/F550 210 (150) NP-F730/F730H/F750 300 (240) NP-F930/F950 390 (330) NP-F960 420 (360) Approximate minutes to charge an empty battery pack Recording time Recording with Recording with Battery pack the viewfinder the LCD screen Continuous* Typical** Continuous* Typical** NP-F330 (supplied) 75 (65) 40 (35) 60 (55) 30 (30) NP-F530 120 (110) 65 (60) 100 (90) 55 (50) NP-F550 150 (135) 80 (75) 130 (115) 70 (60) NP-F730 265 (240) 145 (130) 230 (205) 125 (110) NP-F730H/F750 315 (275) 175 (150) 265 (235) 145 (130) NP-F930 410 (365) 225 (200) 355 (320) 195 (175) NP-F950 475 (430) 265 (240) 405 (360) 225 (200) NP-F960 575 (515) 320 (285) 480 (430) 265 (240) Approximate minutes of recording time when you use a fully charged battery Numbers in parentheses “( )” indicate the time using a normally charged battery. You cannot use the NP-500/510/710 battery pack on your camcorder. * Approximate continuous recording time at 25 °C (77 °F). The battery life will be shorter if you use your camcorder in a cold environment. ** Approximate minutes when recording while you repeat recording start/stop, zooming and turning the power on/off. The actual battery life may be shorter. 11
  • 12. Step 1 Preparing the power supply Playing time Battery pack Playing time Playing time on LCD screen with LCD closed NP-F330 (supplied) 90 (80) 110 (95) NP-F530 150 (135) 190 (165) NP-F550 185 (165) 225 (195) NP-F730 305 (275) 385 (345) NP-F730H/F750 375 (335) 460 (415) NP-F930 475 (430) 605 (540) NP-F950 570 (510) 705 (630) NP-F960 680 (610) 830 (745) Approximate minutes of playing time when you use a fully charged battery Numbers in parentheses “( )” indicate the time using a normally charged battery. The battery life will be shorter if you use your camcorder in a cold environment. You cannot use the NP-500/510/710 battery pack on your camcorder. Notes •The supplied battery pack is charged a little. •Some types of the battery packs may not be sold in your region or country. What is ”InfoLITHIUM?” The “InfoLITHIUM” is a lithium ion battery pack which can exchange data such as battery consumption with compatible video equipment. This unit is compatible with the “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack (L series). Your camcorder operates only with the “InfoLITHIUM” battery. “InfoLITHIUM” battery packs (L series) have the mark. “InfoLITHIUM” is a trademark of Sony Corporation. If the camcorder is immediately turned off Even if the remaining battery time is enough to operate, charge the battery pack fully again. The correct remaining time is displayed. 12
  • 13. Step 1 Preparing the power supply Connecting to a wall outlet When you use your camcorder for a long time, we recommend that you power it from a wall outlet using the AC power adaptor. (1) Open the DC IN jack cover and connect the AC power adaptor to the DC IN Getting started jack on your camcorder with the plug’s v mark facing toward the LCD panel side. (2) Connect the power cord to the AC power adaptor. (3) Connect the power cord to a wall outlet. 1 2 Precaution The set is not disconnected from the AC power source (house current) as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if the set itself has been turned off. Notes •The power cord must only be changed at an authorized service shop. •AC power adaptor can supply power even if the battery pack is attached to your camcorder. •The DC IN jack has source priority. This means that the battery pack cannot supply any power if the power cord is connected to the DC IN jack, even when the power cord is not plugged into a wall outlet. Using a car battery Use the Sony DC Adaptor/Charger (not supplied). 13
  • 14. Step 2 Inserting a cassette (1) Install the power source. (2) While pressing the small blue button on the EJECT switch, slide it in the direction of the arrow. After the cassette lid is opened, the cassette compartment automatically opens. (3) Push the middle portion of the back of the cassette to insert it. Insert the cassette in a straight line deeply into the cassette compartment with the window facing out and the write-protect tab facing upward. (4) Close the cassette compartment by pressing the PUSH mark on it. (5) Close the cassette lid until it clicks by pressing the PUSH button on the lid. 2 3,4 Window 5 PUSH PUSH Write-protect tab To eject a cassette Follow the procedure above, and take out the cassette in step 3. Notes •The cassette lid will not be closed when you press any part of the lid other than the PUSH button. •Do not catch your finger in the cassette lid. When you use mini DV cassettes with cassette memory Read the instruction about cassette memory to use this function properly (p. 143). To prevent accidental erasure Slide the write-protect tab on the cassette to the protect position. If the grip strap prevents the cassette lid from opening fully Adjust the length of the grip strap (p. 165). If Q flashes even if the cassette has been inserted Press the PUSH button again to close the cover firmly. 14
  • 15. — Recording – Basics — Recording a picture Your camcorder automatically focuses for you. (1) Remove the hood cap and pull the hood cap string to fix it. (2) Install the power source and insert a cassette. See “Step 1” and “Step 2” for more information (p. 9 to 14). (3) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA while pressing the small green button. Your camcorder is set to the standby mode. Recording – Basics (4) Slide OPEN in the direction of the B mark to open the LCD panel. The picture now being shot is displayed on the LCD screen, and it disappears from the viewfinder screen. (5) Press START/STOP. Your camcorder starts recording. The “REC” indicator appears. The camera recording lamps located on the front and rear of your camcorder light up. To stop recording, press START/STOP again. You can use REC START/STOP located on the front instead of START/STOP on the rear. Camera recording lamps Microphone 1 4 OPEN LOCK REC START/STOP 3 2 POWER VCR (CHG) OFF CAMERA 5 POWER 40min REC 0:00:01 VCR MEMORY (CHG) OFF CAMERA MEMORY If the ND1 or ND2 indicator flashes on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder The ND filter is necessary. Set the ND FILTER selector to 1 or 2. However, if you change the position during recording, the brightness of the picture may change or audio noise may occur. This is not a malfunction. We recommend that you check the position of the ND FILTER selector before shooting. See “Using the ND filter” on page 46. Notes •Fasten the grip strap firmly. •Do not touch the microphone during recording. 15
  • 16. Recording a picture Note on the recording mode Your camcorder records and plays back in SP (standard play) mode and in LP (long play) mode. Select SP or LP in the menu settings. In LP mode, you can record 1.5 times as long as in SP mode. When you record a tape on your camcorder in LP mode, we recommend playing the tape on your camcorder. Note on the LOCK switch When you slide the LOCK switch to the left, the POWER switch can no longer be set to MEMORY accidentally. The LOCK switch is set to the right as a default setting. We recommend that you set the LOCK switch to the left when you record on a mini DV cassette. Note on the progressive mode If you intend to use the images on your PC or play the images back as still images, we recommend that you set PROG. SCAN to ON in the menu settings before shooting (p. 34). The picture quality may improve in this mode, but if you shoot a moving subject, the image may shake when it is played back. To enable smooth transition Transition between the last scene you recorded and the next scene is smooth as long as you do not eject the cassette even if you turn off your camcorder. When you use a tape with cassette memory, however, you can make the transition smooth even after ejecting the cassette if you use the end search function (p. 25). However, check the following: •When you change the battery pack, set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG). •Do not mix recordings in the SP mode and ones in the LP mode on one tape. Note on tape transition The playback picture may be distorted or the time code may not be written properly between scenes when: •You change the recording mode (SP/LP). •You record in LP mode. If you leave your camcorder in standby mode for five minutes while the cassette is inserted Your camcorder automatically turns off. This is to prevent tape wear and save battery power. To resume the standby mode, set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG), and to CAMERA again. When a cassette is not inserted, your camcorder does not turn off. 16
  • 17. Recording a picture Adjusting the LCD screen The LCD panel is opened up to 90 degrees and it rotates about 90 degrees to the viewfinder side and about 180 degrees to the lens side. If you turn the LCD panel over so that it faces the other way in standby or recording mode, the indicator appears on the LCD screen and in the viewfinder (Mirror mode). Recording – Basics 180° 90° OPEN To close the LCD panel, set it vertically and swing it into the camcorder body until it clicks. Note When opening the LCD panel, the viewfinder is automatically turned off, however, it is not turned off when the LCD panel is turned over or the camcorder is in mirror mode. When you use the LCD screen outdoors in direct sunlight The LCD screen may be difficult to see. If this happens, we recommend that you use the viewfinder. When you adjust the angle of the LCD panel Make sure that the LCD panel is opened up to 90 degrees. When using both the LCD screen and the viewfinder during shooting The usable time of the battery pack when using both the LCD screen and the viewfinder will be shorter a little than when using the viewfinder only. Pictures in the mirror mode The picture on the LCD screen is a mirror-image. However, the recording picture will be normal. During recording in mirror mode ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote Commander does not work. Indicators in the mirror mode The STBY indicator appears as zX and REC as z. Some of the other indicators appear mirror-reversed and others are not displayed. However, if you close the LCD panel with the LCD screen turned over, indicators appear normally. 17
  • 18. Recording a picture Adjusting the brightness of the LCD screen To adjust the brightness of the LCD screen, press LCD BRIGHT + or –. The battery life is longer when the LCD panel is closed. Use the viewfinder instead of the LCD screen to save the battery power. To brighten LCD BRIGHT To darken On the LCD screen backlight You can change the brightness of the backlight. Select LCD B.L. in the menu settings (p. 107). Even if you do the LCD screen adjustment using the LCD BRIGHT +/– buttons, or using LCD B.L. and LCD COLOR items in the menu settings The recorded picture will not be affected. Recording in a low position You can record in a low position to get an interesting recording angle. Lift up the viewfinder or rotate the LCD panel with the screen facing up to record from a low position. In this case, it is useful to use the REC START/STOP button located on the front or the camcorder. REC START/ STOP After recording (1) Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG). (2) Close the LCD panel. (3) Eject the cassette. (4) Remove the battery pack. 18
  • 19. Recording a picture Adjusting the viewfinder If you record pictures with the LCD panel closed, check the picture with the viewfinder. Adjust the viewfinder lens to your eyesight so that the indicators in the viewfinder come into sharp focus. Lift up the viewfinder and move the viewfinder adjustment lever. Recording – Basics To adjust the brightness of the viewfinder screen, use the VF B.L. item in the menu settings (p. 107). Even if you adjust the viewfinder screen backlight The recorded picture will not be affected. When the shooting conditions are too bright Use the supplied large eyecup. Fit it onto the camcorder by stretching the corners a little. You can attach it with the large part of it located on both left and right. 2 1 3 4 19
  • 20. Recording a picture Using the zoom feature To zoom using the zoom lever Press the power zoom lever a little for a slower zoom. Press it deeper for a faster zoom. Using the zoom function sparingly results in better-looking recordings. “T” side: for telephoto (subject appears closer) “W” side: for wide-angle (subject appears farther away) W T T W T W When you shoot close to a subject If you cannot get a sharp focus, press the “W” side of the power zoom lever until the focus is sharp. You can shoot a subject that is at least about 80 cm (about 2 feet 5/8 inch) away from the lens surface in the telephoto position, or about 1 cm (about 1/2 inch) away in the wide-angle position. To zoom using the zoom ring Using the zoom ring, you can control the zoom by your desired speed and you can make fine adjustments. During recording, turn the zoom ring to the desired speed. Zoom ring For wide-angle For telephoto Note If you turn the zoom ring quickly, the zoom may not respond to the zoom ring. Rotate the zoom ring with appropriate speed. 20
  • 21. Recording a picture Using the disital zoom – Zoom greater than 12× Zoom greater than 12× is performed digitally, if you set D ZOOM to 24× or 48× in the menu settings. The digital zoom function is set to OFF as a default setting (p. 107). If you use the digital zoom function, the picture quality deteriorates. Recording – Basics W T The right-ended portion of the bar shows the digital zooming zone. The digital zooming zone appears when you set D ZOOM to 24× or 48×. You cannot use the digital zoom: – When you set PROG. SCAN to ON in the menu settings (p. 107). – When the POWER switch is set to MEMORY. Indicators displayed during recording The indicators are not recorded on the tapes. [a] [b] [c] [d] 40min REC 0:00:01 [e] 45min [f] ND1 [g] JUL 4 2000 12:05:56PM [i] [h] [a] Remaining battery time indicator This appears after you turn on the power and wait for a while. [b]Cassette memory indicator This appears when using a tape with cassette memory. [c] Recording mode indicator [d]STBY/REC indicator [e] Time code indicator/Tape counter [f] Remaining tape indicator This appears after you insert a cassette. [g]ND filter indicator This flashes when the ND FILTER selector should be set. After you have set the ND FILTER selector, the ND FILTER position selected is indicated. (When the ND OFF position is selected, the indication disappears.) [h]Time indicator The time is displayed about five seconds after the POWER switch is set to CAMERA or MEMORY. [i] Date indicator The date is displayed about five seconds after the POWER switch is set to CAMERA or MEMORY. 21
  • 22. Recording a picture Time code The time code indicates the recording or playback time, “0:00:00” (hours : minutes : seconds) in CAMERA mode and “0:00:00:00” (hours : minutes : seconds : frames) in VCR mode. You cannot rewrite only the time code. Your camcorder uses the drop frame mode. Remaining tape indicator The indicator may not be displayed accurately depending on the tape. Note on recording date/time Recording date/time is not displayed during shooting, however, it is automatically recorded on the tape. You can check the recording date/time during playback by pressing DATA CODE. Shooting backlit subjects (BACK LIGHT) When you shoot a subject with the light source behind the subject or a subject with a light background, use the backlight function. Press BACK LIGHT in standby, recording, or memory mode. The . indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. To cancel, press BACK LIGHT again. FADER BACK LIGHT SPOT LIGHT BACK LIGHT If you press one of the following buttons when using the backlight function The backlight function will be canceled. – SPOT LIGHT – EXPOSURE When you manually adjust the exposure You cannot use the backlight function. 22
  • 23. Recording a picture Using the spot light function This function prevents people’s faces, for example, from appearing excessively white when shooting subjects lit by strong light, such as in the theater. Press SPOT LIGHT in standby, recording, or memory mode. The indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. Recording – Basics To cancel, press SPOT LIGHT again. FADER BACK LIGHT SPOT LIGHT SPOT LIGHT If you press one of the following buttons when using the spot light function The spot light function will be canceled. – BACK LIGHT – EXPOSURE When you manually adjust the exposure You cannot use the spot light function. You cannot use the spot light mode while in the following settings: – Shutter speed value of 1/30 or smaller – Old movie – Low lux mode of the PROGRAM AE function 23
  • 24. Recording a picture Self-timer recording You can make a recording with the self-timer. This recording is useful when you want to record yourself. You can also use the Remote Commander. (1) Press (self-timer) in standby mode. The (self-timer) indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (2) Press START/STOP. Self-timer starts counting down from 10 seconds with a beep sound. In the last two seconds of the countdown, the beep sound gets faster, then recording starts automatically. START/STOP 2 POWER VCR 1 (CHG) OFF CAMERA MEMORY (self-timer) To stop the self-timer before recording Press START/STOP again. Use the Remote Commander for convenience. To record still pictures on tapes using the self-timer Press PHOTO in step 2 (p. 32). To record still pictures on a “Memory Stick” using the self- timer Press (self-timer), then press PHOTO in memory mode (p. 123). To cancel self-timer recording Press (self-timer) so that the indicator disappears from the LCD or viewfinder screen while your camcorder is in standby mode. Note The self-timer recording is automatically canceled when: – Self-timer recording is finished. – The POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG) or VCR. 24
  • 25. Checking the recording – END SEARCH / EDITSEARCH / Rec Review You can use these buttons to check recorded pictures or shoot so that the transition between the last recorded scene and the next scene you will record is smooth. END SEARCH Recording – Basics EDITSEARCH Searching the end point of the recording — END SEARCH You can easily go to the end of the last recorded portion. Press END SEARCH in standby mode. The camcorder rewinds or fast-forwards the tape and the last five-second recorded picture is played back. After playback the camcorder turns to standby mode. You can monitor the sound from the speaker or headphones. Changing the next recording start point — EDITSEARCH You can change the next recording start point in standby mode. Hold down the +/– side of EDITSEARCH in standby mode. The recorded picture is played back. +: to go forward – : to go backward Release EDITSEARCH to stop playback. If you press START/STOP, re-recording begins from the point you released EDITSEARCH. You cannot monitor the sound. Checking the last recorded picture — Rec Review You can check the last recorded portion. Press the – 7 side of EDITSEARCH momentarily in standby mode. The last few-seconds of picture is played back and the camcorder returns to standby. You can monitor the sound from the speaker or headphones. End search function When you use a tape without cassette memory, the end search function does not work once you eject the cassette after you have recorded on the tape. If you use a tape with cassette memory, the end search function works even once you eject the cassette. If there is a blank portion at the beginning or between the recorded portions, the end search function may not work correctly (p. 143). 25
  • 26. — Playback – Basics — Playing back a tape You can monitor the playback picture on the LCD screen. If you close the LCD panel, you can monitor the playback picture in the viewfinder. You can also control playback using the Remote Commander supplied with your camcorder. (1) Install the power source and insert the recorded tape. (2) Set the POWER switch to VCR while pressing the small green button. The video control buttons light up. (3) Slide OPEN in the direction of the B mark to open the LCD panel. (4) Press m to rewind the tape. (5) Press N to start playback. (6) To adjust the volume, press either of the VOLUME +/– buttons . 4 REW 5 PLAY 2 POWER VCR (CHG) OFF CAMERA 6 MEMORY VOLUME 3 1 To stop playback Press x. 26
  • 27. Playing back a tape When monitoring on the LCD screen You can turn the LCD panel over and move it back to the camcorder body with the LCD screen facing out. Playback – Basics When you close the LCD panel You cannot monitor the sound from the speaker. However, when the LCD panel is turned over to view on the LCD screen, you can monitor the sound from the speaker. To control the display of the screen indicators Press DISPLAY on the camcorder or on the Remote Commander supplied with your camcorder. The indicators appear on the LCD screen. To make the indicators disappear, press DISPLAY again. DISPLAY DATA CODE DISPLAY DATA CODE 27
  • 28. Playing back a tape Using the data code function Your camcorder automatically records not only images on the tape but also the recording data (date/time or various settings when recorded) (Data code). Press DATA CODE on the camcorder or on the Remote Commander supplied with your camcorder in playback mode. The display changes as follows: date/time t various settings (SteadyShot, white balance, gain, shutter speed, aperture value, exposure mode) t no indicator Date/time Various settings [a] [b] AUTO [c] JUL 4 2000 60 AWB 12:05:56 AM F1.6 0dB [d] [e] [f] [a] SteadyShot OFF indicator [b] Exposure mode/PROGRAM AE mode indicator [c] White balance indicator [d] Gain indicator [e] Shutter speed indicator [f] Aperture value To not display the various settings Set DATA CODE to DATE in the menu settings (p. 107). The display changes as follows: date/time y no indicator Recording data Recording data is your camcorder’s information when you have recorded something. In CAMERA mode, the recording data will not be displayed. When you use the data code function, “--- -- ----” (date) or “-- : -- : --” (time) appears if: – A blank portion of the tape is being played back. – The tape is unreadable due to tape damage or noise. – The tape was recorded by the camcorder without the date and time set. Data code When you connect your camcorder to the TV, the data code also appears on the TV screen (p. 30). Note on the date/time indicator Recording date/time is not displayed during shooting, however, it is automatically recorded on the tape. You can check the recording date/time during playback by pressing DATA CODE. If the exposure adjustment is set to minimum “CLOSE” is displayed at the location of the aperture value. 28
  • 29. Playing back a tape Various playback modes To operate video control buttons, set the POWER switch to VCR. To view a still picture (playback pause) Press X during playback. To resume normal playback, press N or X. To advance the tape Press M in stop mode. To resume normal playback, press N. Playback – Basics To rewind the tape Press m in stop mode. To resume normal playback, press N. To change the playback direction Press on the Remote Commander during playback to reverse the playback direction. To resume normal playback, press N. To locate a scene monitoring the picture (picture search) Keep pressing m or M during playback. To resume normal playback, release the button. To monitor the picture at high-speed while advancing or rewinding the tape (skip scan) Keep pressing m while rewinding or M while advancing the tape. To resume rewinding or advancing, release the button. To view the picture at slow speed (slow playback) Press y during playback. For slow playback in the reverse direction, press on the Remote Commander, then press y. To resume normal playback, press N. To view the picture at double speed Press ×2 on the Remote Commander during playback. For double speed playback in the reverse direction, press , then press ×2 on the Remote Commander. To resume normal playback, press N. To view the picture frame-by-frame Press C on the Remote Commander in playback pause mode. For frame-by-frame playback in the reverse direction, press c. To resume normal playback, press N. To search the last scene recorded (END SEARCH) Press END SEARCH in stop mode. The last five seconds of the recorded portion plays back and stops. In various playback modes •Sound is muted. •The previous picture may remain as a mosaic image during playback. When the playback pause mode lasts for five minutes Your camcorder automatically enters the stop mode. To resume playback, press N. Slow playback Slow playback can be performed smoothly on your camcorder, however, this function does not work for a signal output through the DV IN/OUT jack. When you play back a tape in reverse Horizontal noise may appear at the center, or the top and bottom of the screen. This is not a malfunction. If you insert the mini DV cassette recorded in a PAL system The camcorder automatically identify the system, and playback starts. You can only view the picture on your camcorder. (Quasi PAL playback) 29
  • 30. Viewing the recording on TV Connect your camcorder to your TV or VCR with the A/V connecting cable supplied with your camcorder to watch the playback picture on the TV screen. You can operate the video control buttons in the same way as when you monitor playback pictures on the LCD screen. When monitoring the playback picture on the TV screen, we recommend that you power your camcorder from a wall outlet using the AC power adaptor (p. 13). Refer to the operating instructions of your TV or VCR. Open the jack cover. Connect your camcorder to the TV using the A/V connecting cable supplied with your camcorder. Then, set the TV/VCR selector on the TV to VCR. S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L/R DV IN/OUT (not supplied) IN S VIDEO Yellow AUDIO VIDEO L/R White AUDIO : Signal flow Red If your TV is connected to a VCR Connect your camcorder to the line input on the VCR by using the A/V connecting cable supplied with your camcorder. Set the input selector on the VCR to LINE. If your TV or VCR is a monaural type Connect the yellow plug of the A/V connecting cable to the video input jack and only the white plug to the audio input jack on the VCR or the TV. The red plugs are not used. If your TV or VCR has an S video jack Connect using an S video cable (not supplied) to obtain high-quality pictures. With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/V connecting cable. Connect the S video cable (not supplied) to the S video jacks on both your camcorder and the TV or the VCR. This connection produces higher quality DV format pictures. When you adjust the TV screen If you monitor the shooting picture, not the playback picture, set COLOR BAR to ON in the menu settings (p. 107). The color bar is displayed on the TV screen. 30
  • 31. — Advanced Recording Operations — Recording a still image on a tape – Tape Photo recording You can record still images on mini DV tapes with all the pixels in the progressive mode. See page 34 for details. This mode is useful when you print images using a video printer (not supplied). Besides the operation described here, your camcorder can record still images on a “Memory Stick” (p. 120). (1) In standby mode, keep pressing PHOTO lightly until a picture freezes. The CAPTURE indicator appears. Recording does not start yet. To change the image, release PHOTO, select an image again, and then press and hold PHOTO lightly. (2) Press PHOTO deeper. The still image on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder is recorded for about Advanced Recording Operations seven seconds. The sound during those seven seconds is also recorded. The still image is displayed on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder until recording is completed. 1 PHOTO CAPTURE 2 PHOTO ••••••• The number of still images recordable on a mini DV cassette You can record about 510 images in SP mode and about 765 images in LP mode on a 60- minute cassette. Notes •During tape photo recording, you cannot change the mode or setting. •The PHOTO button does not work: – While the fader function is set or in use. – While the digital effect function is set or in use. •Do not shake the camcorder during tape photo recording. The recorded image may be blurred. To do tape photo recording using the Remote Commander Press PHOTO on the Remote Commander. Your camcorder immediately records an image on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. When you do tape photo recording during normal CAMERA recording You cannot check an image on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder by pressing PHOTO lightly. Press PHOTO deeper. The still image is then recorded for about seven seconds and your camcorder returns to standby mode. 31
  • 32. Recording a still image on a tape – Tape Photo recording Self-timer tape photo recording You can make a tape photo recording with the self-timer. This mode is useful when you want to record yourself. You can also use the Remote Commander. (1) Press (self-timer) in standby mode. The (self-timer) indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (2) Press PHOTO deeply. Self-timer starts counting down from 10 with a beep sound. In the last two seconds of the countdown, the beep sound gets faster, then recording starts automatically. PHOTO 2 PHOTO 1 To cancel self-timer recording Press (self-timer) so that the indicator disappears from the LCD or viewfinder screen while your camcorder is in standby mode. You cannot cancel the self-timer recording using the Remote Commander. Note The self-timer recording mode is automatically canceled when: – Self-timer tape photo recording is finished. – The POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG) or VCR. 32
  • 33. Recording a still image on a tape – Tape Photo recording Printing the still image You can print a still image by using a video printer (not supplied). Connect with the video printer using the A/V connecting cable supplied with your camcorder. Connect the yellow plugs of the cable to the video input of the video printer and the VIDEO jack on your camcorder. Refer to the operating instructions of the video printer as well. Video printer Advanced Recording Operations LINE IN S VIDEO S VIDEO VIDEO (not supplied) VIDEO : Signal flow If the video printer is equipped with an S video input Use an S video connecting cable (not supplied). Connect it to the S VIDEO jack on your camcorder and the S video input of the video printer. 33
  • 34. Shooting with all the pixels – PROG. SCAN When you handle the digital images on your PC, set PROG. SCAN to ON before shooting. You can record the images on a mini DV tape with higher resolution. Since the image taken in progressive mode would be stabilized even in pause mode, it is especially useful when you analyze high-speed actions such as sports scenes. (1) Press MENU to display the menu in standby mode. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select PROG. SCAN, then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial. (5) Press MENU to erase the menu display. The PROG. SCAN indicator lights up. 1 MENU 2-4 MANUAL SET AUTO SHTR PROG. SCAN MANUAL SET AUTO SHTR PROG. SCAN OFF RETURN ON [MENU] : END 5 PROG. SCAN MANUAL SET AUTO SHTR PROG. SCAN RETURN ON MENU [MENU] : END [MENU] : END To return to normal mode Select OFF in step 4, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. Note on the progressive mode A normal TV broadcast divides the screen into two finer fields and displays them in turns every 1/60 of a second (Interlace format). Thus, the actual image displayed in an instant covers only half of the apparent image area. Displaying the whole image simultaneously on a full screen is called displaying with all the pixels. In this mode, the resolution of the still picture is clearer than in the normal mode. This camcorder takes in an image every 1/15 of a second, which may cause the image of a moving object to go out of focus. This camcorder is originally programed to record in the normal TV format. When shooting under fluorescent light When shooting in progressive mode under fluorescent light or light bulbs, a rare phenomenon may happen in which the screen lights up brightly (Flicker phenomenon). This is not a malfunction. If you want to stop this phenomenon, set PROG. SCAN to OFF in the menu settings. On digital zooming You cannot use digital zooming in this mode. 34
  • 35. Using the guide frame You can easily make the picture be on a horizontal line using the guide frame. The guide frame is not recorded. (1) Press MENU to display the menu in standby mode. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select GUIDEFRAME, then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial. (5) Press MENU to erase the menu display. The guide frame is displayed on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. Advanced Recording Operations 1 MENU 2-4 LCD / VF SET LCD B. L. LCD COLOR VF B. L. GU I DEFRAME LCD / VF SET LCD B. L. LCD COLOR VF B. L. GU I DEFRAME OFF [MENU] : END RETURN ON 5 MENU LCD / VF SET LCD B. L. LCD COLOR VF B. L. GU I DEFRAME ON [MENU] : END RETURN [MENU] : END To clear the guide frame Select OFF in step 4, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial or simply press DISPLAY. Note The guide frame indicates only a rough level. The size and position of the guide frame do not affect the setting of the camcorder. If you set GUIDEFRAME to ON The other screen indicators are also displayed on the LCD screen. 35
  • 36. Using the wide mode You can record a 16:9 wide picture to watch on a 16:9 wide-screen TV (16:9WIDE). Black bands appear on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder during recording in 16:9WIDE mode [a]. The picture during playback on a normal TV [b] or on a wide- screen TV [c] is compressed in the widthwise direction. If you set the screen mode of the wide-screen TV to the full mode, you can watch pictures of normal images [d]. [b] [a] 16:9WIDE [c] [d] In standby mode, set 16:9WIDE to ON in in the menu settings (p. 107). MENU To cancel the wide mode Set 16:9WIDE to OFF in the menu settings (p. 107). In wide mode, you cannot select the following modes: •Old movie •Progressive mode Connection to a TV Pictures recorded in 16:9WIDE mode automatically appear on the TV screen at full size when you connect your camcorder to a TV that is compatible with the video ID (ID-1/ ID-2) system and when you connect to the S video input jack on a TV. ID-1 system The ID-1 system sends aspect ratio information (16:9, 4:3, or letter box) using video signals. If you connect a TV compatible with the ID-1 system, the screen size is automatically selected. ID-2 system The ID-2 system sends a copyright protection signal with ID-1 signals inserted between video signals when you connect your camcorder to other equipment using an A/V connecting cable. During recording You cannot operate the wide mode function. When you cancel the wide mode, set your camcorder to the standby mode and then set 16:9WIDE to OFF in the menu settings. 36
  • 37. Using the fader function You can fade the picture in or out to give your recording a professional appearance. [a] STBY REC FADER Advanced Recording Operations OVERLAP* WIPE* DOT* (Random) * Fade in only [b] STBY REC MONOTONE When fading in, the picture gradually changes from black-and-white to color. When fading out the picture gradually changes from color to black-and-white. 37
  • 38. Using the fader function (1) When fading in [a] In standby mode, press FADER until the desired fader indicator flashes. When fading out [b] In recording mode, press FADER until the desired fader indicator flashes. The indicator changes as follows: FADER t MONOTONE t OVERLAP tWIPE tDOTt no indicator The last selected fader mode is indicated first. (2) Press START/STOP. After the fade in/out is carried out, your camcorder automatically returns to the normal mode. 1 FADER FADER 2 POWER VCR (CHG) OFF CAMERA MEMORY To cancel the fader function Press FADER until the indicator disappears. Note You cannot use the following functions while using the fader function, and vice versa: – Digital effect – Low lux mode of PROGRAM AE (Only in OVERLAP, WIPE, or DOT mode) – Tape Photo recording – Interval recording – Cut recording When the OVERLAP, WIPE, or DOT indicator appears Your camcorder automatically stores the image recorded on a tape. As the image is being stored, the fader indicator flashes fast, and the playback picture appears. 38
  • 39. Using special effects – Picture effect You can digitally process images to obtain special effects like those in films or on TV. NEG. ART [a] : The color and brightness of the picture is reversed. SEPIA : The picture gets sepia-toned. B&W : The picture appears in monochrome (black-and-white). SOLARIZE [b] : The light intensity is emphatic, and the picture looks like an illustration. SLIM [c] : The picture expands vertically. STRETCH [d] : The picture expands horizontally. [a] [b] [c] [d] Advanced Recording Operations (1) In standby or recording mode, press PICTURE EFFECT. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired picture effect mode. The picture effect indicator changes as follows: NEG. ART y SEPIA y B&W y SOLARIZE y SLIM y STRETCH 1 PICTURE EFFECT 2 To cancel the picture effect function Press PICTURE EFFECT so that the indicator disappears. While using the picture effect function You cannot select the old movie mode. When you turn the power off The picture effect function will be automatically canceled. When PROG. SCAN is set to ON in the menu settings You cannot select SLIM and STRETCH. 39
  • 40. Using special effects – Digital effect You can add special effects to recorded pictures using the various digital functions. The sound is recorded normally. STILL You can record a still image so that it is superimposed on a moving picture. FLASH (FLASH MOTION) You can record still images successively at constant intervals. LUMI. (LUMINANCEKEY) You can swap a brighter area in a still image with a moving picture. TRAIL You can record the picture so that an incidental image like a trail is left. OLD MOVIE You can add an old movie type atmosphere to pictures. The black bands appear on the upper and lower of the screen to change the virtual screen size to the cinemascope size, and the picture effect is set to SEPIA. Still image Moving picture STILL Still image Moving picture LUMI. 40
  • 41. Using special effects – Digital effect (1) In standby or recording mode, press DIGITAL EFFECT. The digital effect indicator appears. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired digital effect mode. The digital effect indicator changes as follows: STILL y FLASH y LUMI. y TRAIL y OLD MOVIE (3) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. The indicator lights up and the bar appears. In STILL and LUMI. modes, the still image is stored in memory. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the effect. Items to be adjusted Advanced Recording Operations STILL The rate of the still image you want to superimpose on the moving picture FLASH The interval of flash motion LUMI. The color scheme of the area in the still image which is to be swapped with a moving picture TRAIL The time until the incidental image vanishes OLD MOVIE No adjustment necessary The longer the bar on the screen, the stronger the digital effect. The bar appears in the following modes: STILL, FLASH, LUMI. and TRAIL. 3 LUMI. 1 DIGITAL EFFECT 4 2 LUMI. To cancel the digital effect Press DIGITAL EFFECT. The digital effect indicator disappears. 41
  • 42. Using special effects – Digital effect Notes •The following functions do not work in digital effect mode: – Fader – Low lux mode of PROGRAM AE – Tape Photo recording – Shutter speed (1/30 or smaller) adjustment •The following functions do not work in old movie mode: – Wide mode – Picture effect – PROGRAM AE – Spot light mode – Shutter speed adjustment When you turn the power off The digital effect function will be automatically canceled. 42
  • 43. Shooting with manual adjustment Under normal conditions, this unit automatically makes various adjustments as it shoots. However, you can adjust the following functions manually to suit your preference. Functions you can adjust by setting the AUTO LOCK selector to the center (auto lock release) position Brightness (exposure), shutter speed, white balance, and PROGRAM AE Functions you can adjust in menu settings Deactivating the SteadyShot Advanced Recording Operations Functions you can adjust by using other selectors/rings ND filter, zebra pattern, focus, and zoom The following describes how to adjust all the functions mentioned above except white balance (p. 49), PROGRAM AE (p. 55), focus (p. 58), and zoom (p. 20). AUTO LOCK selector Set the selector as shown below to maintain or release the settings of the functions. AUTO LOCK [a] [b] [c] HOLD AUTO LOCK [a] Select this position to let the unit adjust all the functions automatically. HOLD [b] Select this position after setting the functions manually to maintain the settings. Manual position (AUTO LOCK release) [c] Select this position to adjust the functions listed above manually. If you use the video flash light (not supplied) We recommend that you set the AUTO LOCK selector to AUTO LOCK. Note When you manually adjust the exposure during backlight or spot light mode, the backlight or spot light function will be automatically canceled. 43
  • 44. Shooting with manual adjustment Adjusting exposure Adjust the exposure manually under the following cases. [a] [b] [a] •The background is too bright (back lighting) •Insufficient light: most of the picture is dark [b] •Bright subject and dark background •To record the darkness faithfully (1) Set the AUTO LOCK selector to the center (auto lock release) position while the camcorder is in standby, recording, or memory mode. (2) Press EXPOSURE. The exposure indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (3) Turn the EXPOSURE dial to adjust the exposure. As you turn the dial, the iris value changes between OPEN and CLOSE and the gain value changes between 0 dB and 18dB. To brighten the picture, adjust the level to the + side. 2 1 AUTO LOCK •EXP O SU RE HOLD F5.6 0dB 3 To return to automatic exposure mode Set the AUTO LOCK selector to AUTO LOCK or press EXPOSURE. The exposure indicator disappears from the LCD or viewfinder screen. If you press PROGRAM AE when adjusting the exposure manually The exposure comes back to automatic adjustment again. When you focus in telephoto You cannot choose F1.6 and F2.0. 44
  • 45. Shooting with manual adjustment Adjusting the shutter speed (1) Set the AUTO LOCK selector to the center (auto lock release) position while the camcorder is in standby, recording, or memory mode. (2) If the PROGRAM AE indicator is lit, press PROGRAM AE repeatedly until the indicator disappears from the LCD or viewfinder screen. (3) Press SHUTTER SPEED. The shutter speed indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired speed. The available shutter speed ranges from 1/4 to 1/10000. As you turn the dial, the shutter Advanced Recording Operations speed changes as follows: 1/4 y 1/8 y 1/15 y 1/30 y ... y 1/4000 y 1/6000 y 1/10000 To increase the shutter speed, select a smaller setting (large value indicator on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder). 2 PROGRAM AE AUTO 1 LOCK 3 SHUTTER SPEED HOLD 60 4 To return to automatic shutter speed mode Set the AUTO LOCK selector to AUTO LOCK or press SHUTTER SPEED. The shutter speed indicator disappears from the LCD or viewfinder screen. When shooting at slow shutter speed At slow shutter speed, automatic focus may be lost. Use a tripod and adjust the focus manually. When shooting under fluorescent light or light bulbs When shooting under fluorescent light or light bulbs, a rare phenomenon may happen in which the screen lights up brightly depending on the shutter speed (Flicker phenomenon). If you set the shutter speed value to 1/30 or smaller You cannot use the spot light (p. 23) and digital effect (p. 40) functions. 45
  • 46. Shooting with manual adjustment Using the ND filter Using the ND filter (the ND filter 1 setting corresponds to 1/4 of the quantity of light and the ND filter 2 setting corresponds to 1/32 of the quantity of light), you can record a picture clearly by adjusting light amounts, even if you shoot under too bright conditions. When the ND1 or ND2 indicator flashes on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder The ND filter is necessary. When ND 1 flashes, set the ND FILTER selector to 1 so that the ND 1 indicator lights up on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. When ND 2 flashes, set the ND FILTER selector to 2 so that the ND 2 indicator lights up on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. When ND OFF flashes on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder The ND filter is not necessary. Set the ND FILTER selector to OFF so that the indicator disappears from the LCD or viewfinder screen. The ND filter is now deactivated. ND FILTER 2 1 OFF Note If you set the ND FILTER selector to another positions during recording, the picture may be blurred or audio noise may occur. We recommend that you check the position of the ND FILTER selector before shooting. If you use the video flash light (not supplied) Set the ND FILTER selector to OFF when you use the flash. 46
  • 47. Shooting with manual adjustment Shooting with the zebra pattern You can set the camcorder to display a zebra pattern (diagonal stripes) in the portion of the picture on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder with a subject whose brightness exceeds a certain level. The portion of the picture where zebra pattern appears is an area of high brightness and overexposure. You can check the picture level of a subject by displaying the zebra pattern. Use the zebra pattern as a guide for adjusting the exposure and shutter speed so that you can get the desired picture. Set the ZEBRA selector to 70 or 100 in standby or memory mode. Advanced Recording Operations ZEBRA OFF 70 100 Setting Meaning 70 The zebra pattern appears in the portion of the picture on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder with a subject whose brightness is about 70 IRE. 100 The zebra pattern appears in the portion of the picture on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder with a subject whose brightness exceeds more than 100 IRE. OFF The zebra pattern does not appear on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. To erase the zebra pattern Set the ZEBRA selector to OFF. Note on shooting with the zebra pattern Even though you see the zebra pattern on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder, the zebra pattern is not recorded. 47
  • 48. Shooting with manual adjustment Releasing the SteadyShot function When the SteadyShot function is working, the camcorder compensates for camera- shake. You can release the SteadyShot function when you do not need to use it. The indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. Do not use the SteadyShot function when shooting a stationary object with a tripod. (1) Press MENU to display the menu in standby or memory mode. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select STEADYSHOT, then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select OFF, then press the dial. (5) Press MENU to erase the menu display. 2-4 CAMERA SET D ZOOM 16 : 9W I DE STEADYSHOT FRAME REC I NT. REC CAMERA SET D ZOOM [MENU] 16 : 9W I DE : END STEADYSHOT ON FRAME REC OFF I NT. REC RETURN 1,5 MENU CAMERA SET D ZOOM [MENU] 16 : 9W I DE : END STEADYSHOT OFF FRAME REC I NT. REC RETURN [MENU] : END To activate the SteadyShot function again Select ON in step 4, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. Notes on the SteadyShot function •The SteadyShot function will not correct excessive camera-shake. •If you use a tele conversion lens (not supplied) or a wide conversion lens (not supplied), these lens may influence the SteadyShot function. 48
  • 49. Adjusting the white balance White balance adjustment makes white subjects look white and allows more natural color balance for camera recording. Normally, white balance is automatically adjusted. You can obtain better results by adjusting the white balance manually when lighting conditions change quickly or when recording outdoors: e.g., neon signs, fireworks. (1) Set the AUTO LOCK selector to the center (auto lock release) position while the camcorder is in standby, recording, or memory mode. (2) Press WHT BAL. The white balance indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the appropriate white balance mode under the following conditions. As you turn the dial, the display changes as follows: Advanced Recording Operations (One-push white balance) y (Outdoor) y n (Indoor) 1 AUTO LOCK 2 WHT BAL 3 HOLD Indicator Shooting conditions • Adjusting the white balance according to the light source. This operation is not available during recording. Follow the procedure described on the next page to adjust the setting again. (Outdoor)• Recording a sunset/sunrise, just after sunset, just before sunrise, neon signs, or fireworks • Under a color matching fluorescent lamp n (Indoor) • Lighting condition changes quickly • Too bright a place such as a photography studio • Under sodium lamps or mercury lamps 49
  • 50. Adjusting the white balance If you have selected in step 3 When you set the white balance to one-push white balance mode, the setting is locked and maintained even if lighting conditions change. You can achieve recording with natural colors without the image being affected by ambient light. (With the indicator on the screen) (1) Shoot a white object such as paper fully. (2) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. The indicator flashes quickly. When the white balance has been adjusted and stored in the memory, the indicator stops flashing. The setting will be maintained even if the battery is detached. To return to automatic adjustment Set the AUTO LOCK selector to AUTO LOCK or press WHT BAL. The white balance indicator disappears from the LCD or viewfinder screen. Notes on white balance •When you shoot with studio lighting or video lighting, use the n (indoor) mode. •When you shoot with fluorescent lighting, readjust the white balance using the (one-push white balance) mode , or use the automatic white balance mode. If you use the n (indoor) mode, white balance may not be adjusted appropriately. Shooting when lighting conditions have changed •When lighting conditions have changed, readjust the white balance while the camcorder is in standby mode. •In automatic white balance mode, point your camcorder at a white subject for about 10 seconds after setting the POWER switch to CAMERA to get a better adjustment when: – You detach the battery for replacement. – You bring your camcorder outdoors from the interior of a house, or vice versa. If the indicator does not stop flashing after you press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial The white balance cannot be set. Use the automatic white balance mode. 50
  • 51. Adjusting recording level manually – Sound recording level You can adjust the recording sound level. Use headphones to monitor the sound when you adjust it. Setting up the menu (1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or VCR. (2) Press MENU to display the menu. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select MIC LEVEL, then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select MANUAL, then press the dial. (6) Press MENU to erase the menu display. Advanced Recording Operations Adjusting the recording level (7) Press AUDIO LEVEL to display the recording level adjustment display in standby or recording mode. (8) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the recording level. 1 POWER VCR (CHG) OFF CAMERA 7 MEMORY AUDIO LEVEL 2,6 MENU [a] 30 20 12 0 dB [b][c] 3,4 TAPE SET 5 TAPE SET REC MODE REC MODE AUD I O MODE AUD I O MODE REMA I N REMA I N M I C LEVEL M I C LEVEL AUTO RETURN MANUAL TAPE SET TAPE SET 8 REC MODE REC MODE AUD I O MODE AUD I O MODE REMA I N REMA I N [MENU] M I C LEVEL : END AUTO MIC [MENU] : END LEVEL MANUAL RETURN RETURN [MENU] : END [MENU] : END [a] Recording level meter [b] Decreases the recording level [c] Increases the recording level To clear the recording level adjustment display Press AUDIO LEVEL again. To adjust the recording level automatically Select AUTO in step 5, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. 51
  • 52. Adjusting recording level manually – Sound recording level Notes on the manual adjustment •The recording level setting is retained for about five minutes after removing the battery. •The recording level indicator appears at the lower-right on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. The sound input through the AUDIO L/R jacks or DV IN/OUT jack You cannot adjust the recording level. When MIC LEVEL is set to AUTO You cannot adjust the recording level, however, the recording level adjustment display is displayed. 52
  • 53. Presetting the adjustment for picture quality – Custom preset You can preset the camcorder to record the picture with the desired picture quality. When presetting, adjust the picture by shooting a subject and checking the picture displayed on a TV using the menu settings. (1) Press CUSTOM PRESET to display the CUSTOM PRESET menu in standby or memory mode. (2) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select SET, then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired item, then press the dial. (6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the selected item, then press the dial. Advanced Recording Operations (7) Press CUSTOM PRESET. The CUSTOM PRESET menu disappears and the indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. 1 CUSTOM PRESET SET OFF STBY 2-4 CUSTOM PRESET SET COLOR LVL OFF STBY COLOR LVL SHARPNESS CUSTOM SHARPNESS WB SH I FT PRESET WB SH I FT AE SH I FT AE SH I FT AGC LIMIT AGC LIMIT OFF RESET RESET RETURN CUSTOM PRESET STBY SET OFF COLOR LVL [CP] : END ON SHARPNESS [CP] : END WB SH I FT AE SH I FT AGC LIMIT RESET RETURN CUSTOM PRESET STBY SET ON COLOR LVL [CP] : END SHARPNESS WB SH I FT AE SH I FT AGC LIMIT 7 RESET RETURN CUSTOM PRESET [CP] : END 5,6 CUSTOM PRESET SET COLOR LVL STBY SHARPNESS WB SH I FT AE SH I FT AGC LIMIT RESET RETURN CUSTOM PRESET STBY COLOR LVL [CP] : END [CP] : END 53
  • 54. Presetting the adjustment for picture quality Items to be adjusted Item Meaning Adjustment value COLOR LVL Color intensity Decreases color intensity y Increases color intensity SHARPNESS Sharpness Softer y Sharper WB SHIFT White balance Bluish y Reddish AE SHIFT Brightness –4 y +4 AGC LIMIT Auto Gain-limit 6 dB/12 dB/OFF RESET Sets items above to the default settings. To cancel using the custom preset Select OFF in step 4, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. To return to the standard setting Select OK from the RESET item in step 5, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. To cancel, select CANCEL, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. To check the custom preset setting Press CUSTOM PRESET while the camcorder is in standby, recording or memory mode. The custom preset setting appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. Once you adjust AE shift The –4 to +4 indicator is displayed on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. The number varies corresponding to the AE shift level. About the AGC Limit When adjusting the exposure manually, the level of the gain is up to 18 dB (OFF). When you preset the desired picture quality in CAMERA or memory mode The preset is only available in each mode you preset. If you want to use a preset both in CAMERA and memory modes, you have to preset in each mode. 54
  • 55. Using the PROGRAM AE function You can select from five PROGRAM AE (Auto Exposure) modes to suit your shooting situation, referring to the following. Selecting the best mode Select a proper PROGRAM AE mode referring to the following description. Advanced Recording Operations A: Aperture priority mode Selecting the aperture to determine the desired depth of field. Gain and shutter speed are automatically set in combination with the aperture value to maintain appropriate exposure. S: Shutter speed priority mode Selecting the shutter speed manually. The exposure value changes in accordance with the selected shutter speed. : Sports lesson mode Capturing high-speed action in sports such as golf or tennis : Sunset & Moon mode Recording sunset, night views, fireworks or neon signs : Low lux mode For recording a subject in insufficient light. Subject becomes bright. 55
  • 56. Using the PROGRAM AE function Using the PROGRAM AE function (1) Set the AUTO LOCK selector to the center (auto lock release) position while the camcorder is in standby, recording, or memory mode. (2) Press PROGRAM AE. The PROGRAM AE indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired PROGRAM AE mode. The PROGRAM AE mode changes as follows: Aperture priority mode y Shutter speed priority mode y Sports lesson mode y Sunset & Moon mode y Low lux mode When you select the aperture priority mode or the shutter speed priority mode, press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. (4) In aperture priority mode ( A) or shutter speed priority mode ( S), turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired aperture value (F value) or shutter speed. Aperture priority mode: Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired aperture value. As you turn the dial, the F value changes between F1.6 and F11. For a smaller aperture, select a higher value. The gain and shutter speed change in accordance with the selected aperture value. Shutter speed priority mode: Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired shutter speed. As you turn the dial, shutter speed changes between 1/60 and 1/10000. For a faster shutter speed, select a smaller value indicator on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. The gain and aperture values change in accordance with the selected shutter speed. AUTO 1 LOCK 3,4 HOLD 2 PROGRAM AE To cancel using the PROGRAM AE function Set the AUTO LOCK selector to AUTO LOCK or press PROGRAM AE. The PROGRAM AE indicator disappears from the LCD or viewfinder screen. 56
  • 57. Using the PROGRAM AE function Notes •In sports lesson mode, you cannot take close-ups. This is because your camcorder is set to focus only on subjects in the middle to far distance. •In sunset & moon mode, your camcorder is set to focus only on distant subjects. •The old movie mode and the shutter speed adjustment do not work in PROGRAM AE mode. •The following functions do not work in low lux mode: – Digital effect – Overlap – Wipe – Dot Advanced Recording Operations – Spot light mode •While shooting in memory mode, the low lux and sports lesson modes do not work. (The indicator flashes.) If you are recording under a discharge tube such as a fluorescent lamp, sodium lamp or mercury lamp Flickering or changes in color may occur in sports lesson mode. If this happens, turn the PROGRAM AE function off. Even if the PROGRAM AE function is selected You can adjust the exposure. When you focus in telephoto You cannot choose F1.6 and F2.0. About the depth of field The depth of field is the in-focus range, measured from the distance behind a subject to the distance in front. The depth of field can vary with the iris (F value) and the focal length. Lowering the F value (large iris) reduces the depth of field. Raising the F value (small iris) provides a larger depth of field. Zooming in telephoto position offers a smaller depth of field while the depth of field in the wide-angle position is greater. The depth of field Shallow Deep Iris Near open (Low F value) Near close (High F value) Zoom Telephoto (T) Wide (W) 57
  • 58. Focusing manually You can gain better results by manually adjusting the focus in the following cases: •The autofocus mode is not effective when shooting – subjects through glass coated with water droplets – horizontal stripes – subjects with little contrast with backgrounds such as walls and sky •When you want to change the focus from a subject in the foreground to a subject in the background •Shooting a stationary subject when using a tripod (1) Slide FOCUS down to MANUAL in standby, recording, or memory mode. The 9 indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder in recording, standby, or memory mode. (2) Turn the focus ring to sharpen the focus. 2 1 AUTO FOCUS MAN INFINITY PUSH AUTO To return to the autofocus mode Slide FOCUS up to AUTO to turn off the 9 or indicator. To focus in infinity Slide FOCUS to INFINITY. The indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. This function is useful when the nearer subject is focused automatically, even though you want to focus on a faraway subject. To shoot with auto focusing momentarily Press PUSH AUTO. The auto focus functions while you are pressing PUSH AUTO. Use this button to focus on one subject and then another with smooth focusing. When you release PUSH AUTO, manual focusing resumes. To obtain the correct focus First, focus on a subject manually with the zoom set toward the “T” (telephoto) side, then adjust the zoom by pressing the “W” side of the lever gradually. When you shoot close to the subject Focus at the end of the “W” (wide-angle) position. 9 changes as follows: when recording a distant subject. when the subject is too close to focus on. 58
  • 59. Interval recording You can make a time-lapse recording by Example setting the camcorder to automatically record 1s 1s and standby sequentially. You can achieve an 9 min 59 s 9 min 59 s [a] [a] excellent recording for flowering, emergence, etc., with this function. [b] [b] 10 min 10 min [a] Recording time [b]Waiting time (1) Press MENU to display the menu in standby mode. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. Advanced Recording Operations (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select INT. REC, then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select SET, then press the dial. (5) Set INTERVAL and REC TIME. 1 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select INTERVAL, then press the dial. 2 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired interval time, then press the dial. The time: 30SEC y 1MIN y 5MIN y 10MIN 3 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select REC TIME, then press the dial. 4 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired recording time, then press the dial. The time: 0.5SEC y 1SEC y 1.5SEC y 2SEC 5 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select RETURN, then press the dial twice. 1 MENU 5 1 CAMERA SET I NT. REC 2 CAMERA SET I NT. REC I NTERVAL 30SEC I NTERVAL 30SEC 2-4 REC T I ME RETURN REC T I ME RETURN 1M I N 5M I N 10M I N [MENU] : END [MENU] : END CAMERA SET D ZOOM 16 : 9W I DE STEADYSHOT 3 CAMERA SET I NT. REC 4 CAMERA SET I NT. REC FRAME REC I NTERVAL I NTERVAL I NT. REC REC T I ME 0 . 5SEC REC T I ME 0 . 5SEC RETURN RETURN 1SEC 1 . 5SEC 2SEC CAMERA SET D ZOOM [MENU] 16 : 9W I DE : END STEADYSHOT FRAME REC [MENU] : END [MENU] : END I NT. REC OFF RETURN CAMERA SET D ZOOM [MENU] 16 : 9W I DE : END STEADYSHOT FRAME REC I NT. REC ON RETURN OFF SET [MENU] : END 59
  • 60. Interval recording (6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial. (7) Press MENU to erase the menu display. The interval recording indicator flashes. (8) Press START/STOP to start interval recording. The interval recording indicator lights up. 8 POWER VCR (CHG) OFF CAMERA MEMORY 6 CAMERA SET D ZOOM 16 : 9W I DE STEADYSHOT FRAME REC I NT. REC ON RETURN 7 MENU I NTERVAL [MENU] : END To cancel the interval recording •Set INT. REC to OFF in the menu settings. •Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG), VCR or MEMORY. To stop the interval recording momentarily and perform normal recording Press START/STOP. You can perform normal recording only once. To cancel the normal recording, press START/STOP again. Note on interval recording You cannot do interval recording in memory mode. On recording time There may be a discrepancy in recording time of up to +/– 6 frames from the selected time. Even if you press INDEX MARK during interval recording You cannot mark an index. 60
  • 61. Frame by frame recording – Cut recording You can make a recording with a stop-motion animated effect using cut recording. To create this effect, alternately move the subject a little and make a cut recording. We recommend that you use a tripod, and operate the camcorder using the Remote Commander after step 6. (1) Press MENU to display the menu in standby mode. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select FRAME REC, then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial. (5) Press MENU to erase the menu display. The FRAME REC indicator lights up. (6) Press START/STOP to start cut recording. The camcorder makes a recording Advanced Recording Operations for about six frames, and returns to recording standby. (7) Move the subject, and repeat step 6. 1 MENU 6,7 POWER VCR (CHG) OFF CAMERA MEMORY 2-4 CAMERA SET D ZOOM 16 : 9W I DE STEADYSHOT FRAME REC I NT. REC CAMERA SET D ZOOM [MENU] 16 : 9W I DE : END STEADYSHOT 5 MENU FRAME REC FRAME REC OFF I NT. REC ON RETURN CAMERA SET D ZOOM [MENU] 16 : 9W I DE : END STEADYSHOT FRAME REC ON I NT. REC RETURN [MENU] : END To cancel the cut recording •Set FRAME REC to OFF in the menu settings. •Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG), VCR, or MEMORY. Notes on cut recording •The last recorded cut is longer than other cuts. •The proper remaining tape time is not indicated if you use this function continuously. •You cannot mark an index during cut recording. 61
  • 62. Marking an Index If you mark an index at the scene you want to search for, you can easily search for the scene later (p. 64). In recording mode [a]: Press INDEX MARK. The “INDEX MARK” indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder for seven seconds and the index is marked after the indicator disappears. In standby mode [b]: Press INDEX MARK. The “INDEX STBY” indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. And when you press START/STOP to start recording, the “INDEX MARK” indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder for seven seconds. The index is marked after the indicator disappears. The index signal is marked on the 11th frame from the recording start point (about 0.3 sec). You can mark an index in VCR mode (p. 88). [a] [b] STBY REC I NDEX STBY INDEX MARK I NDEX REC MARK I NDEX MARK To cancel index marking Press INDEX again in standby mode. Note on the index You cannot mark an index after recording. 62
  • 63. — Advanced Playback Operations — Quickly locating a scene using the zero set memory function Using the zero set memory function, your camcorder rewinds or advances the tape to locate the desired scene, and the searching automatically stops at the scene having a tape counter value of “0:00:00.” You can do this with the Remote Commander. (1) In playback mode, press DISPLAY if the counter is not on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (2) Press ZERO SET MEMORY at the point you want to locate later. The tape counter shows “0:00:00” and the ZERO SET MEMORY indicator flashes. (3) Press x when you want to stop playback. (4) Press m to rewind the tape to the tape counter’s zero point. The tape stops automatically when the tape counter reaches approximately zero. The ZERO SET MEMORY indicator disappears and the time code appears. (5) Press N. Playback starts. Advanced Playback Operations ZERO SET MEMORY DISPLAY m N x Notes •When you press ZERO SET MEMORY again before rewinding the tape, the zero set memory function will be canceled. •There may be a discrepancy of several seconds from the time code. When there is a blank portion between pictures on a tape The zero set memory function may not work. ZERO SET MEMORY functions also in standby mode When you insert a scene in the middle of a recorded tape, press ZERO SET MEMORY at the point you want to end the insertion. Rewind the tape to the insert start point, and start recording. Recording stops automatically at the tape counter zero point. Your camcorder returns to standby mode. 63
  • 64. Searching for a recording by index – Index search You can automatically search for the point where an index is marked and start playback from that point (Index search). Use a tape with cassette memory for convenience. Use the Remote Commander for this operation. Use this function to check where indexes are marked or to edit the tape at each sequence where the index is marked. Searching for the index point using cassette memory You can use this function only when playing back a tape with cassette memory (p. 143). (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2) Set CM SEARCH in to ON in the menu settings (p. 107). The default setting is ON. (3) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly, until the index search indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows: INDEX SEARCH t TITLE SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH t PHOTO SCAN t no indicator (4) Press . or > on the Remote Commander to select the index point for playback. Your camcorder automatically starts playing back at the selected index point. 1 POWER 3 SEARCH INDEX SEARCH 1 2 SEP / SEP / 5 6 / / CH 00 5:30PM CAM 00 8:50AM LINE VCR MODE 3 DEC / 24 / 00 10:30AM CAM 4 JAN / 1 / 01 11:25PM CAM 5 FEB / 11 / 01 4:11PM CAM (CHG) OFF CAMERA 6 APR / 29 / 01 1:45PM CAM MEMORY 4 INDEX SEARCH 1 2 SEP / 5 / 00 5:30PM CAM CH SEP / 6 / 00 8:50AM LINE 3 DEC / 24 / 00 10:30AM CAM 4 JAN / 1 / 01 11:25PM CAM 5 FEB / 11 / 01 4:11PM CAM 6 APR / 29 / 01 1:45PM CAM To stop searching Press x. 64
  • 65. Searching for a recording by index – Index search In the mark •The bar in the mark indicates the present point on the tape. •The mark in the indicates the actual point you are trying to search for. If a tape has a blank portion between recorded portions The index search function may not work correctly. If you mark an index onto an external input signal “LINE” appears in the CH column. Searching for the index point without using cassette memory (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR. Advanced Playback Operations (2) Set CM SEARCH in to OFF in the menu settings (p. 107). If using a tape without cassette memory, skip this step. (3) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly, until the index search indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows: INDEX SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH t PHOTO SCAN t no indicator (4) Press . on the Remote Commander to search for the previous index point or press > on the Remote Commander to search for the next index point. Your camcorder automatically starts playback at the selected index point. Each time you press . or >, your camcorder searches for the previous or next index point. To stop searching Press x. 65
  • 66. Searching the boundaries of recorded tape by title – Title search If you use a tape with cassette memory, you can search for the boundaries of recorded tape by title (Title search) (p. 143). Use the Remote Commander for this operation. (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2) Set CM SEARCH in to ON in the menu settings (p. 107). The default setting is ON. (3) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly, until the title search indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows: INDEX SEARCH t TITLE SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH t PHOTO SCAN t no indicator (4) Press . or > on the Remote Commander to select the title for playback. Your camcorder automatically starts playback of the scene having the title that you selected. 1 POWER 3 SEARCH TITLE SEARCH 1 2 HELLO! CONGRATULATIONS! VCR MODE 3 HAPPY NEW YEAR! 4 PRESENT 5 GOOD MORNING (CHG) OFF CAMERA 6 WEDDING MEMORY 4 TITLE SEARCH 3 4 HAPPY NEW YEAR! PRESENT 5 GOOD MORNING 6 WEDDING 7 NIGHT 8 BASEBALL To stop searching Press x. If you use a tape without cassette memory You cannot superimpose or search for a title. In the mark •The bar in the mark indicates the present point on the tape. •The mark in the indicates the actual point you are trying to search for. If a tape has a blank portion between recorded portions The title search function may not work correctly. 66
  • 67. Searching a recording by date – Date search You can automatically search for the point where the recording date changes and start playback from that point (Date search). Use a tape with cassette memory for convenience. Use the Remote Commander for this operation. Use this function to check where recording dates change or to edit the tape at each recording date. Searching for the date using cassette memory You can use this function only when playing back a tape with cassette memory (p. 143). (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2) Set CM SEARCH in to ON in the menu settings (p. 107). The default setting is ON. Advanced Playback Operations (3) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly, until the date search indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows: INDEX SEARCH t TITLE SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH t PHOTO SCAN t no indicator (4) Press . or > on the Remote Commander to select the date for playback. Your camcorder automatically starts playback at the beginning of the selected date. 1 POWER 3 SEARCH DATE SEARCH 1 2 SEP / 5 / 00 SEP / 6 / 00 VCR MODE 3 DEC / 24 / 00 4 JAN / 1 / 01 5 FEB / 11 / 01 (CHG) OFF CAMERA 6 APR / 29 / 01 MEMORY 4 DATE SEARCH 1 2 SEP / 5 / 00 SEP / 6 / 00 3 DEC / 24 / 00 4 JAN / 1 / 01 5 FEB / 11 / 01 6 APR / 29 / 01 To stop searching Press x. 67
  • 68. Searching a recording by date – Date search Note If one day’s recording is less than two minutes, your camcorder may not accurately find the point where the recording date changes. In the mark •The bar in the mark indicates the present point on the tape. •The mark in the indicates the actual point you are trying to search. If a tape has a blank portion between recorded portions The date search function may not work correctly. Searching for the date without using cassette memory (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2) Set CM SEARCH in to OFF in the menu settings (p. 107). If using a tape without cassette memory, skip this step. (3) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly, until the date search indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows: INDEX SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH t PHOTO SCAN t no indicator (4) Press . on the Remote Commander to search for the previous date or press > on the Remote Commander to search for the next date. Your camcorder automatically starts playback at the point where the date changes. Each time you press . or >, your camcorder searches for the previous or next date. To stop searching Press x. 68
  • 69. Searching for a photo – Photo search/ Photo scan You can search for a still picture you have recorded on a mini DV tape (photo search). You can also search for still pictures one after another and display each picture for five seconds automatically regardless of cassette memory (photo scan). Use the Remote Commander for these operations. Use this function to check or edit still pictures. Searching for a photo using cassette memory You can use this function only when playing back a tape with cassette memory (p. 143). (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2) Set CM SEARCH in to ON in the menu settings (p. 107). Default setting is ON. (3) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly, until the photo Advanced Playback Operations search indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows: INDEX SEARCH t TITLE SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH t PHOTO SCAN t no indicator (4) Press . or > on the Remote Commander to select the date for playback. Your camcorder automatically starts playback of the photo having the date that you selected. 1 POWER 3 SEARCH PHOTO SEARCH 1 2 SEP / 5 SEP / 6 / / 00 5 : 30 PM 00 8 : 50 AM VCR MODE 3 DEC / 24 / 00 1 0 : 30 AM 4 JAN / 1 / 01 11 : 25 PM 5 FEB / 11 / 01 4 : 11 PM (CHG) OFF CAMERA 6 APR / 29 / 01 1 : 45 PM MEMORY 4 PHOTO SEARCH 1 2 SEP / 5 SEP / 6 / / 00 5 : 30 PM 00 8 : 50 AM 3 DEC / 24 / 00 1 0 : 30 AM 4 JAN / 1 / 01 11 : 25 PM 5 FEB / 11 / 01 4 : 11 PM 6 APR / 29 / 01 1 : 45 PM To stop searching Press x. In the mark •The bar in the mark indicates the present point on the tape. •The mark in the indicates the actual point you are trying to search for. If a tape has a blank portion between recorded portions The photo search function may not work correctly. 69
  • 70. Searching for a photo – Photo search/Photo scan Searching for a photo without using cassette memory (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2) Set CM SEARCH in to OFF in the menu settings (p. 107). (3) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly, until the photo search indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows: INDEX SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH t PHOTO SCAN t no indicator (4) Press . or > on the Remote Commander to select a photo for playback. Each time you press . or >, your camcorder searches for the previous or next photo. Your camcorder automatically starts playback of the photo. To stop searching Press x. Scanning photo (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly, until the photo scan indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows: INDEX SEARCH t TITLE SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH t PHOTO SCAN t no indicator (3) Press . or > on the Remote Commander. Each photo is played back for about five seconds automatically. 1 POWER 2 SEARCH VCR MODE PHOTO 00 SCAN (CHG) OFF CAMERA MEMORY 3 To stop scanning Press x. 70
  • 71. Playing back a tape with picture effects During playback, you can process a scene using the picture effect functions: NEG. ART, SEPIA, B&W and SOLARIZE. In playback or playback pause mode, press PICTURE EFFECT and turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial until the desired picture effect indicator (NEG. ART, SEPIA, B&W or SOLARIZE) appears. For details of each picture effect function, see page 39. PICTURE EFFECT Advanced Playback Operations To cancel the picture effect function Press PICTURE EFFECT so that the indicator disappears. Notes •You cannot process a picture using the picture effect function that is input from other equipment. •To record pictures that you have processed using the picture effect function, record the pictures on the VCR, using your camcorder as a player. Pictures processed by the picture effect function Pictures processed by the picture effect function are not output through the DV IN/ OUT jack. When you set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) or stop playing back The picture effect function will be automatically canceled. 71
  • 72. Playing back a tape with digital effects During playback, you can process a scene using the digital effect functions: STILL, FLASH, LUMI. and TRAIL. (1) In playback or playback pause mode, press DIGITAL EFFECT and turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial until the desired digital effect indicator (STILL, FLASH, LUMI. or TRAIL) flashes. (2) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. The digital effect indicator lights up and the bars appear. In STILL or LUMI. mode, the picture is captured and is stored in memory as a still picture at the time you press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the effect. For details of each digital effect function, see page 40. 2 STILL 1 DIGITAL EFFECT 3 STILL To cancel the digital effect function Press DIGITAL EFFECT so that the indicator disappears. Notes •You cannot process a picture using the digital effect function that is input from other equipment. •To record pictures that you have processed using the digital effect function, record the pictures on the VCR, using your camcorder as a player. Pictures processed by the digital effect function Pictures processed by the digital effect function are not output through the DV IN/ OUT jack. When you set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) or stop playing back The digital effect function will be automatically canceled. 72
  • 73. — Editing — Dubbing a tape Using the A/V connecting cable Connect your camcorder to the VCR using the A/V connecting cable supplied with your camcorder. Before a dubbing Set DISPLAY to LCD in the menu settings. (Default setting is LCD.) Set the input selector on the VCR to LINE, if available. (1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to record over) into the VCR, and insert the recorded tape into your camcorder. (2) Set the input selector on the VCR to LINE. For details, refer to the operating instructions of the VCR. (3) Set the POWER switch to VCR. (4) Play back the recorded tape on your camcorder. (5) Start recording on the VCR. For details, refer to the operating instructions of Editing the VCR. S VIDEO (not supplied) IN S VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L/R AUDIO : Signal flow When you have finished dubbing the tape Press x on both your camcorder and the VCR. Be sure to clear the indicators from the screen If they are displayed, press the following buttons so as not to record the indicators on the dubbed tape: •The DISPLAY button •The DATA CODE button •The SEARCH MODE button on the Remote Commander You can edit on VCRs that support the following systems 8 mm, Hi8, Digital8, VHS, S-VHS, VHSC, S-VHSC, Betamax, ED Betamax, mini DV or DV If your VCR is a monaural type Connect the yellow plug of the A/V connecting cable to the video input jack and the white plug to the audio input jack on the VCR or the TV. The red plugs are not used. 73
  • 74. Dubbing a tape Connect using an S video cable (not supplied) to obtain high-quality pictures With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/V connecting cable. Connect the S video cable (not supplied) to the S video jacks on both your camcorder and the TV or the VCR. This connection produces higher quality DV format pictures. If you use a LANC cable You can edit precisely by connecting a LANC cable (not supplied) to this camcorder and other video equipment having a fine synchro-editing function, using this camcorder as a player. Using an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) Simply connect the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (not supplied) to DV IN/OUT and to DV IN/OUT of the DV products. With a digital-to-digital connection, video and audio signals are transmitted in digital form for high-quality editing. You cannot dub the titles, display indicators or the contents of cassette memory. (1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to record over) into the VCR, and insert the recorded tape into your camcorder. (2) Set the input selector on the VCR to the DV input position if the VCR is equipped with an input selector. For details, refer to the operating instructions of the VCR. (3) Set the POWER switch to VCR. (4) Play back the recorded tape on your camcorder. (5) Start recording on the VCR. DV IN/OUT DV S VIDEO LANC DV IN/OUT (not supplied) : Signal flow When you have finished dubbing a tape Press x on both your camcorder and the VCR. You can connect one VCR only using the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) Pictures processed by the digital effect or picture effect function Pictures processed by the digital effect or picture effect function are not output through the DV IN/OUT jack. If you record a playback pause picture with the DV IN/OUT jack The recorded picture becomes rough. And when you play back the picture using other 74 video equipment, the picture may jitter.
  • 75. Dubbing only desired scenes – Digital program editing You can duplicate selected scenes (programs) for editing onto a tape without operating the VCR. Scenes can be selected by frame. [a] [a] [b] Editing [a] Undesired frame [b]Moves the scene Before operating the digital program editing Preparation 1 Connecting the VCR (p. 73, 74). Preparation 2 Setting the VCR to operate by infrared rays emitter (p. 76)/Setting the VCR to operate with an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (p. 80). Preparation 3 Adjusting the synchronization of the VCR (p. 81). When you dub using the same VCR again, you can skip Preparations 2 and 3. Using the digital program editing function Operation 1 Making programs (p. 83). Operation 2 Performing a digital program editing (Dubbing a tape) (p. 85). Notes •You cannot dub the titles, display indicators, or the contents of cassette memory. •When you connect with an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable), you may not be able to operate the dubbing function correctly, depending on the VCR. Set CONTROL to IR in the menu settings of your camcorder. •You cannot send the control signal of the digital program editing through the (LANC) jack. If you connect using an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) With digital-to-digital connection, video and audio signals are transmitted in digital form for high-quality editing. Preparation 1: Connecting the VCR Connect your camcorder and the VCR as shown on pages 73 and 74. You can use an A/V connecting cable, or an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable). 75
  • 76. Dubbing only desired scenes – Digital program editing Preparation 2: Setting the VCR to operate by infrared rays emitter To edit using the VCR, send the control signal by infrared ray to the remote sensor on the VCR. When you connect using the A/V cable, this procedure is required. (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder. (2) Turn the power of the connected VCR on, then set the input selector to LINE. When you connect a video camera recorder, set its POWER switch to VCR. (3) Press MENU to display the menu. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EDIT SET, then press the dial. (6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select CONTROL, then press the dial. (7) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select IR, then press the dial. Set the IR SETUP code (8) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select IR SETUP, then press the dial. (9) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the IR SETUP code of your VCR, then press the dial. See “About the IR SETUP code ” on the next page. 1 POWER VCR (CHG) OFF CAMERA MEMORY 3 MENU 4 6-9 OTHERS BEEP MELODY COMMANDER D I SPLAY V I DEO ED I T ED I T SET RETURN OTHERS OTHERS ED I T SET ED I T SET CONTROL IR CONTROL IR ADJ TEST i . L I NK ADJ TEST “CUT–I N” “CUT–I N” [MENU] : END “CUT–OUT” “CUT–OUT” I R SETUP I R SETUP PAUSEMODE PAUSEMODE I R TEST I R TEST RETURN RETURN 5 OTHERS [MENU] : END [MENU] : END ED I T SET OTHERS OTHERS CONTROL IR ED I T SET ED I T SET ADJ TEST CONTROL CONTROL “CUT–I N” ADJ TEST ADJ TEST “CUT–OUT” “CUT–I N” “CUT–I N” I R SETUP “CUT–OUT” “CUT–OUT” PAUSEMODE I R SETUP 1 I R SETUP 3 I R TEST PAUSEMODE PAUSEMODE RETURN I R TEST I R TEST RETURN RETURN [MENU] : END [MENU] : END [MENU] : END 76
  • 77. Dubbing only desired scenes – Digital program editing About the IR SETUP code The IR SETUP code is stored in the memory of your camcorder. Be sure to set the correct code, depending on your VCR. Code number 1 is the default setting. Brand Remote control code Brand Remote control code Sony 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 Nokia 89, 36 Aiwa 53 Nokia Oceanic 89 Akai 62, 50, 74 Nordmende 76, 100 Alba 73 Okano 60, 62, 63 Baird 36, 30 Orion 70, 58* Blaupunkt 83, 78 Panasonic 16, 78, 96 Bush 74 Philips 83, 84, 86 Editing Canon 97 Phonola 83, 84 CGM 47, 83, 36 Roadstar 47 Clatronic 73 SABA 76, 21 Daewoo 26 Samsung 93, 94, 52, 22 Ferguson 76 Sanyo 36 Fisher 73 Schneider 84, 10 Funai 80 SEG 73 Goldstar 47 Seleco 47, 74 Goodmans 26, 84 Sharp 89 Grundig 83, 09 Siemens 10, 36 Hitachi 42, 56 Tandberg 26 ITT/Nikia 36 Telefunken 91, 92 Instant Thomson 76 JVC 12, 21, 15, 11 Thorn 36, 47 Kendo 47 Toshiba 40 Loewe 16, 47, 84 Universum 92, 70, 47 Luxor 89 W. W. House 47 Mark 26* Watson 83, 58 Matsui 47, 60, 58* * TV/VCR component Mitsubishi 28, 29 Note on remote control code You cannot do assemble editing with some VCRs (for recording) if the remote control code does not correspond to this camcorder (for playback). 77
  • 78. Dubbing only desired scenes – Digital program editing Setting the buttons to cancel the recording pause on the VCR (1) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select PAUSEMODE, then press the dial. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the button to cancel recording pause on the VCR, then press the dial. The correct button depends on your VCR. Refer to the operating instructions of your VCR. 1,2 OTHERS OTHERS ED I T SET ED I T SET CONTROL CONTROL ADJ TEST ADJ TEST “CUT–I N” “CUT–I N” “CUT–OUT” “CUT–OUT” I R SETUP I R SETUP PAUSEMODE PAUSE PAUSEMODE PAUSE I R TEST REC I R TEST RETURN PB RETURN [MENU] : END [MENU] : END The buttons to cancel recording pause on the VCR The buttons vary depending on your VCR. To cancel recording pause: • Select PAUSE if the button to cancel recording pause is X. • Select REC if the button to cancel recording pause is z. • Select PB if the button to cancel recording pause is B. Setting your camcorder and the VCR to face each other Locate the infrared ray emitter of your camcorder and face it towards the remote sensor of the VCR. Set the devices about 30 cm (about 11 7/8 in) apart, and remove any obstacles between the devices. Remote sensor 78
  • 79. Dubbing only desired scenes – Digital program editing Confirming the VCR operation (1) Insert a recordable tape into the VCR, then set it to recording pause. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select IR TEST, then press the dial. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial. If the VCR starts recording, the setting is correct. When finished, the indicator changes to COMPLETE. 2,3 Editing OTHERS OTHERS ED I T SET ED I T SET CONTROL CONTROL ADJ TEST ADJ TEST “CUT–I N” “CUT–I N” “CUT–OUT” ENGAGE “CUT–OUT” I R SETUP REC PAUSE I R SETUP PAUSEMODE PAUSEMODE I R TEST RETURN I R TEST COMPLETE RETURN EXECUTE RETURN [MENU] : END [MENU] : END When the VCR does not operate correctly Set the IR SETUP code, or select the button to cancel the recording pause on the VCR. 79
  • 80. Dubbing only desired scenes – Digital program editing Preparation 2: Setting the VCR to operate with an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) When you connect using an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (not supplied), follow the procedures below. (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder. (2) Turn the power of the connected VCR on, then set the input selector to DV input. When you connect a video camera recorder, set its POWER switch to VCR. (3) Press MENU to display the menu. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EDIT SET, then press the dial. (6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select CONTROL, then press the dial. (7) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select i.LINK, then press the dial. 1 POWER VCR (CHG) OFF CAMERA MEMORY 3 MENU 4,5 6,7 OTHERS BEEP MELODY COMMANDER D I SPLAY V I DEO ED I T OTHERS OTHERS ED I T SET ED I T SET ED I T SET RETURN CONTROL IR CONTROL IR ADJ TEST ADJ TEST i . L I NK “CUT–I N” “CUT–I N” “CUT–OUT” “CUT–OUT” I R SETUP I R SETUP [MENU] : END PAUSEMODE PAUSEMODE I R TEST I R TEST RETURN RETURN [MENU] : END [MENU] : END OTHERS ED I T SET OTHERS OTHERS CONTROL IR ED I T SET ED I T SET ADJ TEST CONTROL IR CONTROL i . L I NK “CUT–I N” ADJ TEST i . L I NK ADJ TEST “CUT–OUT” “CUT–I N” “CUT–I N” I R SETUP “CUT–OUT” “CUT–OUT” PAUSEMODE I R SETUP I R SETUP I R TEST PAUSEMODE PAUSEMODE RETURN I R TEST I R TEST RETURN RETURN [MENU] : END [MENU] : END [MENU] : END 80
  • 81. Dubbing only desired scenes – Digital program editing Preparation 3: Adjusting the synchronization of the VCR You can adjust the synchronization of your camcorder and the VCR. Remove the cassette from the camcorder beforehand. We recommend that you prepare a pen and paper for notes. When you connect to a Sony VCR using an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable), and have set CONTROL to i.LINK, the setup below is not necessary. (1) Insert a recordable tape into the VCR, then set it to recording pause. When you connect using an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) and have set CONTROL to i.LINK, you do not have to turn the recording VCR to recording pause mode. (2) Set the POWER switch to VCR. (3) Press MENU to display the menu. Editing (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EDIT SET, then press the dial. (6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ADJ TEST, then press the dial. (7) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial. CUT-IN and CUT-OUT are recorded on an image for five times each to calculate the numerical values for adjusting the synchronization. The EXECUTING indicator flashes on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. When finished, the indicator changes to COMPLETE. (8) Rewind the tape in the VCR, then start slow playback. Take a note of the opening numerical value of each CUT-IN and the closing numerical value of each CUT-OUT. (9) Calculate the average of all the opening numerical values of each CUT-IN, and the average of all the closing numerical values of each CUT-OUT. 4-6 OTHERS ED I T SET CONTROL ADJ TEST RETURN “CUT–I N” EXECUTE “CUT–OUT” I R SETUP ENGAGE PAUSEMODE REC PAUSE I R TEST OTHERS RETURN ED I T SET CONTROL [MENU] : END ADJ TEST EXECUT I NG “CUT–I N” “CUT–OUT” No . 2 I R SETUP IN PAUSEMODE +215 I R TEST OTHERS RETURN ED I T SET [MENU] : CONTROL END ADJ TEST COMPLETE “CUT–I N” “CUT–OUT” 3 MENU I R SETUP PAUSEMODE I R TEST RETURN [MENU] : END 81
  • 82. Dubbing only desired scenes – Digital program editing (10) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select “CUT-IN,” then press the dial. (11) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the average numerical value of CUT-IN, then press the dial. The calculated start position for recording is set. (12) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select “CUT-OUT,” then press the dial. (13) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the average numerical value of CUT-OUT, then press the dial. The calculated stop position for recording is set. (14) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select RETURN, then press the dial. 10,11 OTHERS OTHERS ED I T SET ED I T SET CONTROL CONTROL ADJ TEST ADJ TEST “CUT–I N” 0 “CUT–I N” 0 “CUT–OUT” “CUT–OUT” I R SETUP I R SETUP PAUSEMODE PAUSEMODE I R TEST I R TEST RETURN RETURN [MENU] : END [MENU] : END 12,13 OTHERS OTHERS ED I T SET ED I T SET CONTROL CONTROL ADJ TEST ADJ TEST “CUT–I N” “CUT–I N” “CUT–OUT” 0 “CUT–OUT” 0 I R SETUP I R SETUP PAUSEMODE PAUSEMODE I R TEST I R TEST RETURN RETURN [MENU] : END [MENU] : END Errors in editing If you connect your camcorder to Sony equipment with the DV jack, the range of errors is within +/– 5 frames. The range may become wider in the following conditions: •The interval between CUT-IN and CUT-OUT is less than five seconds (p. 83). •CUT-IN or CUT-OUT is set at the beginning of the tape. When “ENGAGE REC PAUSE” appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder Turn the recording VCR to recording pause mode. Note If you start recording from the very beginning of the tape, the first few seconds of the tape may not record properly. Be sure to allow about 10 seconds’ lead before starting the recording. 82
  • 83. Dubbing only desired scenes – Digital program editing If the VCR does not operate correctly Make sure the IR SETUP code is correct; reset if necessary. When the operations of the VCR do not work with an i.LINK cable Keep the i.LINK connection, and carry out Preparation 2 (p. 76) again. The audio and video signals are sent as digital signals. Operation 1: Making Programs (1) Insert the tape for playback into your camcorder, and insert a tape for recording into the VCR. (2) Press MENU to display the menu. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. Editing (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select VIDEO EDIT, then press the dial. (5) Search for the beginning of the first scene you want to insert using the video control buttons, then pause playback (p. 29). 5 2 MENU STOP REW PLAY FF PAUSE 3,4 OTHERS V I DEO ED I T 0:32:30:14 BEEP MELODY MARK 1 IN COMMANDER UNDO D I SPLAY ERASE ALL V I DEO ED I T START ED I T SET RETURN TOTAL 0:00:00:00 SCENE 0 [MENU] : END [MENU] : END 83
  • 84. Dubbing only desired scenes – Digital program editing (6) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial, or MARK on the Remote Commander. The CUT-IN point of the first program is set, and the top part of the program mark changes to light blue. (7) Search for the end of the first scene you want to insert using the video operating buttons, then pause playback (p. 29). (8) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial, or MARK on the Remote Commander. The CUT-OUT point of the first program is set, then the bottom part of the program mark changes to light blue. (9) Repeat steps 5 to 8, then set the program. When the program is set, the program mark changes to light blue. You can set a maximum of 20 programs. 7 6 V I DEO ED I T MARK UNDO ERASE ALL 0:08:55:06 1 OUT STOP REW PLAY FF PAUSE START TOTAL 0:00:00:00 SCENE 0 [MENU] : END 8,9 V I DEO ED I T 0:09:07:06 V I DEO ED I T 0:10:01:23 MARK 2 IN MARK 4 IN UNDO UNDO ERASE ALL ERASE ALL START START TOTAL 0:00:12:13 TOTAL 0:00:47:12 SCENE 1 SCENE 3 [MENU] : END [MENU] : END On a blank portion of the tape You cannot set CUT-IN or CUT-OUT on a blank portion of the tape. Note The total time of the programs is indicated on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder, however, if the time code on the tape is not continuous, the time may not be indicated properly. Erasing the last program To change the end of the last program, delete the CUT-OUT mark. To erase the whole program, delete both the CUT-IN and CUT-OUT marks. (1) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select UNDO, then press the dial. The last set program mark flashes. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial and the setting is canceled. To cancel erasing Select RETURN in step 2, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. Erasing all programs (1) Select VIDEO EDIT in the menu settings. Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ERASE ALL, then press the dial. All the program marks flash. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial and the 84 settings are canceled.
  • 85. Dubbing only desired scenes – Digital program editing To cancel erasing all programs Select RETURN in step 2, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. To cancel a program you have set Press MENU. The program is stored in memory until the tape is ejected. Operation 2: Performing a digital program editing (Dubbing a tape) Make sure your camcorder and VCR are connected, and that the VCR is set to recording pause. When you use an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable), you do not have to set the VCR to recording pause. When you use a video camera recorder, set its POWER switch to VCR. Editing (1) Select VIDEO EDIT. Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select START, then press the dial. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial. The camcorder automatically searches for the beginning of the first program, then starts dubbing. The EXECUTING indicator flashes. The SEARCH indicator appears during search, and the EDIT indicator appears during edit on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. The program marks light up after dubbing is complete. When the dubbing ends, your camcorder and the VCR automatically stop. To stop dubbing Press x on this camcorder or on the Remote Commander. To end the digital program editing function Your camcorder stops when the dubbing is complete. Then the display returns to VIDEO EDIT in the menu settings. Press MENU to end the digital program editing function. When the operations of the VCR do not work with an i.LINK cable Keep the i.LINK connection, and carry out Preparation 2 (p. 76) again. You cannot record on the VCR when: • The cassette is not inserted. • The tape has run out. • The write-protect tab is set to the protect position. • The IR SETUP code is not correct. (When IR is selected.) • The setup to cancel recording pause is not correct (p. 78). (When IR is selected.) NOT READY appears on the LCD screen when: • The program to operate the digital program edit has not been made. • i.LINK is selected but an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) is not connected. (When i.LINK is selected.) • The power of the connected VCR is not turned on. 85
  • 86. Using with an analog video unit and a PC – Signal convert function You can convert the analog input signal to the digital signal and output it from the DV IN/OUT jack on this camcorder. You can capture images and sound from an analog video unit connecting a PC which has the i.LINK (DV) jack to your camcorder. S VIDEO (not supplied) OUT S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO DV connecting cable (not supplied) : Signal flow (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2) Press MENU to display the menu. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select A/V t DV OUT, then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial. (6) Press MENU to erase the menu display. (7) Start playback on the analog video unit slightly ahead of the point from which you want to start capturing images. (8) Start capturing procedures on your PC. The operation procedures depend on your PC and the software which you use. For details on how to capture images, refer to the instruction manual of your PC and your software. After capturing images and sound Stop capturing procedures on your PC, and stop the playback on the analog video unit. Notes •When you edit the captured image and sound from the analog video unit by a PC, you need to install an appropriate software which can exchange video signals between the camcorder and a PC. •Depending on the condition of the analog video signals, the PC may not be able to output the images correctly when you convert analog video signals into digital video signals via your camcorder. Depending on the analog video unit, the image may contain noise or incorrect colors. •The camcorder cannot output the digital signal when you input the analog signal that includes a copyright protection signal. 86
  • 87. Recording video or TV programs Using the A/V connecting cable You can record a tape from another VCR or a TV program from a TV that has video/ audio outputs. Use your camcorder as a recorder. (1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to record over) into your camcorder. If you want to record a tape from the VCR, insert a recorded tape into the VCR. (2) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder. (3) Set DISPLAY in to LCD in the menu settings (p. 107). (4) Press MENU to erase the menu display. (5) Press z REC and the button on its right simultaneously on your camcorder, then immediately press X on your camcorder. (6) Press N on the VCR to start playback if you record a tape from a VCR. Select a TV program if you record from a TV. The picture from a TV or VCR appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (7) Press X on your camcorder at the scene from which you want to start Editing recording. 5 REC PAUSE S VIDEO (not supplied) OUT S VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L/R AUDIO : Signal flow When you have finished recording Press x on both your camcorder and the VCR. Using the Remote Commander In step 5, press z REC and MARK simultaneously, then immediately press X. And in step 7, press X at the scene from which you want to start recording. 87
  • 88. Recording video or TV programs If your VCR is a monaural type Connect the yellow plug of the A/V connecting cable to the video output jack and the white plug to the audio output jack on the VCR or the TV. The red plugs are not used. Connect using an S video cable (not supplied) to obtain high-quality pictures With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/V connecting cable. Connect an S video cable (not supplied) to the S video jacks of both your camcorder and the VCR. This connection produces higher quality DV format pictures. If you do various playbacks on the VCR during recording The recorded picture may be blurred. On the commander mode Your camcorder works in the commander mode, VTR 2. Commander modes 1, 2 and 3 are used to distinguish your camcorder from other Sony VCRs to avoid remote control misoperation. If you use another Sony VCR in the commander mode VTR 2, we recommend changing the commander mode or covering the sensor of the VCR with black paper. On index signal The index is automatically marked on a tape when you start recording. If you mark the index using the INDEX MARK button during recording, “LINE” appears in the CH column on the INDEX SEARCH screen, and the index is recorded on cassette memory. 88
  • 89. Recording video or TV programs Using an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) Simply connect the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (not supplied) to DV IN/OUT and to DV IN/OUT of the DV products. With digital-to-digital connection, video and audio signals are transmitted in digital form for high-quality editing. (1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to record over) into your camcorder, and insert the recorded tape into the VCR. (2) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder. (3) Set DISPLAY in to LCD in the menu settings (p. 107). (4) Press MENU to erase the menu display. (5) Press z REC and the button on its right simultaneously on your camcorder, then immediately press X on your camcorder. (6) Press N on the VCR to start playback. The picture to be recorded appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (7) Press X on your camcorder at the scene from which you want to start Editing recording. 5 REC PAUSE DV IN/OUT DV S VIDEO LANC DV IN/OUT (not supplied) : Signal flow When you have finished recording Press x on both your camcorder and the VCR. Using the Remote Commander In step 5, press z REC and MARK simultaneously, then immediately press X. And in step 7, press X at the scene from which you want to start recording. 89
  • 90. Recording video or TV programs You can connect only one VCR using the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) When you dub a picture in digital form The color of the display may be uneven. However this does not affect the dubbed picture. If you record a still picture in playback pause mode via the DV IN/OUT jack The recorded picture becomes rough. And when you play back the picture using your camcorder, the picture may jitter. Before recording Press DISPLAY and make sure that the DV IN indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. The DV IN indicator may appear on both pieces of equipment. 90
  • 91. Inserting a scene from a VCR – Insert editing You can insert a new scene from a VCR onto your originally recorded tape by specifying the insert start and end points. Use the Remote Commander for this operation. Connections are the same as on page 73 or 86. Insert a cassette containing the desired scene into the VCR. [a] [A] [b] [c] [B] Editing [C] [A]: The tape that contains the scene to be superimposed [B]: The tape to be edited [C]: The tape after editing (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder. (2) On the VCR, locate a point just before the insert start point [a], then press X to set the VCR to the playback pause mode. (3) On your camcorder, locate the insert end point [c] by pressing m or M. Then press X to set it to the playback pause mode. (4) Press ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote Commander. The ZERO SET MEMORY indicator flashes and the end point of the insert is stored in memory. The tape counter shows “0:00:00.” If the tape counter does not appear, press DISPLAY. (5) On your camcorder, locate the insert start point [b] by pressing m, then press z REC and the button on its right simultaneously, then immediately press X on your camcorder. (6) First press X on the VCR, and after a few seconds press X on your camcorder to start inserting the new scene. Inserting automatically stops near the zero point on the tape counter. Your camcorder automatically returns to the recording pause mode. 4 0:00:00 ZERO SET ZERO SET MEMORY MEMORY 5 REC PAUSE 91
  • 92. Inserting a scene from a VCR – Insert editing To change the insert end point Press ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote Commander again after step 5 to erase the ZERO SET MEMORY indicator and begin from step 3. Using the Remote Commander In step 5, press zREC and MARK simultaneously, then immediately press X. And in step 6, press X at the scene from which you want to start recording. Note The picture and sound recorded on the portion between the insert start and end points will be erased when you insert the new scene. If you insert scenes on the tape recorded with an other camcorder (including an other DCR-VX2000) The picture and sound may be distorted. We recommend that you insert scenes on a tape recorded with your camcorder. When the inserted picture is played back The picture and sound may be distorted at the end of the inserted portion. This is not a malfunction. The picture and sound at the start point and the end point may be distorted in the LP mode. To insert a scene without setting the insert end point Skip steps 3 and 4. Press x when you want to stop inserting. 92
  • 93. Audio dubbing You can record an audio sound to add to the original sound on a tape by connecting audio equipment or a microphone. If you connect audio equipment, you can add sound to your recorded tape by specifying the starting and ending points. The original sound will not be erased. You can also use the Remote Commander for this operation. Connecting the microphone with the MIC jack MIC (PLUG IN POWER) MIC LINE Set the MIC/LINE switch to MIC. Editing : Signal flow Microphone (not supplied) You can check the picture on TV by connecting with the video jack. You cannot monitor the additional sound by the speaker. Use the headphone jack. Connecting the audio equipment with the MIC jack MIC LINE Audio equipment (not supplied) Set the MIC/LINE switch to LINE. MIC (PLUG IN LINE OUT POWER) L R : Signal flow 93
  • 94. Audio dubbing Connecting the microphone with the intelligent accessory shoe Microphone (not supplied) We recommend that you use the gun microphone. If the microphone can select the zoom microphone type, set it to the gun microphone position. Dubbing with the AUDIO L/R jacks Audio equipment (not supplied) LINE OUT L R AUDIO L/R AUDIO L AUDIO R Do not connect the : Signal flow video (yellow) plug. Dubbing with the supplied microphone No connection is necessary. Notes • When dubbing with the built-in microphone or an external one, you can check the recorded picture on the LCD screen, in the viewfinder, or on the screen of equipment connected with the VIDEO jack, and you can check the recorded sound by using headphones. • When dubbing with the AUDIO L/R jacks, you can check the recorded picture on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder, and you can check the recorded sound by using a headphones. • You can check both the original sound and new sound that will be dubbed, with headphones. • You can adjust the balance of the new sound and original sound using AUDIO MIX in the menu settings. You can monitor the sound using headphones during audio dubbing. 94
  • 95. Audio dubbing Adding an audio sound on a recorded tape (1) Insert the recorded tape into your camcorder. (2) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder. (3) Locate the recording start point by pressing N. Then press X at the point where you want to start recording to set your camcorder to the playback pause mode. (4) Press AUDIO DUB. The green X indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (5) Press X and start playing back the audio you want to record at the same time. The new sound is recorded in stereo 2 (ST2) during playback. (6) Press x at the point where you want to stop recording. AUDIO DUB Editing POWER switch Monitoring the new recorded sound To play back the sound Adjust the balance between the original sound (ST1) and the new sound (ST2) by selecting AUDIO MIX in the menu settings (p. 107). VCR SET H i F i SOUND AUD I O M I X A/V DV OUT ST1 ST2 RETURN [MENU] : END If you wait five minutes after you disconnect the power source or remove the battery pack, the setting of AUDIO MIX returns to the original sound (ST1) only. The default setting is for original sound only. 95
  • 96. Audio dubbing Notes •New sound cannot be recorded on a tape already recorded in the 16-bit mode (p. 111). •New sound cannot be recorded on a tape already recorded in the LP mode. •You cannot add audio with the DV IN/OUT jack. If you make all the connections The audio input to be recorded will take precedence over others in the following order. •MIC (PLUG IN POWER) jack •Intelligent accessory shoe •AUDIO L/R jacks •Built-in microphone If an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (not supplied) is connected to your camcorder You cannot add sound to a recorded tape. If you set the write-protect tab of the tape to lock You cannot record on the tape. Slide the write-protect tab to release the write protection. We recommend that you add new sound on a tape recorded with your camcorder If you add new sound on a tape recorded with another camcorder (including an other DCR-VX2000), the sound quality may deteriorate. To add new sound more precisely Press ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote Commander at the point where you want to stop recording later in playback mode. Then, follow the procedure from step 3. Recording automatically stops at the point where ZERO SET MEMORY was pressed. On blank portions You cannot add an audio. You can adjust the recording level manually using the recording adjustment display in the following cases: – Dubbing with an optional external microphone or audio equipment through the MIC jack – Dubbing with an optional external microphone installed into the intelligent accessory shoe. – Dubbing with the internal microphone 96
  • 97. Superimposing a title If you use a tape with cassette memory, you can superimpose the title while recording or after recording. When you play back the tape, the title is displayed for five seconds from the point where you superimposed it. You can select one of eight preset titles and two custom titles (p. 101). You can also select the color, size and position of titles. VACATION (1) Press TITLE to display the title menu in standby, recording, playback, or playback pause mode. Editing (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired title, then press the dial. The title flashes. (4) Change the color, size, or position, if necessary. 1 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the COLOR, SIZE, or POSITION, then press the dial. The item appears. 2 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired item, then press the dial. 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 until the title is laid out as desired. 1 TITLE PRESET TITLE HELLO! HAPPY BIRTHDAY HAPPY HOLIDAYS CONGRATULATIONS! OUR SWEET BABY WEDDING VACATION THE END [T I TLE] : END 2 PRESET TITLE HELLO! HAPPY BIRTHDAY HAPPY HOLIDAYS CONGRATULATIONS! PRESET TITLE HELLO! HAPPY BIRTHDAY HAPPY HOLIDAYS CONGRATULATIONS! OUR SWEET BABY OUR SWEET BABY WEDDING WEDDING VACATION VACATION THE END THE END RETURN [T I TLE] : END [T I TLE] : END 3 PRESET TITLE HELLO! HAPPY BIRTHDAY HAPPY HOLIDAYS CONGRATULATIONS! TITLE OUR SWEET BABY VACATION WEDDING VACATION THE END RETURN [T I TLE] : END [EXEC] : SAVE [T I TLE] : END 4 SIZE SIZE SMALL LARGE TITLE VACATION VACATION [EXEC] : SAVE [T I TLE] : END 97
  • 98. Superimposing a title (5) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial again to complete the setting. In playback, playback pause, or recording mode: The “TITLE SAVE” indicator appears on the screen for five seconds and the title is set. In standby mode: The “TITLE” indicator appears. When you press START/STOP to start recording, “TITLE SAVE” appears on the screen for five seconds and the title is set. If you set the write-protect tab to lock You cannot superimpose or erase the title. Slide the write-protect tab to release the write protection. To use a custom title If you want to use the custom title, select in step 2. If the tape has a blank portion You cannot superimpose a title on that portion. If the tape has a blank portion in the middle of the recorded parts The title may not be displayed correctly. The titles superimposed with your camcorder •They are displayed only on the DV format video equipment with the index titler function. •The point you superimposed the title may be detected as an index signal when searching a recording with other video equipment. To not display titles Set TITLE DSPL to OFF in the menu settings (p. 107). 98
  • 99. Superimposing a title Title setting •The title color changes as follows: WHITE y YELLOW y VIOLET y RED y CYAN y GREEN y BLUE •The title size changes as follows: SMALL y LARGE You cannot input more than 12 characters in LARGE size. •If you select the title size “SMALL,” you have nine choices for the title position. If you select the title size “LARGE,” you have eight choices for the title position. If the “ FULL” mark appears The cassette memory is full. If you erase the title, index data, date data, photo data, or cassette label in the cassette, you can then superimpose a title. Editing 99
  • 100. Superimposing a title Erasing a title (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR or CAMERA. (2) Press MENU to display the menu. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select TITLEERASE, then press the dial. The title erase display appears. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the title you want to erase, then press the dial. The “ERASE OK ?” indicator appears. (6) Make sure the title is the one you want to erase, and turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select OK, then press the dial. “OK” changes to “EXECUTE.” (7) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. “ERASING” flashes for about two seconds and “COMPLETE” appears after erasing the title. 2 1 POWER VCR MENU (CHG) OFF CAMERA MEMORY 3-5 CM SET CM SEARCH TAPE T I TLE T I TLE DSPL 6,7 T I TLE ERASE 4 PRESENT ERASE OK ? RETURN T I TLEERASE OK I TEM ERASE ERASE ALL CM SET T I TLE ERASE CM SEARCH 4 PRESENT TAPE T I TLE [MENU] TEND DSPL : I TLE [MENU] ERASE OK ? : END RETURN T I TLEERASE EXECUTE I TEM ERASE ERASE ALL RETURN T I TLE ERASE CM SET CM SEARCH 1 HELLO ! TAPE T I TLE 2 CONGRATULAT I ONS ! [MENU] : END [MENU] TEND DSPL : I TLE 3 HAPPY NEW YEAR ! T I TLEERASE COMPLETE 4 PRESENT I TEM ERASE 5 GOOD MORN I NG ERASE ALL 6 WEDD I NG RETURN [MENU] : END [MENU] : END To cancel erasing Select RETURN in step 6 or 7, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. To erase all the titles See “Erasing the cassette memory data” on page 105. 100
  • 101. Making your own titles You can make up to two titles and store them in cassette memory. Each title can have up to 20 characters. (1) Press TITLE in the standby, playback, or playback pause mode. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select CUSTOM1 SET or CUSTOM2 SET, then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the column of the desired character, then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired character, then press the dial. (6) Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you have selected all characters and completed the title. (7) To finish making your own titles, turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select Editing [SET], then press the dial. The title is stored in memory. (8) Press TITLE to erase the title menu display. 1 2 TITLE SET CUSTOM1 SET TITLE SET CUSTOM1 SET CUSTOM2 SET CUSTOM2 SET TITLE RETURN [T I TLE] : END [T I TLE] : END PRESET TITLE HELLO! HAPPY BIRTHDAY HAPPY HOLIDAYS CONGRATULATIONS! OUR SWEET BABY 3 TITLE SET CUSTOM1 SET TITLE SET ––––––––––––––––––––– WEDDING CUSTOM2 SET VACATION RETURN THE END [T I TLE] : END [T I TLE] : END [T I TLE] : END 4-6 1 TITLE SET ––––––––––––––––––––– 2 TITLE SET ––––––––––––––––––––– [T I TLE] : END [T I TLE] : END 3 TITLE SET 4 TITLE SET ––––––––––––––––––––– S–––––––––––––––––––– [T I TLE] : END [T I TLE] : END 101
  • 102. Making your own titles To change a title you have stored In step 3, select CUSTOM1 SET or CUSTOM2 SET, depending on which title you want to change, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select [C], then press the dial to delete the title. The last character is erased. Enter a new title as desired. If you take five minutes or longer to enter characters in standby mode while a cassette is in your camcorder, the power automatically goes off The characters you have entered remain stored in memory. Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) once and then follow the procedure from step 7 again. We recommend setting the operation in playback or playback pause mode or removing the cassette so that your camcorder does not automatically turn off while you are entering title characters. To erase a character Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select [ C ], then press the dial. The last character is erased. To enter a space Select [ ], then select the blank part. 102
  • 103. Labeling a cassette If you use a tape with cassette memory, you can label a cassette. The label can consist of up to 10 characters and is stored in cassette memory. When you insert the labeled cassette and set the POWER switch to VCR, CAMERA, or MEMORY, the label is displayed for about five seconds. (1) Insert the cassette you want to label. (2) Set the POWER switch to VCR or CAMERA. (3) Press MENU to display the menu. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select TAPE TITLE, then press the dial. The tape title display appears. (6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the column of the desired character, then press the dial. (7) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired character, then press the dial. Editing (8) Repeat steps 6 and 7 until you finish the label. (9) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select [SET], then press the dial. The label is stored in memory. 3 MENU 2 POWER VCR (CHG) OFF CAMERA MEMORY 6-8 4,5 CM SET CM SEARCH TAPE T I TLE T I TLE DSPL TAPE T I TLE –––––––––– TAPE T I TLE –––––––––– T I TLEERASE I TEM ERASE ERASE ALL CM SET CM SEARCH TAPE T I TLE – – – – – – – – – – T I TLE DSPL [MENU] TEND : I TLEERASE [MENU] : END [MENU] : END I TEM ERASE ERASE ALL RETURN T I TLE TAPE TAPE T I TLE TAPE T I TLE –––––––––– M– – – – – – – – – –––––––––– [MENU] : END [MENU] : END [MENU] : END [MENU] : END 103
  • 104. Labeling a cassette To change the label you have made Insert the cassette to change the label, and operate in the same way as you do to make a new label. If you set the write-protect tab of the tape to lock You cannot label the tape. Slide the write-protect tab to release the write protection. If you have superimposed titles in the cassette When the label is displayed, up to four titles also appear. When the “-----” indicator has fewer than 10 spaces The cassette memory is full. The “-----” indicates the number of characters you can select for the label. To erase a character Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select [ C ], then press the dial. The last character is erased. To enter a space Select [ ], then select the blank part. 104
  • 105. Erasing the cassette memory data You can erase data stored in cassette memory, each item’s data can be erased separately. You can also erase all items’ data once. Erasing each item’s data separately (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR or CAMERA. (2) Press MENU to display the menu display. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ITEM ERASE, then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the item that you want to erase its data, then press the dial. Item Meaning INDEX ALL Erases all the index data. Editing TITLE ALL Erases all the title data. DATE ALL Erases all the date data. PHOTO ALL Erases all the photo data. (6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select OK, then press the dial. “OK” changes to “EXECUTE.” (7) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. “ERASING” flashes for about two seconds and “COMPLETE” appears after erasing the selected item’s data. 1 POWER 3-5 CM SET CM SEARCH TAPE T I TLE T I TLE DSPL T I TLEERASE VCR I TEM ERASE ERASE ALL (CHG) CM SET OFF CAMERA CM SEARCH TAPE T I TLE T I TLE DSPL MEMORY [MENU] TEND : I TLEERASE I TEM ERASE ERASE ALL RETURN CM SET I TEM ERASE I NDEX ALL 2 MENU T I TLE ALL [MENU] : END ALL DATE PHOTO ALL RETURN [MENU] : END 6-7 CM SET CM SET I TEM ERASE I TEM ERASE I NDEX ALL RETURN I NDEX ALL COMPLETE T I TLE ALL OK T I TLE ALL DATE ALL DATE ALL PHOTO ALL PHOTO ALL RETURN RETURN [MENU] : END [MENU] : END To cancel erasing Select RETURN in step 6 or 7, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. 105
  • 106. Erasing the cassette memory data Erasing all the data in cassette memory (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR or CAMERA. (2) Press MENU to display the menu display. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ERASE ALL, then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select OK, then press the dial. “OK” changes to “EXECUTE.” (6) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. “ERASING” flashes for about two seconds and “COMPLETE” appears after erasing all the data. To cancel erasing Select RETURN in step 5 or 6, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. 106
  • 107. — Customizing Your Camcorder — Changing the menu settings To change the mode settings in the menu settings, select the menu items with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial. The default settings can be partially changed. First, select the icon, then the menu item and then the mode. (1) In standby, or when the POWER switch is set to VCR or MEMORY, press MENU. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired icon, then press the dial to set it. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired item, then press the dial to set it. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired mode, then press the dial to set it. (5) If you want to change other items, select RETURN and press the dial, then repeat steps 2 to 4. For details, see “Selecting the mode setting of each item” (p. 108). 1 2 MANUAL SET Customizing Your Camcorder AUTO SHTR CAMERA VCR PROG. SCAN OTHERS MANUAL SET VCR SET WORLD TIME AUTO SHTR H i F i SOUND BEEP MENU PROG. SCAN AUD I O M I X COMMANDER A/V DV OUT DISPLAY REC LAMP COLOR BAR [MENU] : END OTHERS [MENU] : END [MENU] : END WORLD TIME 0 HR BEEP COMMANDER DISPLAY MEMORY REC LAMP COLOR BAR RETURN MANUAL SET AUTO SHTR 3 OTHERS WORLD TIME BEEP 0 HR OTHERS WORLD TIME BEEP COMMANDER ON [MENU] : END DISPLAY REC LAMP COLOR BAR [MENU] : END RETURN OTHERS WORLD TIME BEEP COMMANDER ON DISPLAY OFF REC LAMP COLOR BAR RETURN 4 OTHERS WORLD TIME BEEP COMMANDER ON DISPLAY OFF REC LAMP COLOR BAR RETURN OTHERS WORLD TIME BEEP COMMANDER OFF DISPLAY REC LAMP COLOR BAR RETURN 107
  • 108. Changing the menu settings To make the menu display disappear Press MENU. Menu items are displayed as the following icons: MANUAL SET CAMERA SET VCR SET LCD/VF SET MEMORY SET CM SET TAPE SET SETUP MENU OTHERS Selecting the mode setting of each item z is the default setting. Menu items differ depending on the position of the POWER switch. The LCD screen or viewfinder screen shows only the items you can operate at the moment. POWER Icon/item Mode Meaning switch AUTO SHTR z ON To automatically adjust the electronic CAMERA shutter speed. MEMORY OFF To fix the electronic shutter speed. PROG. SCAN z OFF Records still/moving pictures in the CAMERA interlace format. ON Records still/moving pictures in progressive mode. D ZOOM z OFF To deactivate the digital zoom. Up to 12× CAMERA zoom is carried out. 24× To activate the digital zoom. More than 12× zoom is performed digitally. This value goes up to 24× (p. 21). 48× To activate the digital zoom. More than 12× zoom is performed digitally. This value goes up to 48× (p. 21). 16:9WIDE z OFF To not record a 16:9 wide picture. CAMERA ON To record a 16:9 wide picture (p. 36). STEADYSHOT z ON To compensate for camera-shake. CAMERA OFF To cancel the SteadyShot function. Natural MEMORY pictures are produced when shooting a stationary object with a tripod. Notes on the SteadyShot function •The SteadyShot function will not correct excessive camera-shake. •Attachment of a conversion lens (not supplied) may influence the SteadyShot function. If you cancel the SteadyShot function The SteadyShot OFF indicator appears. Your camcorder prevents excessive compensation for camera-shake. 108
  • 109. Changing the menu settings POWER Icon/item Mode Meaning switch FRAME REC z OFF Does not make a cut recording. CAMERA ON Makes a cut recording (p. 61). INT. REC ON Makes an interval recording (p. 59). CAMERA z OFF Does not make an interval recording. SET Sets the interval time and recording time. HiFi SOUND z STEREO To play back a stereo tape or dual sound VCR track tape with main and sub sound (p. 144). 1 To play back a stereo tape with the left sound or a dual sound tape with main sound. 2 To play back a stereo tape with the right sound or a dual sound track tape with sub sound. Customizing Your Camcorder AUDIO MIX — To adjust the balance between the stereo 1 VCR and stereo 2 (p. 95). ST1 ST2 A/VtDV OUT z OFF To output analog images in digital format VCR using your camcorder. ON To output digital images in analog format using your camcorder. LCD B. L. z BRT NORMAL To set the brightness on the LCD screen to VCR normal. CAMERA BRIGHT To brighten the LCD screen. MEMORY LCD COLOR — To adjust the color on the LCD screen with VCR the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. CAMERA MEMORY To get low- To get high- intensity intensity VF B.L. z BRT NORMAL To set the brightness on the viewfinder VCR screen to normal. CAMERA BRIGHT To brighten the viewfinder screen. MEMORY GUIDEFRAME z OFF Does not display the guide frame. CAMERA ON Displays the guide frame (p. 35). MEMORY Notes on LCD B.L. and VF B.L. •When you select “BRIGHT,” battery life is reduced a little during recording. •When you use power sources other than the battery pack, “BRIGHT” is automatically selected. 109
  • 110. Changing the menu settings POWER Icon/item Mode Meaning switch CONTINUOUS z OFF Not to record continuously. MEMORY ON To record four images continuously (p. 121). MULTI SCRN To record nine images continuously (p. 121). QUALITY z SUPER FINE To record still images in the super fine VCR (SFN) image quality mode, using a “Memory MEMORY Stick” (p. 118). FINE To record still images in the fine image quality (FINE) mode, using a “Memory Stick” (p. 118). STANDARD To record still images in the standard image (STD) quality mode, using a “Memory Stick” (p. 118). PRINT MARK z OFF To erase print marks on still images. VCR ON To write a print mark on the recorded still MEMORY images you want to print out later. PROTECT z OFF To release protection from still images. VCR ON To protect selected still images against MEMORY accidental erasure (p. 138). SLIDE SHOW To play back all the images as a slide show MEMORY (p. 137). DELETE ALL To delete all unprotected images (p. 140). MEMORY FORMAT z RETURN To cancel formatting. MEMORY OK To format an inserted “Memory Stick.” 1. Select FORMAT with the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial, then press the dial. 2. Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select OK, then press the dial. 3. After “EXECUTE” appears, press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. “FORMATTING” appears during formatting. “COMPLETE” appears when formatting is finished. PHOTO SAVE To duplicate images on a mini DV tape onto VCR a “Memory Stick” (p. 130). Formatting erases all information on the “Memory Stick” Check the contents of the “Memory Stick” before formatting: •Formatting erases sample images on the “Memory Stick.” •Formatting erases the protected image data on the “Memory Stick.” Notes on formatting •Supplied or optional “Memory Stick”s have been formatted at the factory. Formatting with this camcorder is not required. •While the display shows “FORMATTING,” do not turn the POWER switch, press any button, or eject a “Memory Stick.” •You cannot format a “Memory Stick” if the write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK. •Format again if the message “ ” appears. If formatting fails The “ FORMAT ERROR” message appears. 110
  • 111. Changing the menu settings POWER Icon/item Mode Meaning switch CM SEARCH z ON To search using cassette memory (p. 64, 66, VCR 67, 69). OFF To search without using cassette memory. TAPE TITLE To label a cassette (p. 103). VCR CAMERA TITLE DSPL z ON To display the title you have superimposed. VCR OFF Not to display the title. TITLEERASE — To erase the title you have superimposed VCR (p. 100). CAMERA ITEM ERASE — To erase each item’s data in cassette VCR memory (p. 105). CAMERA ERASE ALL — To erase all the data in cassette memory VCR (p. 106). CAMERA Customizing Your Camcorder REC MODE z SP To record in the SP (Standard Play) mode. VCR LP To increase the recording time to 1.5 times CAMERA the SP mode. AUDIO MODE z 12BIT To record in 12-bit mode (two stereo VCR sounds). CAMERA 16BIT To record in 16-bit mode (one stereo sound with high quality). Notes on the LP mode •When you record a tape in the LP mode on your camcorder, we recommend playing back the tape on your camcorder. When you play back the tape on other camcorders or VCRs, noise may occur in pictures or sound. •When you record in the LP mode, we recommend using a Sony Excellence/Master mini DV cassette so that you can get the most out of your camcorder. •You cannot make audio dubbing on a tape recorded in the LP mode. Use the SP mode for the tape to be audio-dubbed. •When you record in the SP and LP modes on one tape or you record some scenes in the LP mode, the playback picture may be distorted or the time code may not be written properly between scenes. Notes on AUDIO MODE •You cannot dub an audio sound on a tape recorded in the 16-bit mode. •When playing back a tape recorded in the 16-bit mode, you cannot adjust the balance in AUDIO MIX. 111
  • 112. Changing the menu settings POWER Icon/item Mode Meaning switch qREMAIN z AUTO To display the remaining tape indication: VCR • for about eight seconds after your CAMERA camcorder is turned on and calculates the remaining amount of tape • for about eight seconds after a cassette is inserted and your camcorder calculates the remaining amount of tape • for about eight seconds after N is pressed in VCR mode • for about eight seconds after DISPLAY is pressed to display the screen indicators • for the period of tape rewinding, forwarding or picture search in the VCR mode ON To always display the remaining tape indicator. DATA CODE z DATE/CAM To display date, time and various settings VCR during playback. DATE To display date and time during playback. MIC LEVEL z AUTO Adjusts audio recording level automatically. VCR MANUAL Adjusts audio recording level manually CAMERA (p. 51). CLOCK SET — To reset the date or time (p. 114). CAMERA MEMORY LTR SIZE z NORMAL To display selected menu items in normal VCR size. CAMERA 2× To display selected menu items at twice the MEMORY normal size. DEMO MODE z ON To make the demonstration appear. CAMERA OFF To cancel the demonstration mode. WORLD TIME To set the clock to the local time. Turn the CAMERA SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to set a time MEMORY difference. The clock changes by the time difference you set here. If you set the time difference to 0, the clock returns to the originally set time. Notes on DEMO MODE •You cannot select DEMO MODE when a cassette is inserted in your camcorder. •DEMO MODE is set to STBY (Standby) at the factory and the demonstration starts about 10 minutes after you have set the POWER switch to CAMERA without a cassette inserted. To cancel the demonstration, insert a cassette, set the POWER switch to other than CAMERA, or set DEMO MODE to OFF. 112
  • 113. Changing the menu settings POWER Icon/item Mode Meaning switch BEEP z MELODY To chime a melody in normal operations, VCR and beep a warning sound for five seconds. CAMERA NORMAL To beep in the following situations: MEMORY turning on the power, pressing the start/ stop button, and when a warning message appears. OFF To cancel the melody, beep, and shutter click sound. COMMANDER z ON To activate the Remote Commander VCR supplied with your camcorder. CAMERA OFF To deactivate the Remote Commander to MEMORY avoid remote control misoperation caused by an other VCR’s remote control. DISPLAY z LCD To show the display on the LCD screen and VCR Customizing Your Camcorder viewfinder screen. CAMERA V-OUT/LCD To show the display on a TV screen, LCD MEMORY screen and viewfinder screen. REC LAMP z ON To light up the camera recording lamps at CAMERA the front and rear of your camcorder. MEMORY OFF To turn the camera recording lamps off. COLOR BAR z OFF Does not display the color bar. CAMERA ON Displays the color bar. VIDEO EDIT To make programs and perform video VCR editing (p. 83). EDIT SET To adjust and set the synchronization of VCR your camcorder and a VCR for dubbing in video program editing mode (p. 76). Note If you press DISPLAY with DISPLAY set to V-OUT/LCD in the menu settings, the picture from a TV or VCR will not appear on the LCD screen even when your camcorder is connected to outputs on the TV or VCR (except using an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable)). When recording a close subject When REC LAMP is set to ON, the red camera recording lamps on the front and rear of the camcorder may reflect on the subject if it is close. In this case, we recommend you set REC LAMP to OFF. After more than five minutes after removing the power source The “PROG. SCAN,” “HiFi SOUND,” “AUDIO MIX,” “MIC LEVEL,” and “COMMANDER” items are returned to their default settings. The other menu items are held in memory even when the power source is removed. 113
  • 114. Resetting the date and time The default clock setting is set to Tokyo time for the models sold in Japan, and New York time for other models. If you do not use your camcorder for about four months, the date and time settings may be released (bars may appear) because the vanadium-lithium battery installed in your camcorder will have been discharged (p. 158). First, set the year, then the month, the day, the hour and then the minute. (1) Press MENU to display the menu in the standby mode. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select CLOCK SET, then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to adjust to the desired year, then press the dial. (5) Set the month, day and hour by turning the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial and pressing the dial. (6) Set the minute by turning the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial and pressing the dial by the time signal. The clock starts to move. (7) Press MENU to erase the menu display. 1,7 MENU 2 3 MANUAL SET SETUP MENU SETUP MENU AUTO SHTR CLOCK SET JAN 1 2000 CLOCK SET PROG. SCAN LTR SIZE 1 2 : 0 0 : 0 0AM LTR SIZE DEMO MODE DEMO MODE 2000 JAN 1 RETURN RETURN 12 00 AM [MENU] : END [MENU] : END [MENU] : END 6 4 SETUP MENU SETUP MENU CLOCK SET CLOCK SET JUL 4 2000 LTR SIZE LTR SIZE 5 : 3 0 : 0 0PM DEMO MODE 2000 JUL 4 DEMO MODE RETURN RETURN 2000 JAN 1 2000 JAN 1 5 30 PM [MENU] : END [MENU] : END 12 00 AM 12 00 AM The year changes as follows: 1995 1996 2000 2079 If you do not set the date and time “– –:– –:– –” (time) and “--- -- ----” (date) are recorded on the data code of the tape and the “Memory Stick.” Note on the time indicator The internal clock of your camcorder operates on a 12-hour cycle. •12:00 AM stands for midnight. 114 •12:00 PM stands for noon.
  • 115. — “Memory Stick” Operations — Using a “Memory Stick” – introduction You can record and play back still images on the “Memory Stick” supplied with your camcorder. You can easily play back, record or delete still images. You can exchange image data with other equipment such as a personal computer etc., using the Memory Stick Reader/Writer supplied with your camcorder or a PC card adaptor for Memory Stick (not supplied). On file format (JPEG) Your camcorder compresses image data in JPEG format (extension .jpg). Typical image data file name 100-0001: As displayed on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder of the camcorder. Dsc00001.jpg: As displayed on your PC screen. Before using a “Memory Stick” Terminal Write-protect tab “Memory Stick” Operations Labeling position Rear Front •You cannot record or erase still images when the write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK. •We recommend backing up important data. •Image data may be damaged in the following cases: – If you remove the “Memory Stick,” turn the power off, or detach the battery for replacement when the access lamp is flashing. – If you use a “Memory Stick” near static electricity or magnetic fields. •Prevent metallic objects or your finger from coming into contact with the metal parts of the connecting section. •Stick its label on the labeling position. •Do not bend, drop or apply strong shock to a “Memory Stick.” •Do not disassemble or modify a “Memory Stick.” •Do not let the “Memory Stick” get wet. •Do not use or keep a “Memory Stick” in locations that are: – Extremely hot such as in a car parked in the sun or under the scorching sun. – Under direct sunlight. – Very humid or subject to corrosive gases. •When you carry or store a “Memory Stick,” put it in its case. A “Memory Stick” formatted by a computer A “Memory Stick” formatted by the Windows OS or Macintosh computers does not have a guaranteed compatibility with this camcorder. 115
  • 116. Using a “Memory Stick” – introduction Notes on image data compatibility •Image data files recorded on a “Memory Stick” by your camcorder conform to the Design Rules for Camera File Systems universal standard (DCF98 standard) established by the JEIDA (Japan Electronic Industry Development Association). You cannot play back on your camcorder still images recorded on other equipment (DCR- TRV890E/TRV900/TRV900E or DSC-D700/D770) that does not conform to this universal standard. (These models are not sold in some areas.) •If you cannot use a “Memory Stick” that is used with other equipment, format it with this camcorder (p. 110). However, formatting erases all information on the “Memory Stick.” “Memory Stick” and are trademarks of Sony Corporation. •Windows is a registered trademark licensed to Microsoft Corporation, registered in the U.S.A. and other countries. •Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. •All other product names mentioned herein may be the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. Furthermore, “™” and “®” are not mentioned in each case in this manual. 116
  • 117. Using a “Memory Stick” – introduction Inserting a “Memory Stick” Insert the “Memory Stick” with the Sony logo pointing toward the LCD panel and the b mark pointing inward. Access lamp To eject a “Memory Stick” “Memory Stick” Operations Push the “Memory Stick” inward, then release your finger. The “Memory Stick” comes out a little. Note The “Memory Stick” may pop out depending on the way you push it. When the access lamp is lit or flashing Never shake or strike your camcorder. Do not turn the power off , eject a “Memory Stick” or remove the battery pack. Otherwise, image data breakdown may occur. If the “ MEMORY STICK ERROR” indicator appears The “Memory Stick” is broken or the file format is not proper. Eject the “Memory Stick,” check it, and insert it again. If the same indicator appears, use another “Memory Stick.” 117
  • 118. Using a “Memory Stick” – introduction Selecting the image quality mode You can select the image quality mode in still picture recording. The default setting is SUPER FINE. (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR or MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the right (unlock) position. (2) Press MENU to display the menu. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select QUALITY, then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired image quality, then press the dial. 1 POWER 3 MEMORY SET CONT I NUOUS QUAL I TY VCR PR I NT MARK PROTECT (CHG) SL I DE SHOW OFF CAMERA DELETE ALL FORMAT MEMORY [MENU] : END 4 MEMORY SET CONT I NUOUS QUAL I TY PR I NT MARK SUPER F I NE PROTECT SL I DE SHOW DELETE ALL FORMAT RETURN [MENU] : END 5 MEMORY SET CONT I NUOUS QUAL I TY PR I NT MARK SFN SUPER F I NE F I NE 2 MENU PROTECT SL I DE SHOW DELETE ALL FORMAT STANDARD RETURN [MENU] : END Image quality settings Setting (Display) Meaning SUPER FINE (SFN) This is the highest image quality in this camcorder. The number of still images you can record is fewer than FINE. The image is compressed to about 1/3. FINE (FINE) Use this mode when you want to record high quality images. The image is compressed to about 1/6. STANDARD (STD) This is the standard image quality. The image is compressed to about 1/10. Note In some cases, changing the image quality mode may not affect the image quality, depending on the types of images you are shooting. 118
  • 119. Using a “Memory Stick” – introduction Differences in image quality mode Recorded images are compressed in JPEG format before being stored in memory. The memory capacity allotted to each image varies depending on the image quality mode selected. Details are shown in the table below. Image quality mode Memory capacity SUPER FINE Approx. 190 KB FINE Approx. 100 KB STANDARD Approx. 60 KB Note on the image quality mode indicator This is only displayed during recording. The approximate number of images you can record on a “Memory Stick” The approximate number of images you can record on a “Memory Stick” that is formatted using this camcorder varies depending on which image quality mode you select and the complexity of the subject. “Memory Stick” Operations Image quality mode SUPER FINE (SFN) FINE (FINE) STANDARD (STD) 4 MB type (supplied) 20 images 40 images 60 images 8 MB type (not supplied) 40 images 81 images 122 images 16 MB type (not supplied) 82 images 164 images 246 images 32 MB type (not supplied) 164 images 329 images 494 images 64 MB type (not supplied) 329 images 659 images 988 images 119
  • 120. Recording still images on a “Memory Stick” – Memory Photo recording You can record still images on a “Memory Stick.” Before operation Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder. (1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the right (unlock) position. (2) Keep pressing PHOTO lightly until the desired still picture appears. The green z mark stops flashing, then lights up. The brightness of the picture and focus are re-adjusted, being targeted for the middle of the picture and are fixed. Recording does not start yet. (3) Press PHOTO deeply. The shutter clicks and the image is frozen. The image displayed on the screen will be recorded on the “Memory Stick.” Recording is complete when the bar scroll indicator disappears. 1 POWER VCR (CHG) OFF CAMERA MEMORY [a] 2 SFN 1/6 3 SFN PHOTO [b] PHOTO [a] The number of images that can be recorded on the “Memory Stick” [b] The number of recorded images When the POWER switch is set to MEMORY The following functions do not work: wide TV mode, digital effect, picture effect, title, digital zoom, fader, shutter speed (1/30 or smaller) adjustment, and low lux mode and sports lesson mode in PROGRAM AE. (The indicator flashes in the low lux or sports lesson mode.) Note When you press the PHOTO button lightly at step 2, the focus of the image seems to be momentarily out. 120
  • 121. Recording still images on a “Memory Stick” – Memory Photo recording While you are recording a still image You can neither turn off the power nor press PHOTO. When you press PHOTO on the Remote Commander Your camcorder immediately records the image that is on the screen when you press the button. Recording images continuously You can record still images continuously. Select one of the two modes described below before recording. Continuous mode [a] You can four record still images continuously. The number of images is in accordance with remaining capacity of the “Memory Stick.” Multi screen mode [b] You can record nine still images continuously on a single page. “Memory Stick” Operations [a] [b] While pressing down PHOTO, the camcorder shoots still images continuously. The maximum number of recordable still images is up to four. If you release the button during shooting, the recording stops even if it is in progress. 121
  • 122. Recording still images on a “Memory Stick” – Memory Photo recording (1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the right (unlock) position. (2) Press MENU to display the menu. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select CONTINUOUS, then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired setting, then press the dial. 1 POWER 2 VCR MENU (CHG) OFF CAMERA MEMORY 3 4 MEMORY SET CONT I NUOUS OFF QUAL I TY PR I NT MARK PROTECT MEMORY SET CONT I NUOUS OFF QUAL I TY ON PR I NT MARK MULT I SCRN PROTECT SL I DE SHOW SL I DE SHOW DELETE ALL DELETE ALL FORMAT FORMAT RETURN RETURN [MENU] : END [MENU] : END MEMORY SET 5 CONT I NUOUS MEMORY SET QUAL I TY CONT I NUOUS ON PR I NT MARK QUAL I TY PROTECT PR I NT MARK SL I DE SHOW PROTECT DELETE ALL SL I DE SHOW FORMAT DELETE ALL FORMAT RETURN [MENU] : END [MENU] : END Continuous shooting settings Setting Meaning (indicator on the screen) OFF Your camcorder shoots one image at a time. (no indicator) ON Your camcorder shoots four still images at about 0.5 sec intervals. ( ) MULTI SCRN Your camcorder shoots nine still images at about 0.5 sec intervals and displays the images on a single page divided into nine boxes. ( ) If the capacity of the “Memory Stick” becomes full ” FULL” appears on the screen, and you cannot record still pictures on this “Memory Stick.” The number of images in continuous shooting The number of images you can shoot continuously varies depending on the remaining capacity of the “Memory Stick.” The shutter always clicks four times, however, the number of images recordable may be less than four. 122
  • 123. Recording still images on a “Memory Stick” – Memory Photo recording Note on using a video flash light (not supplied) The video flash light does not work in the continuous or multi screen mode if you install it to the intelligent accessory shoe. When shooting with the self-timer function or the Remote Commander The camcorder automatically records up to the maximum recordable number of still pictures. Self-timer memory photo recording You can make a memory photo recording with the self-timer. This mode is useful when you want to record yourself. You can also use the Remote Commander. (1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the right (unlock) position. (2) Press (self-timer) in standby mode. The (self-timer) indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (3) Press PHOTO deeply. The self-timer starts counting down from 10 with a beep sound. In the last two “Memory Stick” Operations seconds of the countdown, the beep sound gets faster, then recording starts automatically. PHOTO 3 PHOTO 1 2 POWER VCR (CHG) OFF CAMERA MEMORY To cancel self-timer recording Press (self-timer) so that the indicator disappears from the LCD or viewfinder screen. You cannot cancel the self-timer recording using the Remote Commander. Note The self-timer recording mode is automatically canceled when: – Self-timer recording is finished. – The POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG) or VCR. 123
  • 124. Superimposing a still image in a “Memory Stick” on a moving picture – MEMORY MIX You can superimpose a still image you have recorded on a “Memory Stick” on the top of the moving picture you are recording. M. CHROM (Memory chromakey) You can swap a blue area of a still image such as an illustration or a frame with a moving picture. M. LUMI (Memory luminancekey) You can swap a brighter area of a still image such as a handwritten illustration or title with a moving picture. Record a title on a “Memory Stick” before a trip or event for convenience. C. CHROM (Camera chromakey) You can superimpose a moving picture on a still image that used as background. Shoot the subject against a blue background. The blue area of the moving picture will be swapped with a still image. M. OVERLAP (Memory overlap) You can make a moving picture fade in on top of a still image. Still image Moving picture Moving picture + Still image M. CHROM Background: blue Still image Moving picture Moving picture + Still image M. LUMI Still image Moving picture Moving picture + Still image C. CHROM Background: blue Still image Moving picture Moving picture + Still image M.OVERLAP 124
  • 125. Superimposing a still image in a “Memory Stick” on a moving picture – MEMORY MIX Before operation Insert a recorded “Memory Stick” and a mini DV tape to be recorded into your camcorder. (1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA. (2) Press MEMORY MIX in standby mode. The last recorded or last composed image appears on the lower part of the screen as a thumbnail image. (3) Press MEMORY+/– or +/– on the Remote Commander to select the still image you want to superimpose. To see the previous image, press MEMORY – or – on the Remote Commander. To see the next image, press MEMORY+ or + on the Remote Commander. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired mode. The mode changes as follows: M. CHROM y M. LUMI y C. CHROM y M. OVERLAP (5) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. The still image is superimposed on the moving picture, and your camcorder is in standby mode. “Memory Stick” Operations (6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the effect. (7) Press START/STOP to start recording. 1 POWER VCR (CHG) 2 OFF CAMERA MEMORY MEMORY MIX 7 POWER VCR (CHG) OFF CAMERA M. CHROM MEMORY 100-0019 Still image 3 4 M. LUMI – + 100-0019 5 M. LUMI I I I • • • • 100-0019 6 M. LUMI I • • • • • • 100-0019 125
  • 126. Superimposing a still image in a “Memory Stick” on a moving picture – MEMORY MIX Items to be adjusted M. CHROM The color (blue) scheme of the area in the still picture which is to be swapped with a moving picture M. LUMI The color (bright) scheme of the area in the still picture which is to be swapped with a moving picture C. CHROM The color (blue) scheme of the area in the moving picture which is to be swapped with a still picture M. OVERLAP No adjustment necessary As the bar is shorter, the effect is enhanced. To change the still image to be superimposed Do either of the following: – Press MEMORY+/– after step 6. – Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial after step 6, and repeat the procedure from step 4 (except M. OVERLAP). To change the mode setting Press SEL/PUSH EXEC dial after step 6, and repeat the procedure from step 4 (except M. OVERLAP). To cancel MEMORY MIX Press MEMORY MIX. During recording You cannot change the mode setting. The “Memory Stick” supplied with your camcorder has 20 images stored – For M. CHROM: 18 images (such as a frame) 100-0001 to 100-0018 – For C. CHROM: two images (such as background) 100-0019 to 100-0020 Sample images Sample images stored in the “Memory Stick” supplied with your camcorder are protected (p. 138). If a still image to be superimposed has lots of white areas The thumbnail image may not be displayed clearly. Image data modified with personal computers or shot with other equipment You may not be able to play them back with your camcorder. 126
  • 127. Recording an image from a mini DV tape as a still image Your camcorder can read moving picture data recorded on a mini DV tape and record it as a still image on a “Memory Stick.” Your camcorder can also take in moving picture data through the input connector and record it as a still image on a “Memory Stick.” Before operation Insert a recorded mini DV tape and a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder. (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2) Press N. The picture recorded on the mini DV tape is played back. (3) Keep pressing PHOTO lightly until the picture from the mini DV tape freezes. “CAPTURE” appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. Recording does not start yet. (4) Press PHOTO deeper. The image displayed on the screen will be recorded on a “Memory Stick.” Recording is complete when the bar scroll indicator disappears. “Memory Stick” Operations 2 1 POWER VCR REW PLAY FF (CHG) OFF CAMERA MEMORY 3 CAPTURE 4 PHOTO PHOTO When the access lamp is lit or is flashing Never shake or strike the unit. Also, do not turn the power off , eject a “Memory Stick” or remove the battery pack. Otherwise, image data breakdown may occur. If “ ” appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder The inserted “Memory Stick” is incompatible with your camcorder because its format does not conform to that of your camcorder. Check the format of the “Memory Stick.” If you press PHOTO lightly in the playback mode The playback pauses momentarily. Sound recorded on a mini DV tape You cannot record the sound from a mini DV tape. 127
  • 128. Recording an image from a mini DV tape as a still image Titles that are already recorded on mini DV tapes You cannot record the titles on a “Memory Stick.” When you press PHOTO on the Remote Commander Your camcorder immediately records the image that is on the screen when you press the button. Recording a still image from other equipment (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder and set DISPLAY in to LCD in the menu settings. (2) Play back the recorded tape, or turn the TV on to see the desired program. The picture from the other equipment appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (3) Follow steps 3 and 4 on page 127. When recording an image through the VIDEO jack S VIDEO (not supplied) OUT S VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO : Signal flow Connect the yellow plug of the A/V connecting cable supplied with your camcorder to the video output jack on the VCR or the TV. Connect using an S video cable (not supplied) to obtain high-quality pictures With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/V connecting cable. Connect an S video cable (not supplied) to the S video jacks of both your camcorder and the VCR/TV. This connection produces higher quality DV format pictures. 128
  • 129. Recording an image from a mini DV tape as a still image When recording the image through the DV IN/OUT jack DV IN/OUT DV S VIDEO LANC DV IN/OUT : Signal flow i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (not supplied) “Memory Stick” Operations 129
  • 130. Copying still images from a mini DV tape – Photo save Using the search function, you can automatically take in only still images from mini DV tapes and record them on a “Memory Stick” in sequence. Before operation •Insert a recorded mini DV tape into your camcorder and rewind the tape. •Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder. (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2) Press MENU to display the menu. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select PHOTO SAVE, then press the dial. “PHOTO BUTTON” appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (5) Press PHOTO deeply. The still image from the mini DV tape is recorded on the “Memory Stick.” The number of still images copied is displayed. “END” is displayed when copying is completed. 1 POWER 5 PHOTO SAVE 00 : 00 : 00 : 00 VCR 4 / 15 SFN PHOTO (CHG) SAV I NG OFF CAMERA 0 MEMORY [MENU] : END 2 PHOTO SAVE 00 : 30 : 00 : 00 8 / 15 MENU SFN END 4 [MENU] : END 3 MEMORY SET QUAL I TY PR I NT MARK PROTECT PHOTO SAVE [MENU] : END 4 MEMORY SET QUAL I TY PR I NT MARK PROTECT PHOTO SAVE READY PHOTO SAVE 00 : 00 : 00 : 00 4 / 15 SFN RETURN PHOTO BUTTON [MENU] : END [PHOTO] : START [MENU] : END 130
  • 131. Copying still images from a mini DV tape – Photo save To cancel copying Press MENU. When the memory of the “Memory Stick” is full “MEMORY FULL” appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder, and the copying stops. Insert another “Memory Stick” and repeat the procedure from step 2. When the access lamp is lit or flashing Never shake or strike your camcorder. Also, do not turn the power off, eject the “Memory Stick” or remove the battery pack. Otherwise, the image data breakdown may occur. To record all the images recorded on the mini DV tape Rewind the tape all the way back and start copying. If the write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK “NOT READY” appears when you select the item in the menu settings. When you change the “Memory Stick” in the middle of copying “Memory Stick” Operations Your camcorder resumes copying from the last image recorded on the previous “Memory Stick.” 131
  • 132. Viewing a still picture – Memory Photo playback You can play back still images recorded on a “Memory Stick.” You can also play back six images at a time by selecting the index screen. Before operation Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder. (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR or MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the right (unlock) position. (2) Press MEMORY PLAY. The last recorded image is displayed. (3) Press MEMORY +/– or +/– on the Remote Commander to select the desired still image. To see the previous image, press MEMORY – or – on the Remote Commander. To see the next image, press MEMORY + or + on the Remote Commander. 2 PLAY 1 POWER VCR (CHG) OFF CAMERA MEMORY 3 – + To stop memory photo playback Press MEMORY PLAY again. To play back recorded images on a TV screen •Connect your camcorder to the TV with the A/V connecting cable supplied with your camcorder before operation. •When operating memory photo playback on a TV or on the LCD screen, the image quality may appear to have deteriorated. This is not a malfunction. The image data is as good as ever. •Turn the volume of the TV down before operation, or noise (howling) may be output from the TV speakers. When no images are recorded on the “Memory Stick” The message “ NO FILE” appears. Image data modified with personal computers or shot with other equipment You may not be able to play them back with your camcorder. Note on the date/time indicator Recording date/time is not displayed, however, it is automatically recorded on the “Memory Stick.” You can check the recording date/time while in memory playback mode by pressing DATA CODE. 132
  • 133. Viewing a still picture – Memory Photo playback Screen indicators during still image playback Image number/ 6 / 15 Total number of recorded images 100–0002 MEMORY PLAY Print mark Protect indicator Data file name On data file name •When the hyphen is indicated between the directory and the file number, this data file name means that this file corresponds to the DCF98 standard. •When the underbar is indicated between the directory and the file number, this data “Memory Stick” Operations file name means that this file does not correspond to the DCF98 standard. •The directory is not indicated if the file structure in the “Memory Stick” does not correspond to the DCF98 standard. •The “ - DIRECTORY ERROR” message may appear if the file structure in the “Memory Stick” does not correspond to the DCF98 standard. In this case, you cannot record on that “Memory Stick,” however, you can play back images in the “Memory Stick.” •When the data file name is flashes, the file may be broken or the file format does not correspond to your camcorder. Playing back six recorded images at a time (index screen) You can play back six recorded images at a time. This function is especially useful when searching for a particular image. (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR or MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the right (unlock) position. (2) Press MEMORY INDEX to display the index screen. 2 1 POWER VCR INDEX (CHG) OFF CAMERA MEMORY 133
  • 134. Viewing a still picture – Memory Photo playback A red B mark appears above the image that is displayed before changing to the index screen mode. MEMORY – : to display the previous six images MEMORY + : to display the following six images If you select the desired image by turning the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial, then press the dial, the selected image will be displayed on full screen. 7 8 9 10 11 12 [b] 100-0019 12 / 19 [a] [a] File name [b] B mark To return to the normal playback screen (single screen) Press MEMORY +/– to move the B mark to the image you want to display on full screen, then press MEMORY PLAY. Files modified with personal computers These files may not be displayed on the index screen. Image files shot with other equipment may not be displayed on the index screen either. Note When displaying the index screen, a number appears above each image. This indicates the order in which images are recorded on the “Memory Stick.” These numbers are different from the data file names. Viewing the recorded images using a personal computer The image data recorded with your camcorder is compressed in the JPEG format. If you use the application software, “PictureGear 4.1Lite” supplied with your camcorder, you can see images recorded on a “Memory Stick” on a computer screen. Use the Memory Stick Reader/Writer supplied with your camcorder, the Memory Stick/PC card kit or PC card adaptor for Memory Stick (not supplied) for this operation. For detailed instructions on operation, refer to the operating instructions of the serial port adaptor, Memory Stick/PC card kit or PC card adaptor for Memory Stick and your application software. For details, refer to the operating instructions of your accessory. •Do not modify the directory of the file that corresponds to the DCF98 standard. The modified file will not be read. •If you use the new “Memory Stick,” be sure to use it first with this camcorder. Recommended Windows environment •OS: Microsoft Windows 98 standard installation Operation in an environment upgraded to Windows 98 is not assured. •CPU: MMX Pentium 200 MHz or faster Recommended Macintosh environment •OS: Mac OS system 8.5/8.6 standard installation 134 •Model: iMac/G3
  • 135. Copying an image recorded on a “Memory Stick” to mini DV tapes You can copy still images or titles recorded on a “Memory Stick” to a mini DV tape. Before operation Insert a mini DV tape for recording and a “Memory Stick” for playback into your camcorder. (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2) Using the video control buttons, search for a point where you want to record the desired still image. Set the mini DV tape to playback pause mode. (3) Press z REC and the button on its right simultaneously on your camcorder. The mini DV tape is set to the recording pause mode. (4) Press MEMORY PLAY to play back the still image you want to copy. (5) Press X to start recording and press X again to stop. (6) If you have more to copy, repeat steps 4 and 5. 1 POWER VCR (CHG) OFF CAMERA “Memory Stick” Operations MEMORY 3 REC 4 PLAY 2 5 PAUSE To stop copying in the middle Press x. During copying •You cannot operate the following buttons: MEMORY PLAY, MEMORY INDEX, MEMORY DELETE, MEMORY +, MEMORY –, and MEMORY MIX. •If you continue copying, do not use EDITSEARCH to search for the point where you want to record the desired still image. If you do, the playback image disappears from the screen. 135
  • 136. Copying an image recorded on a “Memory Stick” to mini DV tapes Note on the index screen You cannot record the index screen. Image data modified with personal computers or shot with other equipment You may not be able to copy them with your camcorder. If you press DISPLAY in standby or recording mode You can see memory playback and the file name indicators in addition to the indicators pertinent to mini DV tapes, such as the time code indicator. 136
  • 137. Playing back images continuously – SLIDE SHOW You can automatically play back images in sequence. This function is useful especially when checking recorded images or during a presentation. Before operation Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder. (1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the right (unlock) position. (2) Press MENU to display the menu. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select SLIDE SHOW, then press the dial. (5) Press MEMORY PLAY. Your camcorder plays back the images recorded on the “Memory Stick” in sequence. 1 POWER VCR (CHG) OFF CAMERA “Memory Stick” Operations MEMORY 2 MENU 3 MEMORY SET CONT I NUOUS QUAL I TY PR I NT MARK PROTECT SL I DE SHOW DELETE ALL FORMAT [MENU] : END 5 PLAY 4 MEMORY SET CONT I NUOUS QUAL I TY PR I NT MARK PROTECT SL I DE SHOW 100-0019 10 / 15 SL I DE SHOW READY DELETE ALL FORMAT RETURN [MENU] : END [M PLAY] : START [MENU] : END To stop or end the slide show Press MENU. To pause during a slide show Press MEMORY PLAY. To start the slide show from a particular image Select the desired image using MEMORY +/– buttons before step 2. To view the recorded images on TV Connect your camcorder to a TV with the A/V connecting cable supplied with your camcorder before operation. If you change the “Memory Stick” during operation Be sure to follow the steps again from the beginning. 137
  • 138. Preventing accidental erasure – Image protection To prevent accidental erasure of important images, you can protect selected images. Before operation Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder. (1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or VCR. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the right (unlock) position. (2) Play back the image you want to protect (p. 132). (3) Press MENU to display the menu. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select PROTECT, then press the dial. (6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial. (7) Press MENU to erase the menu display. The “-“ mark is displayed beside the data file name of the protected image. 1 POWER VCR (CHG) OFF CAMERA MEMORY 3,7 MENU 4 MEMORY SET CONT I NUOUS QUAL I TY PR I NT MARK PROTECT SL I DE SHOW DELETE ALL FORMAT [MENU] : END 5 MEMORY SET CONT I NUOUS QUAL I TY PR I NT MARK PROTECT OFF 10 / 15 MEMORY SET CONT I NUOUS QUAL I TY PR I NT MARK PROTECT ON 10 / 15 SL I DE SHOW SL I DE SHOW OFF DELETE ALL DELETE ALL FORMAT FORMAT RETURN RETURN [MENU] : END [MENU] : END 6 MEMORY SET CONT I NUOUS QUAL I TY PR I NT MARK PROTECT ON 10 / 15 SL I DE SHOW DELETE ALL FORMAT RETURN [MENU] : END To cancel image protection Select OFF in step 6, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. Note Formatting erases all information on the “Memory Stick,” including the protected image data. Check the contents of the “Memory Stick” before formatting. If the write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK You cannot carry out image protection. 138
  • 139. Deleting images You can delete images stored in a “Memory Stick.” Deleting selected images Before operation Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder. (1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or VCR. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the right (unlock) position. (2) Play back the image you want to delete (p. 132). (3) Press MEMORY DELETE. “DELETE?” appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (4) Press MEMORY DELETE again. The selected image is deleted. 1 POWER VCR “Memory Stick” Operations (CHG) OFF CAMERA MEMORY 3,4 DELETE 100-0019 10 / 15 DELETE DELETE? [DELETE] : DEL [ – ] : CANCEL To cancel deleting an image Press MEMORY – in step 4. To delete an image displayed on the index screen Press MEMORY +/– to move the B mark to the desired image and follow steps 3 and 4. Notes •To delete a protected image, first cancel image protection. •Once you delete an image, you cannot restore it. Check the images to be deleted carefully before deleting them. While “DELETING” appears Do not turn the POWER switch or press any buttons. If the write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK You cannot delete any image. 139
  • 140. Deleting images Deleting all the images You can delete all the unprotected images in a “Memory Stick.” Before operation Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder. (1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the right (unlock) position. (2) Press MENU to display the menu. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select DELETE ALL, then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select OK, then press the dial. “OK” changes to “EXECUTE.” (6) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. “DELETING” appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. When all the unprotected images are deleted, “COMPLETE” is displayed. 1 POWER VCR (CHG) OFF CAMERA MEMORY 2 MENU 3 MEMORY SET CONT I NUOUS QUAL I TY PR I NT MARK PROTECT SL I DE SHOW DELETE ALL FORMAT [MENU] : END 4 MEMORY SET CONT I NUOUS QUAL I TY PR I NT MARK PROTECT MEMORY SET CONT I NUOUS QUAL I TY PR I NT MARK PROTECT SL I DE SHOW SL I DE SHOW DELETE ALL READY DELETE ALL RETURN FORMAT FORMAT OK RETURN RETURN [MENU] : END [MENU] : END 5 MEMORY SET CONT I NUOUS QUAL I TY PR I NT MARK PROTECT MEMORY SET CONT I NUOUS QUAL I TY PR I NT MARK PROTECT SL I DE SHOW SL I DE SHOW DELETE ALL RETURN DELETE ALL RETURN FORMAT OK FORMAT EXECUTE RETURN RETURN [MENU] : END [MENU] : END 6 MEMORY SET CONT I NUOUS QUAL I TY PR I NT MARK PROTECT MEMORY SET CONT I NUOUS QUAL I TY PR I NT MARK PROTECT SL I DE SHOW SL I DE SHOW DELETE ALL DELET I NG DELETE ALL COMPLETE FORMAT FORMAT RETURN RETURN [MENU] : END [MENU] : END 140
  • 141. Deleting images To cancel deleting all the images in the “Memory Stick” Select RETURN in step 5 or 6, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. “Memory Stick” Operations 141
  • 142. Writing a print mark – Print mark You can specify the recorded still image to be printed out. This function is useful for printing out still images later. Your camcorder conforms with the DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standard for specifying the still images to print out. Before operation Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder. (1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or VCR. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the right (unlock) position. (2) Play back the image to be printed out (p. 132). (3) Press MENU to display the menu. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select PRINT MARK, then press the dial. (6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial. (7) Press MENU to erase the menu display. The “ ” mark is displayed beside the data file name of an image. 1 POWER VCR (CHG) OFF CAMERA MEMORY 3,7 MENU 4 MEMORY SET CONT I NUOUS QUAL I TY PR I NT MARK PROTECT SL I DE SHOW DELETE ALL FORMAT [MENU] : END 5 MEMORY SET CONT I NUOUS QUAL I TY PR I NT MARK OFF PROTECT 10 / 12 MEMORY SET CONT I NUOUS QUAL I TY PR I NT MARK ON PROTECT OFF 10 / 12 SL I DE SHOW SL I DE SHOW DELETE ALL DELETE ALL FORMAT FORMAT RETURN RETURN [MENU] : END [MENU] : END 6 MEMORY SET CONT I NUOUS QUAL I TY PR I NT MARK ON PROTECT 10 / 12 SL I DE SHOW DELETE ALL FORMAT RETURN [MENU] : END To cancel writing print marks Select OFF in step 6, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. If the write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK You cannot write print marks on still images. 142
  • 143. — Additional Information — Usable cassettes Selecting cassette types You can use the mini DV cassette only*. You cannot use any other 8 mm, Hi8, Digital8, VHS, VHSC, S-VHS, S-VHSC, Betamax, ED Betamax or DV cassette. * There are two types of mini DV cassettes: with cassette memory and without cassette memory. Tapes with cassette memory have (Cassette Memory) mark. Sony recommends that you use a tape with mark to enjoy your camcorder fully. The IC memory is built in the cassette with cassette memory. Using this IC memory, your camcorder can read, write, and search data such as the date of recording or titles. The functions using the cassette memory require successive signals recorded on the tape. If the tape has a blank portion in the beginning or between the recorded portions, a title may not be displayed properly or the search functions may not work correctly. Not to make any blank portion on the tape, press END SEARCH to return to the end of the recorded portion before you begin the next recording when: – You have ejected the cassette while recording. – You have played back the tape in VCR mode. If there is a blank portion or discontinuous signal on your tape, re-record from the beginning to the end of the tape concerning above. Additional Information When you record, using a digital video camera recorder without a cassette memory function, on a tape recorded by one with the cassette memory function, the same result may occur. mark on the cassette The memory capacity of tapes marked with is 4 Kb. Your camcorder can accommodate up to 16 Kb. 16 Kb tape is marked with . The maximum number of data recordable on cassette memory (when using 4 Kb cassette memory) Data Numbers INDEX 32 TITLE 25 DATE 6 (10 bytes/1 data) PHOTO 12 (10 bytes/1 data) CASSETTE LABEL 1 (6 bytes/1 data) Copyright signal When you play back When you connect your camcorder to any other video camera recorder to dub a tape that has recorded copyright control signals for copyright protection, you may not record the tape that played back on your camcorder. When you record You cannot record software on your camcorder that contains copyright control signals for copyright protection of software. “COPY INHIBIT” appears on the LCD screen, in the viewfinder or on the TV screen if you try to record such software. Your camcorder does not record copyright control signals on the tape when it records. 143
  • 144. Usable cassettes Audio mode 12-bit mode: The original sound can be recorded in stereo 1, and the new sound in stereo 2 in 32 kHz. The balance between stereo 1 and stereo 2 can be adjusted by selecting AUDIO MIX in the menu settings during playback. Both sounds can be played back. 16-bit mode: A new sound cannot be recorded but the original sound can be recorded in high quality. Moreover, it can also play back sound recorded in 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz. When playing back a tape recorded in the 16-bit mode, 16BIT indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. When you play back a dual sound track tape When you play back a dual sound track tape recorded in a stereo system, set HiFi SOUND to the desired mode in the menu settings (p. 107). Sound from speaker HiFi SOUND Playing back Playing back a dual mode a stereo tape sound track tape STEREO Stereo Main sound and sub sound 1 Left sound Main sound 2 Right sound Sub sound You cannot record dual sound programs on your camcorder. Notes on the mini DV cassette When affixing a label on the mini DV cassette Be sure to affix a label only on the locations as illustrated below [a] so as not to cause malfunction of your camcorder. After using the mini DV cassette Rewind the tape to the beginning, put the cassette in its case, and store it in an upright position. If the cassette memory function does not work Reinsert a cassette a few times. The gold-plated connector of mini DV cassettes may be dirty or dusty. Cleaning the connector If the gold-plated connector of mini DV cassettes is dirty or dusty, you may not operate the function using cassette memory. Clean up the gold-plated connector with cotton- wool swab, about every 10 times ejection of a cassette. [b] Do not affix a label around this border. [b] 144 [a]
  • 145. About i.LINK Your camcorder is equipped with the DV input/output connector based on i.LINK (IEEE1394) standard. This section explains the specifications and features of i.LINK. What is i.LINK? i.LINK is a digital serial interface designed to integrate the devices equipped with i.LINK connector. By connecting i.LINK devices, i.LINK allows your device to: – Transmit and receive data such as digital audio and digital video signals in two ways – Control other i.LINK devices – Easily connect with another device using just an i.LINK cable. Your i.LINK device is capable of connecting AV devices and perform various operations and data transfer. Further availability for connections with versatile equipment and operations will be planned in the future. Other advantages include the following feature. When connecting multiple i.LINK devices, your device cannot only perform operations and data transfer with the directly connected device but also perform them with any of the devices that are connected via other devices. Therefore, you will not need to concern the order of connecting devices. However, depending on the features and specifications of the connected devices, you may need to operate certain functions differently or may not be able to perform certain operations or data transfer. Note Your camcorder can be connected to one device with the i.LINK cable (DV cable). Additional Information When you connect with a device that has two or more i.LINK connectors, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the connected device. Tips •i.LINK, a nickname for IEEE 1394 that Sony proposed, is a trademark supported by a majority of companies worldwide. •IEEE 1394 is an international standard defined by IEEE, The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. About data transfer speed of i.LINK i.LINK defines a maximum data transfer speed of approximately 100, 200 and 400 Mbps* that are described as S100, S200 and S400 respectively. For i.LINK devices, a maximum data transfer speed that the device supports is identified on “Specifications” page of the operating instructions supplied with the device or near its i.LINK connector. With a device that does not identify the data transfer speed, the maximum data transfer speed that the device supports is S100. When connecting with the device that support different data transfer speed, the actual data transfer speed may be different from those described on the i.LINK connectors. *What is Mbps? Mega bits per second. A measure of the rate at which data is transmitted per second. In case of 100 Mbps, 100 Mega bits of data can be transmitted per second. i. LINK operation with your camcorder For details on dubbing your camcorder to your VCR equipped with DV input/output connector , see page 74, 89. Your camcorder is available for use with other devices equipped with Sony i.LINK (DV) connector (eg. VAIO personal computer series). For details on connection with i.LINK cable and necessary software, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the connected device. Use Sony i.LINK cables Use Sony i.LINK cables to connect the i.LINK devices. 4 pins y 4 pins (For dubbing) i.LINK and are trademarks. 145
  • 146. Troubleshooting If you run into any problem using your camcorder, use the following table to troubleshoot the problem. If the problem persists, disconnect the power source and contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility. If “C:ss:ss” appears on the LCD screen, display window or in the viewfinder, the self-diagnosis display function has worked. See page 152. In the recording mode Symptom Cause and/or Corrective Actions START/STOP does not •The POWER switch is not set to CAMERA. operate. c Set it to CAMERA. (p. 15) •The tape has run out. c Rewind the tape or insert a new one. (p. 14, 29) •The write-protect tab on the cassette is set to expose the red mark. c Use a new tape or slide the tab. (p. 14) •The tape is stuck to the drum (moisture condensation). c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at least one hour to acclimatize. (p. 156) The power goes off. •While being operated in CAMERA mode, your camcorder has been in the standby mode for more than five minutes. c Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) and then to CAMERA again. (p. 16) •The battery pack is dead or nearly dead. c Install a charged battery pack. (p. 9, 10) The image on the viewfinder •The viewfinder lens is not adjusted. screen is not clear. c Adjust the viewfinder lens. (p. 19) The SteadyShot function •STEADYSHOT is set to OFF in the menu settings. does not work. c Set it to ON. (p. 107) The autofocusing function •The camcorder is in manual focus mode. does not work. c Turn to auto focus mode. (p. 58) •Shooting conditions are not suitable for autofocus. c Adjust focus manually. (p. 58) The fader function does not •The digital effect function is working. work. c Cancel it. (p. 40) A vertical band appears •The contrast between the subject and background is too when you shoot a subject high. This is not a malfunction. such as lights or a candle flame against a dark background. Vertical streaks appear •This is called the smear phenomenon. This is not a when you shoot a very malfunction. bright subject. 146
  • 147. Troubleshooting Symptom Cause and/or Corrective Actions Some tiny white spots • When the shutter speed is too low or the low lux mode is appear on the LCD screen or selected. in the viewfinder. Unknown pictures or • If 10 minutes elapse after you set the POWER switch to messages are displayed on CAMERA or DEMO MODE is set to ON in the menu settings the LCD screen or in the without a cassette inserted, your camcorder automatically viewfinder. starts the demonstration. c Insert a cassette. The demonstration stops. You can also cancel DEMO MODE. (p. 112) The click of the shutter does • BEEP is set to OFF in the menu settings. not sound. c Set it to MELODY or NORMAL. (p. 107) The image is not bright even • The ND FILTER selector is set to 1 or 2. if you use the video flash c Set it to OFF. (p. 46) light. • The manual adjustment is not suitable for the situations. (The indicator flashes.) c Set the AUTO LOCK selector to AUTO LOCK, or cancel the manual adjustment. (p. 43) In the playback mode Additional Information Symptom Cause and/or Corrective Actions The tape does not move • The POWER switch is not set to VCR. when a video control button c Set it to VCR. (p. 26) is pressed. The playback button does • The tape has run out. not function. c Rewind the tape. (p. 29) There are horizontal lines on • The video head may be dirty. the picture or the playback c Clean the heads using the Sony DVM12CL cleaning picture is not clear or does cassette (not supplied). (p. 157) not appear. No sound or only a low • The volume is turned to minimum. sound is heard when c Turn up the volume. (p. 26) playing back a tape. • AUDIO MIX is set to the ST2 side in the menu settings. c Adjust AUDIO MIX. (p. 107) The title search function • The tape has no cassette memory. does not work. c Use a tape with cassette memory. (p. 66, 143) • CM SEARCH is set to OFF in the menu settings. c Set it to ON. (p. 107) • There is no title in the tape. c Superimpose the titles. (p. 97) • The tape has a blank portion in the recorded portion. (p. 66) (continued on the following page) 147
  • 148. Troubleshooting Symptom Cause and/or Corrective Actions Displaying the recorded •The tape has no cassette memory. date, date search function c Use a tape with cassette memory. (p. 67, 143) does not work. •CM SEARCH is set to OFF in the menu settings. c Set it to ON. (p. 107) •The tape has a blank portion in the recorded portion. (p. 68) The new sound now being •AUDIO MIX is set to ST1 side in the menu settings. added, or that has been c Set it to the side you want to monitor. (p. 107) added to the recorded tape is not heard. The title is not displayed. •TITLE DSPL is set to OFF in the menu settings. c Set it to ON. (p. 107) The sound is muted or c Pull out the A/V connecting cable from the AUDIO L/R images do not appear when and VIDEO jacks, then connect it again. monitoring images through TV/VCR. In the recording and playback modes Symptom Cause and/or Corrective Actions The power does not turn on. •The battery pack is not installed, or is dead or nearly dead. c Install a charged battery pack. (p. 9, 10) •The AC power adaptor is not connected to a wall outlet. c Connect the AC power adaptor to a wall outlet. (p. 13) The end search function •The tape was ejected after recording when using a tape does not work. without cassette memory. (p. 25, 29) •You have not recorded on the new cassette yet. (p. 25, 29) The end search function •The tape has a blank portion in the beginning or middle. does not work correctly. (p. 25) The picture does not appear •The LCD panel is open. in the viewfinder. c Close the LCD panel. (p. 17) The battery pack is quickly •The operating temperature is too low. discharged. •The battery pack is not fully charged. c Charge the battery pack fully. (p. 10) •The battery pack is completely dead, and cannot be recharged. c Replace with a new battery pack. (p. 9) The battery remaining •You have used the battery pack in an extremely hot or cold indicator does not indicate environment for a long time. the correct time. •The battery pack is completely dead, and cannot be recharged. c Replace with a new battery pack. (p. 9) •The battery is dead. c Use a full-charged battery pack. (p. 9, 10) 148
  • 149. Troubleshooting Symptom Cause and/or Corrective Actions The cassette cannot be • The power source is disconnected. removed from the holder. c Connect it firmly. (p. 9, 13) • The battery is dead. c Use a charged battery pack. (p. 9, 10) The % and Z indicators • Moisture condensation has occurred. flash and no functions c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at least except for cassette ejection one hour to acclimatize. (p. 156) work. indicator does not • The gold-plated connector of the tape is dirty or dusty. appear when using a tape c Clean the gold-plated connector. (p. 144) with cassette memory. Remaining tape indicator is • The q REMAIN is set to AUTO in the menu settings. not displayed. c Set it to ON to always display the remaining tape indicator. (p. 107) When operating using the “Memory Stick” Symptom Cause and/or Corrective Actions Additional Information Operations do not function. • The POWER switch is set to CAMERA or OFF (CHG). c Set it to MEMORY or VCR. • The “Memory Stick” is not inserted. c Insert a “Memory Stick.” (p. 117) Recording does not function. • The “Memory Stick” has already been recorded to its full capacity. c Erase unnecessary images and record again. (p. 120, 139) • The “Memory Stick” formatted incorrectly is inserted. c Format the “Memory Stick” or use another “Memory Stick.” (p. 110) • The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK. c Set the tab to write. (p. 115) The image cannot be • The image is protected. deleted. c Cancel image protection. (p. 138) • The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK. c Set the tab to write. (p. 115) You cannot format the • The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK. “Memory Stick.” c Set the tab to write. (p. 115) Deleting all the images • The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK. cannot be carried out. c Set the tab to write. (p. 115) You cannot protect the • The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK. image. c Set the tab to write. (p. 115) • The image to be protected is not being played back. c Press MEMORY PLAY to play back the image. (p. 132) You cannot write a print • The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK. mark on the still image. c Set the tab to write. (p. 115) • The image that you will write a print mark is not being played back. c Press MEMORY PLAY to play back the image. (p. 132) (continued on the following page) 149
  • 150. Troubleshooting Symptom Cause and/or Corrective Actions The photo save function •The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK. does not work. c Set the tab to write. (p. 115) •The battery pack is dead. c Install a charged battery pack or use the AC power adaptor instead of the battery pack. (p. 9, 13) Others Symptom Cause and/or Corrective Actions The title is not recorded. •The tape has no cassette memory. c Use a tape with cassette memory. (p. 97, 143) •The cassette memory is full. c Erase unnecessary title. (p. 100) •The tape is set to prevent accidental erasure. c Slide the write-protect tab so that red portion is not visible. (p. 14) •Nothing is recorded in that position on the tape. c Superimpose the title to the recorded position. (p. 97) The cassette label is not •The tape has no cassette memory. recorded. c Use a tape with cassette memory. (p. 103, 143) •The cassette memory is full. c Erase some data. (p. 105) •The tape is set to prevent accidental erasure. c Slide the write-protect tab so that red portion is not visible. (p. 14) While editing using the c Disconnect the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable), and i.LINK cable (DV connecting connect it again. (p. 74) cable), recording picture cannot be monitored. Digital program editing •The input selector on the VCR is not set correctly. does not function. c Check the connection and set up the selector position. (p. 73) •The camcorder is not connected to Sony DV equipment. c Set CONTROL to IR in the menu settings and set the recording VCR to be controlled by infrared rays. •Setting program on a blank portion of the tape is attempted. c Set the program again on a recorded portion. (p. 84) •Your camcorder and the VCR are not synchronized. c Synchronize them. (p. 81) 150
  • 151. Troubleshooting Symptom Cause and/or Corrective Actions The Remote Commander • COMMANDER is set to OFF in the menu settings. supplied with your c Set it to ON. (p. 107) camcorder does not work. • Something is blocking the infrared rays. c Remove the obstacle. • The batteries are inserted in the battery holder with the + – polarities incorrectly. c Insert the batteries with the correct polarity. (p. 168) • The batteries are dead. c Insert new ones. (p. 168) The picture from a TV or • DISPLAY is set to V-OUT/LCD in the menu settings. VCR does not appear even c Set it to LCD. (p. 107) when your camcorder is connected to outputs on the TV or VCR. The melody or beep sounds • Moisture condensation has occurred. for five seconds. c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at least one hour to acclimatize. (p. 156) • Some troubles have occurred in your camcorder. c Remove the cassette and insert it again, then operate your camcorder. Additional Information When charging the battery • The AC power adaptor is disconnected. pack, no indicator appears c Connect it properly. or the indicator flashes on • The battery pack malfunctions. the display window. c Contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility. You cannot charge the • The POWER switch is not set to OFF (CHG). battery pack. c Set it to OFF (CHG). The camcorder is c Charge the battery pack fully again. immediately turned off even The correct remaining time is displayed. if the amount of the battery remaining time is enough to operate. No function works though c Disconnect the power cord of the AC power adaptor or the power is on. remove the battery, then reconnect it after about one minute. Turn the power on. If the functions still do not work, press the RESET button located at the lower-right of the ZEBRA selector using a sharp-pointed object. (If you press the RESET button, all the settings including the date and time return to the default.) (p. 13, 163) 151
  • 152. Self-diagnosis display Your camcorder has a self-diagnosis display function. On the LCD screen or in the This function displays the current condition of viewfinder, on the display your camcorder as a 5-digit code (a window combination of a letter and figures) on the C:21:00 LCD screen, display window, or in the viewfinder. If a 5-digit code is displayed, check the following code chart. The last two digits (indicated by ss) will differ depending on the state of your camcorder. Self-diagnosis display •C:ss:ss You can service your camcorder yourself. •E:ss:ss Contact your Sony dealer or nearest local authorized Sony service facility. Five-digit display Cause and/or Corrective Actions C:04:ss •You are using a battery pack that is not an “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack. c Use an “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack. (p. 10) C:21:ss •Moisture condensation has occurred. c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at least one hour to acclimatize. (p. 156) C:22:ss •The video heads are dirty. c Clean the heads using the Sony DVM12CL cleaning cassette (not supplied). (p. 157) C:31:ss •A malfunction other than the above. C:32:ss c Remove the cassette and insert it again, then operate your camcorder. c Disconnect the power cord of the AC power adaptor or remove the battery pack. After reconnecting the power source, operate your camcorder. E:61:ss •A malfunction that you cannot service has occurred. E:62:ss c Contact your Sony dealer and inform them of the 5-digit code. (example: E:61:10) If you are unable to rectify the problem even if you try corrective actions a few times, contact your Sony dealer or nearest local authorized Sony service facility. 152
  • 153. Warning indicators and messages If indicators and messages appear on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder, check the following: See the page in parentheses “( )” for more information. Warning indicators E The battery is dead or nearly dead Slow flashing: •The battery is nearly dead. Depending on conditions, the E indicator may flash, even if there are five to 10 minutes remaining. If this flashes, we recommend that you charge the battery or install the charged battery. Fast flashing: •The battery is dead (p. 10). •The battery is completely dead. Warning indicator as to tape Slow flashing: •The tape is near the end. •No tape is inserted (p. 14).* •The write-protect tab on the cassette is out (red) (p. 14).* Fast flashing: •The tape has run out (p. 29).* Additional Information Z You need to eject the cassette Slow flashing: •The write-protect tab on the cassette is out (red) (p. 14).* Fast flashing: •Moisture condensation has occurred (p. 156).* •The tape has run out (p. 29).* •The self-diagnosis display function is activated (p. 152).* % Moisture condensation has occurred* Fast flashing: •Eject the cassette, turn off your camcorder, and leave it for about one hour with the cassette compartment open (p. 156). Warning indicator as to cassette memory Slow flashing: •No tape with cassette memory is inserted (p. 143).* Self-diagnosis display (p. 152) - The still image is protected Slow flashing: •The still image is protected (p. 138).* Warning indicator as to “Memory Stick”* Slow flashing: •No “Memory Stick” is inserted (p. 117). Fast flashing: • Unreadable “Memory Stick” is inserted. 153
  • 154. Warning indicators and messages 100-0001 “(Warning indicators) Memory Stick” file error* Slow flashing: •File is broken. •File has no compatibility. “Memory Stick” format error* Fast flashing: •There are tow directories or more. •Data is broken. •“Memory Stick” is not formatted correctly (p. 110). Warning messages •CLOCK SET Reset the date and time (p. 114). •FOR “InfoLITHIUM” Use an “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack (p. 10). BATTERY ONLY •MEMORY FULL The “Memory Stick” is full in photo save function (p. 131). • CLEANING CASSETTE The video heads are dirty (p. 157).** • FULL The tape cassette memory is full (p. 99).* • 16BIT AUDIO MODE is set to 16BIT.* You cannot dub new sound (p. 111). • REC MODE REC MODE is set to LP.* You cannot dub new sound (p. 111). • TAPE There is no recorded portion on the tape.* You cannot dub new sound (p. 96). • “i.LINK” CABLE i.LINK cable is connected (p. 96).* You cannot dub new sound. • FULL The “Memory Stick” is full (p. 122).* • - The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK (p. 115).* • NO FILE No still image is recorded on the “Memory Stick” (p. 132).* • NO MEMORY STICK No “Memory Stick” is inserted (p. 117).* • MEMORY STICK ERROR The “Memory Stick“ data is corrupted (p. 117).* • FORMAT ERROR (p. 110)* • - DIRECTORY ERROR (p. 133)* •COPY INHIBIT The tape contains copyright control signals for copyright protection of software (p. 143).* •Q Z TAPE END The tape has reached the end of the tape (p. 29).* •Q NO TAPE Insert a cassette tape (p. 14).* * You hear the melody or beep sound. ** x and the message appear alternately. 154
  • 155. Using your camcorder abroad Using your camcorder abroad You can use your camcorder in any country or area with the AC power adaptor supplied with your camcorder within 100 V to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. When charging the battery pack, use a commercially available AC plug adaptor [a], if necessary, depending on the design of the wall outlet [b]. AC-L10A/L10B/L10C [a] [b] Your camcorder is an NTSC system based camcorder. If you want to view the playback picture on a TV, it must be an NTSC system based TV with the AUDIO/VIDEO input jack. The following shows TV color systems used overseas. NTSC system Bahama Islands, Bolivia, Canada, Central America, Chile, Colombia, Ecuador, Jamaica, Additional Information Japan, Korea, Mexico, Peru, Surinam, Taiwan, the Philippines, the U.S.A., Venezuela, etc. PAL system Australia, Austria, Belgium, China, Czech Republic, Denmark, Finland, Germany, Great Britain, Holland, Hong Kong, Italy, Kuwait, Malaysia, New Zealand, Norway, Portugal, Singapore, Slovak Republic, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Thailand, etc. PAL-M system Brazil PAL-N system Argentina, Paraguay, Uruguay SECAM system Bulgaria, France, Guyana, Hungary, Iran, Iraq, Monaco, Poland, Russia, Ukraine, etc. Simple setting of clock by time difference You can easily set the clock to the local time by setting a time difference. Select WORLD TIME in the menu settings. See page 107 for more information. 155
  • 156. Maintenance information and precautions Moisture condensation If your camcorder is brought directly from a cold place to a warm place, moisture may condense inside your camcorder, on the surface of the tape, or on the lens. In this condition, the tape may stick to the head drum and be damaged or your camcorder may not operate correctly. If there is moisture inside your camcorder, the beep sounds and the % indicator flashes. When the Z indicator flashes at the same time, the cassette is inserted in your camcorder. If moisture condenses on the lens, the indicator will not appear. If moisture condensation occurred None of the functions except cassette ejection will work. Eject the cassette, turn off your camcorder, and leave it for about one hour with the cassette compartment open. Your camcorder can be used again if the % indicator does not appear when the power is turned on again. Note on moisture condensation Moisture may condense when you bring your camcorder from a cold place into a warm place (or vice versa) or when you use your camcorder in a hot place as follows: •You bring your camcorder from a ski slope into a place warmed up by a heating device. •You bring your camcorder from an air-conditioned car or room into a hot place outside. •You use your camcorder after a squall or a shower. •You use your camcorder in a high temperature and humidity place. How to prevent moisture condensation When you bring your camcorder from a cold place into a warm place, put your camcorder in a plastic bag and tightly seal it. Remove the bag when the air temperature inside the plastic bag has reached the surrounding temperature (after about one hour). 156
  • 157. Maintenance information and precautions Removing Dust from Inside the Viewfinder Before cleaning, remove the sticker below the viewfinder lens adjustment lever. (1) While holding down the hook 1, slide the eyecup in the direction of the arrow and remove it out 2. (2) Clean the surface with a commercially available blower. 1 2 Additional Information To reattach the eyecup Do step 1 above sliding the eyecup in the reverse direction of the arrow. Maintenance information Cleaning the video head To ensure normal recording and clear pictures, clean the video heads. The video head may be dirty when: •mosaic-pattern noise appears on the playback picture. •playback pictures do not move. •playback pictures do not appear. •the x indicator and “ CLEANING CASSETTE” message appear one after another on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. If the above problem, [a] or [b] occurs, clean the video heads for 10 seconds with the Sony DVM12CL cleaning cassette (not supplied). Check the picture and if the above problem persists, repeat cleaning. [a] [b] or Cleaning the LCD screen If fingerprints or dust make the LCD screen dirty, we recommend using a LCD Cleaning Cloth (not supplied) to clean the LCD screen. 157
  • 158. Maintenance information and precautions Charging the vanadium-lithium battery in your camcorder Your camcorder is supplied with a vanadium-lithium battery installed so as to retain the date and time, etc., regardless of the setting of the POWER switch. The vanadium- lithium battery is always charged as long as you are using your camcorder. The battery, however, will get discharged gradually if you do not use your camcorder. It will be completely discharged in about four months if you do not use your camcorder at all. Even if the vanadium-lithium battery is not charged, it will not affect the camcorder operation. To retain the date and time, etc., charge the battery if the battery is discharged. Charging the vanadium-lithium battery: •Connect your camcorder to house current using the AC power adaptor supplied with your camcorder, and leave your camcorder with the POWER switch turned off for more than 24 hours. •Or install the fully charged battery pack in your camcorder, and leave your camcorder with the POWER switch turned off for more than 24 hours. Precautions Camcorder operation •Operate your camcorder on 7.2 V (battery pack) or 8.4 V (AC power adaptor). •For DC or AC operation, use the accessories recommended in this operating instructions. •If any solid object or liquid get inside the casing, unplug your camcorder and have it checked by a Sony dealer before operating it any further. •Avoid rough handling or mechanical shock. Be particularly careful of the lens. •Keep the POWER switch set to OFF (CHG) when you are not using your camcorder. •Do not wrap your camcorder with a towel, for example, and operate it. Doing so might cause heat to build up inside. •Keep your camcorder away from strong magnetic fields or mechanical vibration. Noise may appear on the image. •Do not touch the LCD screen with a sharp-pointed object. •If your camcorder is used in a cold place, a residual image may appear on the LCD screen. This is not a malfunction. •While using your camcorder, the back of the LCD screen may heat up. This is not a malfunction. On handling tapes •Do not insert anything into the small holes on the rear of the cassette. These holes are used to sense the type and thickness of the tape and if the recording tab is in or out. •Do not open the tape protect cover or touch the tape. •Avoid touching or damaging the terminals. To remove dust, clean the terminals with a soft cloth. Camcorder care •Remove the tape, and periodically turn on the power, operate the CAMERA and VCR sections and play back a tape for about three minutes when your camcorder is not to be used for a long time. •Clean the lens with a soft brush to remove dust. If there are fingerprints on the lens, remove them with a soft cloth. •Clean the camcorder body with a dry soft cloth, or a soft cloth lightly moistened with a mild detergent solution. Do not use any type of solvent which may damage the 158 finish.
  • 159. Maintenance information and precautions •Do not let sand get into your camcorder. When you use your camcorder on a sandy beach or in a dusty place, protect it from the sand or dust. Sand or dust may cause your camcorder to malfunction, and sometimes this malfunction cannot be repaired. AC power adaptor •Unplug the unit from the wall outlet when you are not using the unit for a long time. To disconnect the power cord, pull it out by the plug. Never pull the power cord itself. •Do not operate the unit with a damaged cord or if the unit has been dropped or damaged. •Do not bend the power cord forcibly, or place a heavy object on it. This will damage the cord and may cause fire or electrical shock. •Prevent metallic objects from coming into contact with the metal parts of the connecting section. If this happens, a short may occur and the unit may be damaged. •Always keep metal contacts clean. •Do not disassemble the unit. •Do not apply mechanical shock or drop the unit. •While the unit is in use, particularly during charging, keep it away from AM receivers and video equipment. AM receivers and video equipment disturb AM reception and video operation. •The unit becomes warm during use. This is not a malfunction. •Do not place the unit in locations that are: – Extremely hot or cold Additional Information – Dusty or dirty – Very humid – Vibrating Battery pack •Use only the specified charger or video equipment with the charging function. •To prevent accident from a short circuit, do not allow metal objects to come into contact with the battery terminals. •Keep the battery pack away from fire. •Never expose the battery pack to temperatures above 60 °C (140 °F), such as in a car parked in the sun or under direct sunlight. •Keep the battery pack dry. •Do not expose the battery pack to any mechanical shock. •Do not disassemble nor modify the battery pack. •Attach the battery pack to video equipment securely. •Charging while some capacity remains does not affect the original battery capacity. •The battery pack is not resistant to water. Do not wet the battery pack. •Unless you use the battery pack for a long period, store the battery pack after you charge it fully and use it completely once a year. •Store the battery pack in a cool, dry place. Notes on dry batteries To avoid possible damage from battery leakage or corrosion, observe the following: •Be sure to insert the batteries with the + – polarities matched to the + – marks. •Dry batteries are not rechargeable. •Do not use a combination of new and old batteries. •Do not use different types of batteries. •Current flows from batteries when you are not using them for a long time. •Do not use leaking batteries. 159
  • 160. Maintenance information and precautions If batteries are leaking •Wipe off the liquid in the battery compartment carefully before replacing the batteries. •If you touch the liquid, wash it off with water. •If the liquid get into your eyes, wash your eyes with a lot of water and then consult a doctor. If any problem occurs, unplug your camcorder and contact your nearest Sony dealer. 160
  • 161. Specifications Video input/output Video camera Input/output auto switch AC power adaptor recorder RCA pin-jack, 1 Vp-p, 75 ohms, Power requirements unbalanced, sync negative 100 - 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz System Audio input/output Power consumption Input/output auto switch Video recording system 23 W RCA pin-jack, 327 mV, (at output 2 rotary heads Output voltage impedance more than 47 kilohms) Helical scanning system DC OUT: 8.4 V, 1.5 A in the Output impedance with less than Audio recording system operating mode 2.2 kilohms Rotary heads, PCM system Operating temperature Input impedance more than Quantization: 12 bits (Fs 32 kHz, 0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F) 47 kilohms stereo 1, stereo 2), 16 bits Storage temperature Headphones jack (Fs48 kHz, stereo) –20 °C to +60 °C (–4 °F to +140 °F) Stereo minijack (ø 3.5 mm) Video signal Dimensions (approx.) LANC control jack NTSC color, standards 125 × 39 × 62 mm Stereo mini-minijack (ø 2.5 mm) Usable cassette (5 × 1 9/16 × 2 1/2 in) (w/h/d) MIC jack Mini DV cassette with the excluding projecting parts Minijack, 0.388 mV low imped- mark printed Mass (approx.) ance with 2.5 to 3.0 V DC, output Tape speed 280 g (9.8 oz) impedance 6.8 kilohms (ø 3.5 mm) SP: Approx. 18.81 mm/s excluding power cord Stereo type LP: Approx. 12.56 mm/s Cord length (approx.) DV input/output Recording/playback time (using Power cord: 2 m (6.6 feet) 4-pin connector cassette DVM60) Connecting cord: 1.6 m (5.2 feet) Speaker SP: 1 h Additional Information Dynamic speaker (ø 20 mm) LP: 1.5 h Fast-forward/rewind time Battery pack (using cassette DVM60) LCD screen Approx. 2 min and 30 s Output voltage Picture Viewfinder DC 7.2 V 2.5 type measured diagonally Capacity Electric viewfinder (color) 49.9× 37.3 mm (2 × 1 1/2 in) Image device 5.0 Wh Total dot number Dimensions (approx.) 1/3 type CCD (3 Charge Coupled 200 640 (880 × 228) Device) 38.4 × 20.6 × 70.8 mm (1 9/16 × Approx. 380 000 pixels 13/16 × 2 7/8 in) (w/h/d) General Mass (approx.) (Effective: Approx. 340 000 pixels) Lens Power requirements 70 g (2.5 oz) Combined power zoom lens 7.2 V (battery pack) Type Filter diameter 58 mm (2 3/8 in) 8.4 V (AC power adaptor) Lithium ion 12× (Optical), 48× (Digital) Average power consumption F1.6 - 2.4 (when using the battery pack) “Memory Stick” Focal length During camera recording using 6 - 72 mm (1/4 - 2 7/8 in) LCD Memory When converted to a 35 mm still 4.7 W Flash memory camera Viewfinder 4 MB: MSA-4A 43.2 - 518.4 mm (1 3/4 - 20 1/2 in) 4.0 W Operating voltage Color temperature Operating temperature 2.7 V -3.6 V Auto, nIndoor (3 200 K), 0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F) Power consumption Outdoor (5 800 K), Storage temperature Approx. 45 mA in the operating Minimum illumination –20 °C to +60 °C (–4 °F to +140 °F) mode 2 lux (F1.6) Dimensions (approx.) Approx. 130 µA in the standby 115 × 146 × 342 mm (4 5/8 × 5 3/4 mode × 13 1/2 in) (w/h/d) Dimensions (approx.) Input/Output connectors Mass (approx.) 50 × 2.8 × 21.5 mm S video input/output 1.4 kg (3 lb 1 oz) (2 × 1/8 × 7/8 in) (w/h/d) Input/output auto switch main unit only Mass (approx.) 4-pin mini DIN 1.6 kg (3 lb 8 oz) 4 g (0.14 oz) Luminance signal: 1 Vp-p, including the battery pack, 75 ohms, unbalanced NP-F330, cassette DVM60 and Design and specifications are Chrominance signal: 0.286 Vp-p, hood cap subject to change without notice. 75 ohms, unbalanced Supplied accessories See page 8. 161
  • 162. — Quick Reference — Identifying the parts and controls Camcorder 1 9 2 0 3 qa 4 qs 5 qd 6 qf 7 qg 8 1 INDEX MARK button (p. 62) 8 BACK LIGHT button (p. 22) 2 Zoom ring (p. 20) 9 END SEARCH button (p. 25) 3 Focus ring (p. 58) 0 EDITSEARCH buttons (p. 25) 4 ND FILTER selector (p. 46) qa EXPOSURE dial (p. 44) 5 FOCUS selector (p. 58) qs EXPOSURE button (p. 44) 6 PUSH AUTO button (p. 58) qd Display window (p. 168) 7 FADER button (p. 38) qf OPEN button (p. 15, 26) qg SPOT LIGHT button (p. 23) This mark indicates that this product is a genuine accessory for Sony video products. When purchasing Sony video products, Sony recommends that you purchase accessories with this “GENUINE VIDEO ACCESSORIES” mark. These are trademarks of Sony corporation. Notes on the intelligent accessory shoe •The intelligent accessory shoe supplies power to optional accessories such as a video light or microphone. •The intelligent accessory shoe is linked to the POWER switch, allowing you to turn the power supplied by the shoe on and off. Refer to the operating instructions of the accessory for further information. •The intelligent accessory shoe has a safety device for fixing the installed accessory securely. To connect an accessory, press down and push it to the end, and then tighten the screw. •To remove an accessory, loosen the screw, and then press down and pull out the 162 accessory.
  • 163. Identifying the parts and controls qh qj wh qk wj ql wk w; wl MEMORY wa DISPLAY PLAY INDEX DELETE e; ws DATA CODE MEMORY MIX ea DIGITAL PICTURE wd TITLE EFFECT EFFECT es wf ed wg ef Quick Reference qh Speaker wh Battery pack (p. 9) qj LCD screen (p. 17) wj ZEBRA selector (p. 47) qk LCD BRIGHT buttons (p. 18) wk RESET button (p. 151) ql VOLUME buttons (p. 26) wl MEMORY INDEX button (p. 133) w; MEMORY PLAY button (p. 132) e; MEMORY DELETE button (p. 139) wa DISPLAY button (p. 27) ea MEMORY + button (p. 125, 132) ws MEMORY – button (p. 125, 132) es MEMORY MIX button (p. 125) wd DATA CODE button (p. 27) ed PICTURE EFFECT button (p. 39) wf TITLE button (p. 97) ef DIGITAL EFFECT button (p. 41) wg (self-timer) button (p. 24, 32, 123) 163
  • 164. Identifying the parts and controls eg eh SLOW REC AUDIO DUB STOP REW PLAY FF PAUSE ej ek el r; ra eg Video control buttons (p. 26, 29, 83) ej Camera recording lamp (p. 15) C SLOW (slow playback) ek REC START/STOP (p. 18) AUDIO DUB (dubbing) x STOP (stop) el Lens m REW (rewind) N PLAY (playback) r; Lens hood fixing screw M FF (Fast-forward) ra Lens hood X PAUSE (pause) You can attach a wide teleconversion z REC (recording) lens (not supplied) by removing the lens The control buttons light up when you hood. set the POWER switch to VCR. eh Remote sensor/infrared ray emitter Removing the lens hood To remove the lens hood for attachment of the wide teleconversion lens, etc., loosen the lens hood fixing screw, and unscrew the lens hood conuterclockwise. When using additional filters We recommend that you use Sony made filters having the genuine accessory mark. 164
  • 165. Identifying the parts and controls rs td rd rf tf rg rh tg rj th rk tj rl tk t; tl ta y; ts ya Quick Reference rs Hooks for shoulder strap ts “Memory Stick” slot (p. 117) rd Power zoom lever (p. 20) td Cassette lid (p. 14) rf PHOTO button (p. 31, 120) tf Hood cap (p. 15) rg BATT (battery) RELEASE lever (p. 9) tg PUSH button (p. 14) rh PROGRAM AE button (p. 56) th Grip strap rj AUTO LOCK selector (p. 43) tj LOCK switch (p. 15) rk WHT BAL button (p. 49) tk POWER switch (p. 15) rl AUDIO LEVEL button (p. 51) tl START/STOP button (p. 15) t; MENU button (p. 107) y; SHUTTER SPEED button (p. 45) ta SEL/PUSH EXEC dial (p. 107) ya Access lamp (p. 117) Fastening the grip strap Attaching the shoulder strap Attach the shoulder strap supplied with your camcorder to the hooks for the shoulder strap. Fasten the grip strap firmly. 165
  • 166. Identifying the parts and controls ys ua yd us yf ud yg uf yh ug yj uh yk uj yl uk u; ul i; ys Carrying handle uf Microphone (p. 94) yd Remote sensor ug S VIDEO ID-2 jack (p. 30, 33, 73, 87, 128) yf Camera recording lamp (p. 15) uh VIDEO ID-2 jack (p. 30, 33, 73, 87, 128) yg CUSTOM PRESET button (p. 53) uj AUDIO L/R jack (p. 30, 73, 87, 94) yh Viewfinder adjustment lever (p. 19) uk DV IN/OUT jack (p. 74, 89, 129) This “i.LINK” mark is a trademark of yj Hook for removing the viewfinder Sony Corporation and indicates that this (p. 157) product is in agreement with IEEE 1394- yk EJECT switch (p. 14) 1995 specifications and their revisions. yl DC IN jack (p. 10) The DV IN/OUT jack is i.LINK u; Tripod receptacle compatible. Make sure that the length of the tripod ul LANC jack screw is less than 6.5 mm (9/32 inch). LANC stands for Local Application Otherwise, you cannot attach the tripod Control Bus System. The LANC securely and the screw may damage control jack is used for controlling the your camcorder. tape transport of video equipment and ua Intelligent accessory shoe peripherals connected to it. This jack has the same function as the jack indicated us MIC/LINE switch (p. 93) as CONTROL L or REMOTE. ud MIC jack (PLUG IN POWER) (p. 93) i; i (headphones) jack Connect an external microphone (not When you use headphones, the speaker supplied). This jack also accepts a “plug- on your camcorder is silent. in-power” microphone. When using a “plug-in-power” microphone, set the MIC/LINE swithc to MIC, when using a non-“plug-in- power” microphone or audio 166 equipment, set the MIC/LINE switch to LINE.
  • 167. Identifying the parts and controls Remote Commander The buttons that have the same name on the Remote Commander as on your camcorder function identically to the buttons on your camcorder. 1 2 9 3 0 4 5 qa 6 qs 7 8 qd 1 Transmitter 9 DATA CODE button (p. 27) Point toward the remote sensor to Quick Reference 0 START/STOP button (p. 15) control your camcorder after turning on your camcorder. qa Power zoom button (p. 20) 2 ZERO SET MEMORY button (p. 63) qs ./> buttons (p. 64, 66, 67, 69) 3 PHOTO button (p. 31, 120) qd AUDIO DUB button (p. 95) 4 DISPLAY button (p. 27) 5 Memory control buttons (p. 125, 132) 6 SEARCH MODE button (p. 64, 66, 67, 69) 7 Video control buttons (p. 29) 8 REC button (p. 87)/MARK button (p. 83) 167
  • 168. Identifying the parts and controls To prepare the Remote Commander Insert two size AA (R6) batteries by matching the + and – polarities on the batteries to the + – marks inside the battery compartment. Notes on the Remote Commander •Point the remote sensor away from strong light sources such as direct sunlight or overhead lighting. Otherwise, the Remote Commander may not function properly. •Your camcorder works in the commander mode VTR 2. Commander modes 1, 2 and 3 are used to distinguish your camcorder from other Sony VCRs to avoid remote control misoperation. If you use another Sony VCR in the commander mode VTR 2, we recommend changing the commander mode or covering the sensor of the VCR with black paper. Display window 2 1 3 1 Remaining battery time indicator (p. 10)/Tape counter (p. 63)/Memory counter (p. 133)/Time code indicator (p. 21)/Self-diagnosis indicator (p. 152) 2 FULL charge indicator (p. 10) 3 Remianing battery indicator (p. 10) 168
  • 169. Identifying the parts and controls Operation indicators 1 qh 2 qj 3 qk 4 ql 1 2 0 min S T BY 0:1 2:3 4 5 W T 1 2 0 min w; ST I L L Z ERO SE T 6 1 6 : 9 W I DE MEMORY wa NEG . ART END 7 SEARCH ws 8 AUTO wd 9 6 0 AWB DV I N wf F11 0 dB ND1 1 6B I T 0 100–0019 wg JUL 4 2000 1 2 : 0 5 : 5 6 AM qa wh qs wj qd wk qf wl qg Quick Reference 1 Cassette memory indicator (p. 143) Image quality mode indicator (p. 118) 2 Remaining battery time indicator (p. 21) qk Warning indicators (p. 153) 3 Zoom indicator (p. 20)/Exposure ql Tape counter indicator (p. 63)/Time indicator (p. 44)/Data file name code indicator (p. 21)/Self-diagnosis indicator (p. 115) indicator (p. 152)/Photo mode indicator (p. 31)/Image number 4 Digital effect indicator (p. 40)/FADER indicator (p. 133) indicator (p. 37)/MEMORY MIX indicator (p. 125) w; Remaining tape indicator (p. 21)/ Memory playback indicator (p. 133) 5 16:9WIDE indicator (p. 36)/PROG. SCAN indicator (p. 34) wa ZERO SET MEMORY indicator (p. 63)/ FRAME REC indicator (p. 61)/Interval 6 Picture effect indicator (p. 39) recording indicator (p. 59) 7 ND filter indicator (p. 46) ws END SEARCH indicator (p. 25) 8 Custom preset indicator (p. 53) wd DV IN indicator (p. 90)/A/VtDV OUT 9 Data code indicator (p. 28) indicator 0 LCD bright indicator (p. 18)/Volume wf Audio mode indicator (p. 111) indicator (p. 26) wg Data file name indicator qa Date indicator This indicator appears when the qs PROGRAM AE indicator (p. 55) MEMORY MIX functions work. qd Backlight indicator (p. 22)/Spot light wh Audio input level/Time indicator indicator (p. 23) wj Continuous mode indicator (p. 122) qf SteadyShot OFF indicator (p. 108) wk Video flash ready indicator qg Manual focus/Infinity indicator (p. 58) This indicator appears when you use the video flash light (not supplied). qh Recording mode indicator (p. 111) wl Self-timer indicator (p. 24) qj Standby/Recording indicator (p. 15)/ 169 Video control mode indicator (p. 29)/
  • 170. Quick Function Guide Functions to adjust exposure (in the recording mode) •In insufficient light Low lux mode (p. 55) •In dark environments such as sunset, fireworks, or Sunset & moon mode (p. 55) general night views •Shooting backlit subjects BACK LIGHT (p. 22) •In spotlight, such as at the theater or a formal event SPOT LIGHT (p. 23) Functions to give images more impact (in the recording mode) •Smooth transition between scenes FADER (p. 37) •Taking a still picture PHOTO (p. 31, 120) •Digital processing of images PICTURE EFFECT (p. 39)/ DIGITAL EFFECT (p. 40) •Superimposing a title TITLE (p. 97) Functions to give a natural appearance to your recordings (in the recording mode) •Preventing deterioration of picture quality in digital D ZOOM [MENU] (p. 107) zoom •Focusing manually Manual focus (p. 58) •Recording fast-moving subjects Sports lesson mode (p. 55) Functions to be used in editing (in the recording mode) •Watching the picture on a wide-screen TV Wide mode (p. 36) •Viewing images using a personal computer “Memory Stick” (p. 115) Functions to be used after recording (in the playback mode) •Digital processing of recorded images PICTURE EFFECT (p. 71)/ DIGITAL EFFECT (p. 72) •Displaying the date/time or various settings when Data code (p. 28) you recorded •Quickly locating a desired scene Zero set memory (p. 63) •Searching for scenes having a title Title search (p. 66) •Searching for scenes recorded in the photo mode Photo search (p. 69) •Scanning scenes recorded in the photo mode Photo scan (p. 70) •Playing back monaural sound or sub sound HiFi SOUND [MENU] (p. 107) 170
  • 171. Index Full charge ............................. 10 Power zoom ........................... 20 A, B Grip strap ............................. 165 Print mark ............................ 142 A/V connecting cable Guide frame ........................... 35 PROGRAM AE ...................... 55 ................................ 30, 73, 87 Headphones jack ................ 166 Progressive ............................ 34 AC power adaptor ................ 10 Heads .................................... 157 Adjusting shutter speed ...... 45 HiFi SOUND ....................... 109 Adjusting viewfinder ........... 19 R, S AE SHIFT ............................... 53 Rec Review ............................ 25 Audio dubbing ...................... 93 I, J, K, L Recording level ..................... 51 AUDIO LEVEL ..................... 51 i.LINK ................................... 166 Recording time ...................... 11 AUDIO MIX ........................ 109 Image protection ................. 138 Remaining battery time Audio mode .......................... 111 Image quality mode ........... 118 indicator .............................. 21 AUTO SHTR ........................ 108 INDEX MARK ....................... 62 Remaining tape indicator .... 21 BACK LIGHT ........................ 22 INDEX (Multiple) Remote Commander .......... 167 Battery pack ............................. 9 display ............................... 133 Remote control jack (LANC) BEEP ..................................... 113 Index search ........................... 64 ............................................ 166 “InfoLITHIUM” battery ...... 10 Remote sensor ..................... 164 Intelligent accessory shoe .... 94 RESET ................................... 151 C, D Interval recording ................. 59 S VIDEO jack ........... 30, 73, 87 Camera chromakey ............ 124 JPEG ...................................... 115 SEL/PUSH EXEC dial ....... 107 Cassette memory ........... 6, 143 Labeling a cassette .............. 103 Self-diagnosis display ........ 152 Charging battery ................... 10 LANC ................................... 166 Self-timer ................ 24, 32, 123 Charging vanadium-lithium LCD screen ............................ 17 Serial port adaptor .............. 134 battery ............................... 158 LUMINANCEKEY ............... 40 Skip scan ................................ 29 Clock set ............................... 114 Slide show ............................ 137 COLOR BAR ....................... 113 Slow playback ....................... 29 Quick Reference Connection M, N Spotlight mode ...................... 23 (dubbing a tape) ............. 73 STEADYSHOT .................... 108 Main sound .......................... 109 (viewing on TV) ............. 30 Stereo tape ........................... 144 Manual adjustment .............. 43 Continuous .......................... 121 STILL ...................................... 40 Manual focus ......................... 58 Custom preset ....................... 53 Sub sound ............................ 109 Memory chromakey ........... 124 Cut recording ........................ 61 Memory luminancekey ...... 124 Data code ............................... 28 Memory mix ........................ 124 Date search ............................ 67 T, U, V Memory overlap ................. 124 Date/time indicator ............. 28 Memory photo recording .. 120 Tape counter .......................... 63 DEMO ................................... 112 “Memory Stick” .................. 115 Tape photo recording ........... 31 DIGITAL EFFECT ................. 40 Menu settings ...................... 107 Telephoto ............................... 20 Digital program editing ....... 75 MIC (PLUG IN POWER) ..... 93 Time code ............................... 21 DISPLAY ................................ 27 Mirror mode .......................... 17 Title ......................................... 97 DOT ........................................ 37 Moisture condensation ...... 156 Title search ............................. 66 Dual sound track tape ........ 144 MONOTONE ........................ 37 TRAIL ..................................... 40 Dubbing a tape ...................... 73 ND filter ................................. 46 Transition ............................... 16 DV connecting cable ............. 74 Normal charge ...................... 10 TV color system .................. 155 NTSC system ....................... 155 E W, X, Y, Z EDITSEARCH ....................... 25 O, P, Q Warning indicators ............. 153 END SEARCH ................ 25, 29 OLD MOVIE .......................... 40 White balance ........................ 49 Exposure ................................ 44 Operation indicators .......... 169 Wide mode ............................. 36 External microphone (not OVERLAP .............................. 37 Wide-angle ............................. 20 supplied) ........................... 166 Photo scan .............................. 70 WIPE ....................................... 37 Photo search .......................... 69 WORLD TIME ..................... 112 PICTURE EFFECT ................ 39 Write-protect tab ................... 14 F, G, H Picture search ........................ 29 Zebra pattern ......................... 47 Fade in/out ............................ 37 Playback pause ...................... 29 Zero set memory function ... 63 FADER .................................... 37 Power sources Zoom ...................................... 20 FLASH MOTION .................. 40 (battery pack) ................... 9 FOCUS .................................... 58 (car battery) .................... 13 Format .................................. 110 (house current) ............... 13 171
  • 172. Sony Corporation Printed in Japan